Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout01-27-20 City Commission Packet Materials - C9. Construction Agreement with Lutey Construction-The Craftsman, Inc. for Stiff Bldg. Renov. EXHIBIT H2ALFRED STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING RENOVATION City of Bozeman PROJECT MANUAL December 1, 2019 115 East Oak Street Bozeman Montana 59715 www.arch118.com 406-404-1777 Section 00100 CALL FOR BIDS Page 1 of 2 CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA C A L L F O R B I D S NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the City of Bozeman, Montana, is accepting sealed bids for: ALFRED STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING RENOVATION Separate sealed bids for renovation of the Alfred Stiff Professional Building will be received by the City Clerk at the office of City Hall, 121 North Rouse Ave., P.O. Box 1230, Bozeman, Montana 59771-1230 until 2:00 p.m., local time, DECEMBER 19, 2019 and then publicly opened and read aloud. Please write the name of the project on the front of the sealed bid. The physical address is: City Clerk’s Office, Suite 200, City Hall, 121 No. Rouse Avenue, Bozeman, Montana. The mailing address is: City Clerk’s Office, Suite 200, City Hall, P.O. Box 1230, Bozeman, Montana 59771. Bids must be received before 2:00 p.m., local time, DECEMBER 19, 2019. Original copies must be submitted- no faxed or electronic bids will be accepted. Bids will be opened and read following the close of bids. The project work is generally described as follows (the “Work”): The Work includes exterior asphalt and concrete improvements, including new ADA access ramp, steel staircase upgrade. The Work includes the replacement of interior doors and hardware. The Work includes the interior renovation of offices, multi-purpose spaces and public spaces. The Work includes necessary mechanical, electrical, and fire sprinkler system upgrades and modifications. Bidding Documents will be distributed to various Montana builder’s exchanges. Bidding Documents will be available from the Architect in electronic PDF format. For access to electronic documents, bidders should contact Architecture 118; 115 East Oak Street; Bozeman, Montana 59715; (406) 404-1777. Questions and other inquiries regarding the Bidding Documents should be directed to Mike Wiseman at Architecture 118. There will be a Pre-Bid Conference at the Alfred Stiff Professional Building, 20 E. Olive Street, Bozeman, MT 59715 at 1:30 PM, Wednesday December 11, 2019. Interested CONTRACTORS are encouraged to attend or send a representative. CONTRACTOR and any of the CONTRACTOR’S subcontractors doing work on this project will be required to obtain registration with the Montana Department of Labor and Industry (DLI). Forms for registration are available from the Department of Labor and Industry, P.O. Box 8011, Section 00100 CALL FOR BIDS Page 2 of 2 1805 Prospect Avenue, Helena, Montana 59604-8011. Information on registration can be obtained by calling 1-406-444-7734. CONTRACTOR is not required to have registered with the DLI prior to bidding on this project, but must have registered prior to execution of the Construction Agreement. All laborers and mechanics employed by CONTRACTOR or subcontractors in performance of the construction work shall be paid wages at rates as may be required by the laws of Gallatin County and the state of Montana. Discrimination in the performance of any contract awarded under this invitation on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability is prohibited. This prohibition shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the awarded entity’s employees and to all subcontracts. Every entity submitting under this invitation must sign and return the required non-discrimination affirmation. Each bid or proposal must be accompanied by a Certified Check, Cashier’s Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Bozeman, Montana, in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid. Successful BIDDERS, shall furnish an approved Performance Bond and a Labor and Materials Payment Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract amount. Insurance as required shall be provided by the successful BIDDER(s) and a certificate(s) of that insurance shall be provided. No bid may be withdrawn after the scheduled time for the public opening of bids, which is at 2:00 p.m., local time, DECEMBER 19, 2019. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals received, to waive informalities, to postpone the award of the contract for a period of not to exceed sixty (60) days, and to accept the lowest responsive and responsible bid which is in the best interest of the OWNER. The Contractor is required to be an Equal Opportunity Employer. DATED at Bozeman, Montana, this 27 th day of November, 2019. Robin Crough City Clerk City of Bozeman Published Bozeman, Montana, Sunday, December 1, 2019 Sunday, December 8, 2019 Instruction to Bidders Page 1 of 8 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BIDS: All Bids must be made on the forms provided in the Contract Documents. All Bids must be legibly written in ink, with total Bid amount given in words and figures. No alterations by erasures or interlineations will be permitted in Bids or in the printed forms. Each Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to the City Clerk, City Hall, 121 N. Rouse Avenue, P.O. Box 1230, Bozeman, Montana 59771-1230, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope with the words: ALFRED STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING RENOVATION Bids shall be strictly in accordance with the prescribed form. Any modifications thereof or deviations therefrom may be considered as sufficient cause for rejection. Bids carrying riders or qualifications to the Bid being submitted may be rejected as irregular. BID SECURITY: To be considered, the Bid must be accompanied by a bid security unconditionally payable to the City of Bozeman for ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the bid. Each Bidder shall expressly covenant in the Bid that if the Bidder is awarded the contract, the Bidder will, within thirty (30) days after the Bid is awarded, enter into a formal contract and give an approved performance bond and a labor and materials payment bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the contract. Bid security must be provided in a form specified in §18-1-203, MCA, which includes, but is not limited to, certified check, cashier’s check, bank draft, bid bond, guaranty bond, or surety bond. Bid security through a bid, guaranty or surety bond must be issued by a surety company authorized to do business in the State of Montana. The Bid security protects and indemnifies the City against the failure or refusal of the successful Bidder to timely enter into the contract. SIGNATURE OF BIDDERS: Each Bid must be signed in ink by the Bidder with the Bidder’s full name and with its business address or place of residence. In case of a firm or partnership, the name and residence of each member must be inserted. In case the Bid is submitted by, or on behalf of, a corporation, it must be signed in the name of such corporation by an official who is authorized to bind the corporation, and who shall also affix the corporate seal of such corporation. The Bid of a corporation which is signed by a person other than a corporate officer must be accompanied by a Power of Attorney showing that person's authority. ONLY ONE PROPOSAL: No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Two Bids under different names will not be received from one firm or association. RESPONSIBILITIES OF AGENT: Any person signing a Bid as the agent of another, or of others, may be required to submit satisfactory evidence of the authority to do so. The title of the person(s) executing the Bid or Agreement shall be clearly indicated beneath his signature. TITLE: The position title of any person executing the Bid and Agreement shall be clearly indicated beneath the authorized person’s signature. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS: Bidders may be required to submit satisfactory evidence that they have a practical knowledge of the particular work bid upon, and that they have the Instruction to Bidders Page 2 of 8 necessary financial resources to complete the proposed work. In determining the lowest responsible Bid, City will consider the following elements: whether the Bidder involved (a) maintains a permanent place of business; (b) has adequate plant and equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously; (c) has a suitable financial status to meet obligations incident to the work; and (d) has appropriate technical experience and experience in projects of comparable scope and complexity that were satisfactorily completed. Each Bidder may be required to show that former work performed by it has been handled in such a manner that there are no just or proper claims pending against such work. No Bidder will be acceptable if the Bidder is engaged on any other work which impairs its ability to finance its Agreement with the City. The Bidder shall demonstrate its ability by meeting all requirements herein stipulated, when requested. Bidder is not deemed a responsible bidder if Bidder is delinquent in payment of property taxes or special improvement district assessments for at least six (6) months. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The principle Contract Documents for this Project include, but are not limited to, the following: Call For Bids Instructions To Bidders Notices Bidders Checklist Bid Form Non-Discrimination Affirmation Form Notice of Award Construction Agreement Performance Bond Payment Bond List of Subcontractors Schedule of Values Montana Prevailing Wage Rates for Building Construction Services; January 26, 2019 Technical Specifications Construction Drawings EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE: Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder must: (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with location conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; (c) become familiar with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents. On request, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such investigations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Any administrative requirements Instruction to Bidders Page 3 of 8 and associated costs of such investigations are the responsibility of the Bidder. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Bidder in performing the Work are identified in the specifications or on the drawings. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of this section and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the work. Where logs of test borings are included in the contract plans, such logs do not constitute a part of the Agreement and are included only for the convenience of the Bidder and do not relieve the Bidder of its duties under this section or of any other responsibility under the Construction Agreement. No information derived from any inspection of records of investigation or compilation thereof made by the City will in any way relieve the Bidder from properly performing its obligations under the Construction Agreement. INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: If any person contemplating submitting a Bid for this project is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications, or other proposed Contract Documents, such person may submit to the City a written request for an interpretation thereof. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Any interpretation of the proposed documents will be made only by an addendum duly issued and a copy of any such addendum will be mailed or delivered to each person requesting a set of such documents. TIME OF COMPLETION: The time of completion of the Work is a basic consideration of the Agreement. It will be necessary that the Bidder satisfy the City of the Bidder’s ability to complete the Work within the stipulated time. ADDENDA: Any addenda issued during the time of bidding, or forming a part of the Contract Documents loaned to the Bidder for the preparation of a proposal, shall be covered in the Bid and shall be made a part of the Construction Agreement. Receipt of each addendum shall be acknowledged in the Bid. Any Bid in which all issued addenda are not acknowledged will be considered incomplete and will not be read. Instruction to Bidders Page 4 of 8 PROPOSAL: The Bidder shall submit his proposal on the forms provided in these Contract Documents. Proposals shall be in a sealed envelope and addressed to: City Clerk City Hall 121 N. Rouse Avenue P.O. Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 The envelope shall also contain the following information: Name of Project: ALFRED STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING RENOVATION Name of Bidder: Montana Certificate of Contractor Registration No. Acknowledge Receipt of Addendum No.: , , , . In the lower left hand corner of the envelope print or type: BID DOCUMENTS - DO NOT OPEN UNTIL 2:00 P.M., DECEMBER 19, 2019. Proposals shall be made in accordance with the following instructions: A. Bids shall be made in ink upon the unaltered Bid Proposal Form supplied with these documents. B. All blank spaces must be properly filled. C. The total Bid price must be stated in both writing and in figures. In case of a discrepancy between unit price and total Bid price, the unit prices or lump sum prices shall be used in computing the total Bid price. D. The proposal form shall contain no additions, conditions, stipulations, erasures, or other irregularities. E. The proposal must acknowledge receipt of all addenda issued. F. The proposal must be signed in ink and display the Bidder's name, address, and current Montana Contractor's License Number. SIGNING OF BIDS: Bids which are not signed by individuals making them shall have attached thereto a power of attorney evidencing authority to sign the bid in the name of the person for whom it is signed. Bids which are signed for a co-partnership shall be signed by all of the co-partners or by an attorney- Instruction to Bidders Page 5 of 8 in-fact. If signed by an attorney-in-fact, there shall be attached to the Bid a power of attorney evidencing authority to sign the bid. Bids which are signed for a corporation shall have the correct corporate name thereof signed in handwriting or in typewriting and the signature of the president or other authorized officer of the corporation shall be manually written below the written or typewritten corporate name following the work: By: Corporate Seal Title: If Bids are signed for any other legal entity, the authority of the person signing for such legal entity should be attached to the Bid. BID REQUIREMENTS: The Bidder is expected to base its bid on materials and equipment complying fully with the plans and specifications and, in the event the Bidder names in its bid materials or equipment which do not conform, the Bidder will be responsible for furnishing materials and equipment which fully conform at no charge in its bid price. Before submitting a proposal, each Bidder should read the complete Contract Documents (including all addenda, if such exist), specifications and plans, including all related documents containing herein, all of which contain provisions applicable not only to the successful Bidder, but also to such Bidder’s subcontractors. BID QUANTITIES: Bidders must satisfy themselves by personal examination of the locations of the proposed Work and by such other means as they may prefer as to the correctness of any quantities. WITHDRAWAL OF BID: No Bidder may withdraw any bid for a period as specified in the Request For Bid after the date and hour set for the opening declared herein. Prior to that time, Bidder may withdraw a Bid by written request. The request to withdraw a bid must be signed in the same manner and by the same person or persons who signed the Bid. ACCEPTANCE AND REJECTION OF THE BIDS: The City reserves the right to accept or reject the Bids, or portions of Bids if denoted in the Bid as separate schedules, and to award more than one Bid or schedule for the same Bid if any of the aforementioned combination of Bids or schedules will be in the best interest of the City. The City reserves the right to waive irregularities in any Bid submitted, or reject nonconforming, non-responsive or conditional Bids and to correct arithmetical errors in the Bid prior to comparison. SUBCONTRACTORS: Within thirty (30) days after Bids are opened, the apparent low Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall submit a list of all Subcontractors the Bidder expects to use in Instruction to Bidders Page 6 of 8 the work. An experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification shall be furnished for each named subcontractor, if requested by the City. If the City or its representative engineer or architect after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, they may, before giving the Notice of Award, request the apparent low Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute. If the substitution results in an increase in the Bid, a corresponding adjustment will be made in the contract price. If the apparent low Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the contract may not be awarded to such Bidder, but Bidder's refusal to substitution will not constitute grounds for forfeiture of Bid Security. Any subcontractor so listed and to whom City or its representative engineer or architect does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to the City and its representative engineer or architect. Bidder shall not be required to employ any subcontractor against whom the Bidder has reasonable objection. The use of subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by City prior to the Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the work unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the City. AWARD OF CONTRACT: If the Construction Agreement is to be awarded, City will award the Construction Agreement to the responsible Bidder whose Bid is responsive and conforms with all material terms and conditions of the bidding documents and proposed Contract Documents, is lowest in price, is in the best interest of the project and the City, and other factors considered. The award will be based on the lowest responsive cumulative base Bid plus any added alternate schedules the City determines to include with the project. If the Construction Agreement is awarded, the award will be made within the period specified in the Request For Bid. The successful Bidder will be notified by letter mailed to the address shown on the Bid that the bid has been accepted and that Bidder has been awarded the contract. CANCELLATION OF AWARD: The City reserves the right to cancel the award of any Agreement at any time and for any reason or no reason before the complete execution of the Agreement by all parties without any liability against the City. RETURN OF BID GUARANTEE: All Bid guarantees, except those of the three lowest Bidders, will be returned immediately following the opening and checking of the Bids. The Bid guarantees of the unsuccessful of the three lowest Bidders will be returned within ten (10) days following the award of the Agreement. The Bid guarantee of the Bidder to whom the contract is awarded will be returned when said Bidder has executed an Agreement and filed satisfactory Performance and Payment Bonds as hereinafter stipulated. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS: The Bidder to whom the Construction Agreement is awarded will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond (the “Bonds”) in favor of the City. The Bonds must be in an amount equal to one-hundred percent (100%) of the Construction Agreement amount. The Bonds shall be executed on the forms bound herein, signed by a surety company authorized to Instruction to Bidders Page 7 of 8 do business in the State of Montana, and acceptable as a surety to the City and countersigned by a Montana Resident Agent. With the Bonds, there shall be filed with the City one copy of Power of Attorney certified to include the date of the Bond. EXECUTION AND APPROVAL OF CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT: The Construction Agreement shall be signed by the successful Bidder and returned, together with the Bonds, within the time shown on the Bid. If the Agreement is not executed by the City within fifteen (15) days following receipt from the Bidder of the signed Construction Agreement and Bonds, the Bidder shall have the right to withdraw its Bid without penalty. No Construction Agreement shall be considered as effective until it has been fully executed by all of the parties thereto. INSURANCE: The successful Bidder, as part of the Construction Agreement, shall provide liability insurance and other insurances and maintain required workers’ compensation coverage all as indicated in the Construction Agreement. Bidder shall provide proof of these through either a certificate of insurance or a current copy of Bidder’s policy documents as required by the City. FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT: Failure to execute the Construction Agreement and furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond shall be just cause for annulment of the award. In the event of such annulment of the award, the Bid guarantee shall be forfeited to the City, not as a penalty but as liquidation of damages sustained. Award may then be made to the next lowest responsible and qualified Bidder, or the work may be re-advertised as the City may decide. PAYMENTS: Payment for all Work performed under the Agreement will be made by the City within the time period specified in and in accordance with the procedures outlined herein. When the Work extends beyond thirty (30) days, progress payments will be made monthly for any work accomplished during the preceding month, but subject to retainage as specified elsewhere. PREVAILING WAGE RATES: In all public works contracts with the City, contractors and their subcontractors shall pay for each job classification the standard prevailing wage rate, including fringe benefits. The standard prevailing wage rate as used herein means the standard prevailing rate of wages in the locality where the work is to be performed as determined by the Montana Commissioner of Labor & Industry pursuant to §18-2-402, MCA, and as bound herein to the proposed Construction Agreement. The Bidder and Bidder’s subcontractors are directed to the Montana Commissioner of Labor & Industry for information on the standard prevailing rate of wages applicable to this project within this area. POSTING: Contractor shall post in a prominent and accessible place on the site of the work a legible statement of all wages to be paid to the employees. Instruction to Bidders Page 8 of 8 LOCAL LABOR: Contractor shall give preference to the employment of Montana residents in accordance with applicable portions of Title 18, Chapter 2, Part 4, MCA. MONTANA CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS: No Bids will be considered that do not carry the Bidder's Certificate of Contractor's Registration number on the envelope containing the Bid and on the Bid. Information pertaining to the Montana Contractor Registration requirements may be obtained from the Montana State Department of Revenue, Helena, Montana. (1-406-444-7734) ADDITIONAL CONTRACTOR LICENSE FEE (MONTANA CONTRACTORS GROSS RECEIPTS TAX): In accordance with Title 15, Chapter 50, MCA, the City shall withhold, in addition to other amounts withheld as provided by law or specified herein, 1 percent (1%) of all payments due the Contractor and shall transmit such moneys to the Montana Department of Revenue. BIDDER PREFERENCE: In accordance with the provisions of Title 18, Chapter 1, Part 1, MCA, a preference will be given to the lowest responsible Bidder who is a resident of the State of Montana over a nonresident Bidder from any state or country that enforces a preference in their state or country for their resident Bidders. The preference given to Montana resident Bidders will be equal to the preference given in the other state or country. This preference applies unless specifically prohibited by Federal laws or regulations. Products manufactured or produced in the State of Montana shall be preferred for use in all projects if such products are comparable in price and quality. Further, wherever possible, products manufactured and produced in the State which are suitable substitutes for products manufactured or produced outside the State and comparable in price, quality and performance shall be preferred for use in this project. Preference regarding these products shall be in accordance with the laws of the State of Montana. CITY OF BOZEMAN BUSINESS LICENSE: All Bidders conducting work within the City of Bozeman are required to have a current Business License. Applications for Business Licenses may be obtained at City Hall, 121 N. Rouse Avenue, Bozeman, Montana. NON-DISCRIMINATION: In accordance with law, Bidder shall agree not to discriminate against any client, employee, or applicant for employment or for services because of race, color, religion, creed, political ideas, sex, age, marital status, physical or mental disability, or national origin, or actual or perceived sexual orientation or gender identity. It is further understood that any vendor who is in violation of this clause shall be barred forthwith from receiving awards of any purchase from the City of Bozeman unless a satisfactory showing is made that discriminatory practices have ceased, and the recurrence of such acts is unlikely. Every entity submitting under this invitation must sign and return the required non- discrimination affirmation form. NOTICE REGARDING PERMITS The Owner has submitted plans and specifications to the Building Department for the purpose of permit review. The Owner is responsible for, and will pay, the plan review fee and any impact fees required for the Project. The Contractor will be responsible for, and will pay for, all required building construction permits. Bidders shall in- clude the cost of all required building construction permits in their Bid proposals. NOTICE REGARDING REFERENCES Bidders being considered for contract award shall be prepared, on request by the Owner, to submit to the Owner not less than one, or more than three, professional references for projects of similar size and scope completed in the last three years. NOTICE REGARDING CONTRACT AWARD It will be necessary for the Commission of the City of Bozeman to approve the award of this contract to the success- ful bidder. It is anticipated that the Commission of the City of Bozeman will take action on this matter during a regu- larly scheduled meeting held on January 13, 2020. Page 1 of 1 BIDDER’S CHECKLIST Please utilize the following Bidder’s Checklist before submitting your bid. 1) Original Bid Bond Enclosed? (Personal checks, business checks, and faxed copies are not acceptable.) 2) Bid Proposal: a. Arithmetic Checked? b. Bid amounts agree with math calculations? c. All Addenda acknowledged on proposal sheet and cover? d. Signature portion completely filled out? e. Bid Proposal intact in Contract Documents DO NOT REMOVE!!!! f. Non-Discrimination Affirmation form completed and signed? 3) Bid Envelope: a. Addressed properly? (See Article 1 – Bids, Instructions to Bidders) b. Contains the Contract Documents and Specifications booklet? c. Acknowledged Receipt of Addenda? d. Sealed? 4) Bid Submitted prior to required time at specified location? Be sure to seal your bid. Include project name, bid date/time, contractor name, contractor registration number, contractor fuel permit number, and acknowledgement of all addenda (by number) on the outside of the bid envelope. ALL BID DOCUMENTS AND BONDS MUST BE ORIGINALS. NO FAXED COPIES WILL BE ACCEPTED. BIDDER’S CHECKLIST Section 00300 BID FORMS Page 1 of 4 BID FORM ALFRED STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING RENOVATION CITY OF BOZEMAN BOZEMAN, MONTANA 59771 TO: City Clerk P.O. Box 1230 Bozeman, Montana 59771-1230 THE UNDERSIGNED BIDDER, having familiarized himself with the Work required by the Contract Documents, the site(s) where the work is to be performed, local labor conditions and all laws, regulations, municipal ordinances and other factors which may affect the performance of the Work, and having satisfied himself of the expense and difficulties attending performance of the work: HEREBY PROPOSES and agrees, if this bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement, in the form attached, to perform all work for the construction of ALFRED STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING RENOVATION, including the assumption of all obligations, duties, and responsibilities necessary for the successful completion of the contract and the furnishing of all materials and equipment required to be incorporated in, and form a permanent part of, the work; tools, equipment, supplies, transportation, facilities, labor, superintendence, and services required to perform the Work; Bonds, Insurance and Submittals; all as indicated or specified in the Contract Documents to be performed or furnished by Contractor within the time and for the prices set forth in the following schedules. The undersigned bidder agrees to be bound by this Bid for a period not to exceed that specified in the Invitation to Bid. The undersigned Bidder agrees to furnish the required Bonds and to enter into a contract within fifteen (15) calendar days after Owner's acceptance of this Bid, and further agrees to complete all Work within the time specified per schedule after commencement of the contract time as defined in the General Conditions. The allowed contract time is 180 calendar days unless approved otherwise by Owner. Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to Liquidated Damages which shall be as specified in Article 2.2 & 2.3 of the Agreement Form. The undersigned Bidder agrees that he has been afforded access to the construction site and has performed those independent site investigations as he deemed necessary. Section 00300 BID FORMS Page 2 of 4 The undersigned Bidder hereby certifies the following: A) That this Bid is genuine and is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, firm, or corporation, and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation; B) That he has not directly or indirectly solicited any other Bidder to put in a false or sham Bid; C) That he has not solicited or induced any person, firm, or corporation to refrain from bidding; D) That he has not sought by collusion to obtain for himself any advantage over any other Bidder or over the Owner. E) That he is not currently operating beyond the contract time on any previously awarded public works contract as defined and required by Article 15-50-203, MCA, as amended. The undersigned Bidder(s) either singularly or as a joint venture hereby certifies (certify) pursuant to Article 37-71-203, MCA, that he (they) is (are) duly and regularly licensed. BIDDER agrees to perform all the work described in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for the following stipulated sums: BASE BID BASE BID DOLLARS UNIT PRICE – CARPET TILE SEE SECTION 012000 3.1.A DOLLARS UNIT PRICE – PAINT SEE SECTION 012000 3.1.B DOLLARS UNIT PRICE – ROOM SIGNS SEE SECTION 012000 3.1.C DOLLARS Section 00300 BID FORMS Page 3 of 4 BASIS OF AWARD: If the contract is awarded, the Owner will award a single Contract in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject the Bids, or portions of the Bids denoted as separate schedules or alternates. The award will be made by the Owner on the basis of that Bid from the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder which, in the Owner’s sole and absolute judgment, will best serve the interest of the Owner. The undersigned Bidder acknowledged receipt of the following Addenda, which have been considered in preparation of this Bid: No. Dated No. Dated No. Dated No. Dated Submitted this day of , 2017. SIGNATURE OF BIDDER: Montana Contractor Registration Number Section 00300 BID FORMS Page 4 of 4 If an individual: doing business as If a Partnership: by , partner If a Corporation: (a) by Title (Seal & Attest) Business Address of Bidder: If Bidder is a joint venture, other party must sign below: Montana License Number and Class If an Individual: doing business as . If a Partnership: by Partner If a Corporation: (a) Corporation by Title (Seal & Attest) NON-DISCRIMINATION AFFIRMATION FORM _______________________________ [name of entity submitting] hereby affirms it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability in the performance of work performed for the city of Bozeman, if a contract is awarded to it, and also recognizes the eventual contract, if awarded, will contain a provision prohibiting discrimination as described above and that this prohibition shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the _____________________ [name of entity submitting] employees and to all subcontracts it enters into in performance of the agreement with the city of Bozeman. Signature of Bidder: _______________________________ Person authorized to sign on behalf of the bidder NOTICE OF AWARD Dated: TO: [insert name of successful bidder] ADDRESS: [insert successful bidder’s mailing address] PROJECT: City of Bozeman [insert simple project title] CONTRACT FOR: [insert brief statement of the project]. You are notified that your Bid dated [insert date of the successful bid], for the above Contract has been considered. You are the apparent Successful Bidder and have been awarded a Contract [insert brief statement on the work (same as above). The Contract Price of your Contract is: [write out the contract amount] Dollars ($[insert the numerical amount). You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of this Notice of Award, that is, by [insert date days after the award] . 1. You must deliver to the OWNER 3 fully executed counterparts of the Agreement. 2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in the Instruction to Bidders. 3. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Certificates of Insurance as specified in the Agreement. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle the City to consider your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award, and to declare your Bid Security forfeit. Within ten (10) days after you comply with these conditions, the City will return to you one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached. CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA ATTEST: BY: BY: (CITY MANAGER) (CITY CLERK) DATE: Page 1 of 28 Version 12 14 15 CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT This Construction Agreement is made this _ day of , 20 , by and between the CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA, a municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Montana, P.O. Box 1231, Bozeman, Montana 59771-1231 (“City”), and _, a , of , (“Contractor”). Recitals A. The City issued an Invitation to Bid for the construction project known as (“Construction Project”) pursuant to the requirements of all applicable statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances. B. The City analyzed all responses to the Invitation to Bid received pursuant to its standard practices and the requirements of all applicable statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances. C. The City awarded the bid to Contractor on , pursuant to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the covenants, agreements, representations, and warranties contained herein, the parties agree as follows: Agreement 1. Work to be Performed: a. A description of the Construction Project and Contractor’s duties is set forth in the Invitation to Bid and Bid Form as awarded and accepted by City and the Construction Documents for the [insert name of project], which are attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference, and the drawings, plans, and specifications provided by the City and its architects and engineers. The City’s Notice of Award is attached here as Exhibit A. Where a provision of any other portion of the Construction Documents conflicts with this Agreement, the terms and conditions of this Agreement shall control. b. Prior to the commencement of any work on the Construction Project, Contractor’s representatives and City’s representatives shall hold a meeting to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the scope of the Construction Project and duties of the Contractor. At this meeting, Contractor and City shall resolve any outstanding issues related to the plans, designs, drawings, and specifications. If the parties are unable to resolve these issues and the City fails, refuses, or is unable to approve the same, no work shall commence on the Construction Project until such issues are resolved and the City approves the related plans, designs, drawings, and specifications. Page 2 of 28 Version 12 14 15 c. Except as provided elsewhere in this Agreement, Contractor shall furnish all the labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services necessary to perform and complete the Construction Project. d. During work on the Construction Project, and as part of the final completion of the Construction Project, Contractor shall clean up the Project site, including the removal and satisfactory disposal of all waste, garbage, excess materials, equipment, temporary buildings, the removal or grading of all embankments made for construction purposes, the filling in of all excavations, and the performance of any other work necessary to restore the site to at least as good order and condition as at the commencement of the Construction Project. 2. City-Supplied Materials: The City may supply materials from time to time in furtherance of the Construction Project. Such materials will be noted as an addendum to this Agreement. 3. Time of Performance: a. Contractor shall begin the Construction Project after receiving a Notice to Proceed from City and shall complete the Construction Project within one-hundred-fifty (150) days of the starting date stated in the Notice to Proceed. After receiving the Notice to Proceed from the City Contractor shall develop a Construction Schedule for approval by the City which shall become part of this Agreement. [option: The various phases of the Construction Project shall be completed pursuant to the Construction Schedule attached hereto as Exhibit C and incorporated herein by this reference]. Time is of the essence of completion of all work and each phase of the Construction Project. b. The Construction Schedule is subject to the City’s approval. Contractor’s construction plan, methods of operation, materials used, and individuals and subcontractors employed (collectively “Contractor’s Resources”) are subject to the City’s approval at all times during the term of this Agreement, and must be such as to ensure the completion of the work in compliance with the deadlines set in the Construction Schedule during the term of this Agreement. In the event the City determines the Contractor’s Resources are inadequate to meet the approved Construction Schedule, the City may order the Contractor to accelerate its performance to give reasonable assurances of timely completion and quality results. Acceleration under this section shall not be deemed a Change Order as defined in Section 5b below and the Contractor shall receive no equitable adjustment for such acceleration. Nothing in this section shall be interpreted to relieve the Contractor of its duties and responsibilities to plan for and complete the work in a timely manner according to the Construction Schedule. 4. Liquidated Damages: If the Construction Project is not completed within the time provided by this Agreement, the City may deduct for each day the Construction Project remains uncompleted the sum of Two Hundred Fifty Dollars ($250.00) from the compensation Page 3 of 28 Version 12 14 15 hereinafter specified and retain that sum as payment for liquidated damages sustained by reason of the Contractor’s failure to complete the Construction Project on time. 5. Compensation: a. City shall pay to Contractor, and Contractor shall accept as full payment for the performance of this Agreement and the Construction Project, the amount of ($ ), as paid in accordance with Exhibit D, Compensation Schedule, attached hereto. b. If work not included within the original Construction Documents is requested by City, such additional work and the related compensation shall be agreed to in writing by both parties prior to commencement of the additional work (“Change Order”) pursuant to the Change of Work Specifications set forth on Exhibit E attached hereto. c. Monthly progress payments and final payment will be made only in accordance with the terms of a completed Compensation Schedule to be approved by the City’s Representative. All invoices must be submitted to the City’s Representative. d. City shall retain five percent (5%) of the total amount of compensation to be paid to the Contractor to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the timely completion of the Construction Project and any and all “punch list” items (“Retainage Amount”). The Retainage Amount shall be paid to Contractor thirty (30) days after the City’s final acceptance of the portion of work for which a separate price is stated in the specifications for the Construction Project. e. Upon acceptance of final payment and for other good and valuable consideration, Contractor shall and hereby does release and forever discharge City, its officers, agents, and employees of and from any and all claims, demands, actions, causes of action, obligations, and liabilities of every kind and character whatsoever, in law and in equity, whether now known or in the future discovered, arising from or related to this Agreement or the Construction Project that Contractor may have or assert against City, its officers, agents, and employees. 6. Inspection and Testing: a. City has the right to inspect and test any and all work performed by Contractor on the Construction Project. Contractor shall allow City and its agents access to the Construction Project at all times and shall provide every reasonable facility for the purpose of such inspection and testing, including temporarily discontinuing portions of the work or uncovering or taking down portions of the finished work. Any inspection and testing performed by the City and its agents is for the sole benefit of the City and shall not relieve the Contractor of its duty, responsibility, and obligation to ensure that the Page 4 of 28 Version 12 14 15 work strictly complies with the Agreement terms and conditions and all applicable laws and building and safety codes. City’s inspection and testing shall not be deemed or considered acceptance by the City of any portion of the Construction Project. City’s inspection and testing shall not serve to nullify, amend, or waive any warranties provided by the Contractor under this Agreement. b. Contractor shall, without charge, replace any material or correct any work found by the City or its agents to be defective or otherwise not in compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In the event Contractor fails to replace or correct any defective work or materials after reasonable written notice by the City to do so, the City may take such corrective action, either with its own materials and employees or by retaining any third party to do so, and deduct the cost and expense of such corrective action from the Contractor’s compensation. 7. Partial Utilization of Construction Project: City shall have the right to use or occupy any portion of the Construction Project that City and Contractor mutually agree is substantially completed and constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Construction Project for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remaining portions of the Construction Project. In the event City takes possession of any portion of the Construction Project, such possession shall not be deemed an acceptance of the Construction Project, in whole or in part. Contractor shall still be required to conduct any final testing of the portions in the possession of the City. City’s use of any portion of the Construction Project shall not be grounds for extensions of any construction deadlines or a change in the Contractor’s compensation. Contractor’s warranties shall run from the completion of the total Construction Project and not from the date the City may take possession of selected portions of the Construction Project. 8. Related Work at the Site: Nothing in this Agreement shall prevent or preclude City, through its own employees or by contract with any third party, from performing other work related to the Construction Project at the construction site; provided such related work is not otherwise addressed in this Agreement and provided such related work does not otherwise interfere with Contractor’s performance of this Agreement or the completion of the Construction Project. Contractor shall afford any City employee, agent or representative, or any third party under contract with the City to perform the related work, proper and safe access to the construction site, a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment, the opportunity to perform the related work, and shall properly coordinate the Contractor’s work on the Construction Project with the related work. 9. Contractor’s Warranties: Contractor represents and warrants as follows: a. Unless otherwise specified by the terms of this Agreement, all materials and equipment used by Contractor on the Construction Project shall be new and where not otherwise specified, of the most suitable grade for their intended uses. b. All workmanship and materials shall be of a kind and nature acceptable to the City. Page 5 of 28 Version 12 14 15 c. All equipment, materials, and labor provided to, on, or for the Construction Project must be free of defects and nonconformities in design, materials, and workmanship for a minimum period beginning with the commencement of the work on the Construction Project and ending one (1) year from the final completion and acceptance by the City of the Construction Project, regardless of whether such equipment, materials, or labor were supplied directly by Contractor or indirectly by Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers. Other express warranties on materials that provide for a warranty period longer than one year apply for the period of that express warranty and are not reduced by this provision. Upon receipt of City’s written notice of a defective or nonconforming condition during the warranty period, Contractor shall take all actions, including redesign and replacement, to correct the defective or nonconforming condition within a time frame acceptable to the City and at no additional cost to the City. Contractor shall also, at its sole cost, perform any tests required by City to verify that such defective or nonconforming condition has been corrected. Contractor warrants the corrective action taken against defective and nonconforming conditions for a period of an additional one (1) year from the date of City’s acceptance of the corrective action. d. Contractor and its sureties are liable for the satisfaction and full performance of all warranties. e. Contractor shall give its personal attention to the faithful prosecution of the completion of the Construction Project and Contractor, or its duly authorized representative assigned to serve as the Construction Project Manager, shall be personally present at the site of the Construction Project during working hours for the term of this Agreement until the completion of the Construction Project. f. Contractor shall have a complete, accurate, and up-to-date set of construction plans, drawings, and specifications on site at all times. g. Contractor has examined all available records and made field examinations of the site of the Construction Project. Contractor has knowledge of the field conditions to be encountered during the Construction Project. Contractor has knowledge of the types and character of equipment necessary for the work, the types of materials needed and the sources of such materials, and the condition of the local labor market. h. Contractor is responsible for the safety of the work and shall maintain all lights, guards, signs, temporary passages, or other protections necessary for that purpose at all times. i. All work must be performed at Contractor’s risk, and Contractor shall promptly repair or replace all damage and loss at its sole cost and expense regardless of the reason or cause of the damage or loss; provided, however, should the damage or loss Page 6 of 28 Version 12 14 15 be caused by an intentional or negligent act of the City, the risk of such loss shall be placed on the City. j. Contractor is responsible for any loss or damage to materials, tools, or other articles used or held for use in the completion of performance of the Construction Project. k. Contractor’s performance must be without damage or disruption to any other work or property of the City or of others and without interference with the operation of existing machinery or equipment. l. Title to all work, materials, and equipment covered by any payment of Contractor’s compensation by City, whether directly incorporated into the Construction Project or not, passes to City at the time of payment, free and clear of all liens and encumbrances. 10. Delays and Extensions of Time: If Contractor’s performance of this Agreement is prevented or delayed by any unforeseen cause beyond the control of the Contractor, including acts or omissions of the City, Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of the commencement of any such delay, give the City written notice thereof. Further, Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of the termination of such delay, give the City written notice of the total actual duration of the delay. If the City is provided with these required notices and if the City determines that the cause of the delay was not foreseeable, was beyond the control of the Contractor, and was not a result of the fault or negligence of the Contractor, then the City will determine the total duration of the delay and extend the time for performance of the Agreement accordingly. Unless the delay is caused by the intentional interference of the City with the Contractor’s performance, Contractor shall make no claim for damages or any other claim other than for an extension of time as herein provided by reason of any delays. 11. Suspension: a. The City may, by written notice to the Contractor and at its convenience for any reason, suspend the performance of all or any portion of the work to be performed on the Construction Project (“Notice of Suspension”). The Notice of Suspension shall set forth the time of suspension, if then known to the City. During the period of suspension, Contractor shall use its best efforts to minimize costs associated with the suspension. b. Upon Contractor’s receipt of any Notice of Suspension, unless the notice requires otherwise, Contractor shall: (1) immediately discontinue work on the date and to the extent specified in the Notice of Suspension; (2) place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services, or equipment; (3) promptly make every reasonable effort to obtain suspension upon terms satisfactory to City of all orders, subcontracts, and rental agreements to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work suspended; and (4) continue to protect and maintain the Project, including those portions on which work has been suspended. Page 7 of 28 Version 12 14 15 c. As compensation for the suspended work, Contractor will be reimbursed for the following costs, reasonably incurred, without duplication of any item, and to the extent that such costs directly resulted from the suspension: (1) a standby charge paid during the period of suspension which will be sufficient to compensate Contractor for keeping, to the extent required in the Notice of Suspension, Contractor’s organization and equipment committed to the Project in standby status; (2) all reasonably incurred costs for the demobilization of Contractor’s and subcontractor’s crews and equipment; (3) an equitable amount to reimburse Contractor for the cost to protect and maintain the Project during the period of suspension; and (4) an equitable adjustment in the cost of performing the remaining portion of the work post-suspension if, as a direct result of the suspension, the cost to Contractor of subsequently performing the remaining work on the Construction Project has increased or decreased. d. Upon receipt of written notice by the City to resume the suspended work (“Notice to Resume Work”), Contractor shall immediately resume performance of the suspended work as to the extent required in the Notice to Resume Work. Any claim by Contractor for time or compensation described in Section 11(c) shall be made within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the Notice to Resume Work and Contractor shall submit a revised Construction Schedule for the City’s review and approval. Contractor’s failure to timely make such a claim shall result in a waiver of the claim. e. No compensation described in Section 11(c) shall be paid and no extension of time to complete the Construction Project shall be granted if the suspension results from Contractor’s non-compliance with or breach of the terms or requirements of this Agreement. 12. Termination for Contractor’s Fault: a. If Contractor refuses or fails to timely do the work, or any part thereof, or fails to perform any of its obligations under this Agreement, or otherwise breaches any terms or conditions of this Agreement, the City may, by written notice, terminate this Agreement and the Contractor’s right to proceed with all or any part of the Construction Project (“Termination Notice Due to Contractor’s Fault”). The City may then take over the Construction Project and complete it, either with its own resources or by re-letting the contract to any other third party, and may immediately take possession of and use such materials, appliances, tools, and equipment as may be on the site and which may be necessary for the completion of the Construction Project. b. In the event of a termination pursuant to this Section 12, Contractor shall be entitled to payment only for those services Contractor actually rendered. In the case of a lump sum or unit price contract, Contractor shall not be entitled to any further payment until the Construction Project has been completed. Upon completion of the Construction Project, if the unpaid balance of the Contractor’s compensation exceeds the cost to the City of completing the work, including all costs paid to any subcontractors or third parties retained by the City to complete the Construction Project and all administrative costs resulting from the termination (“City’s Cost for Completion”), such excess shall be Page 8 of 28 Version 12 14 15 paid to the Contractor. If the City’s Cost for Completion exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contractor’s compensation, then Contractor and its sureties shall be liable for and shall pay the difference, plus interest at the rate applicable to court judgments, to the City. c. Any termination provided for by this Section 12 shall be in addition to any other remedies to which the City may be entitled under the law or at equity. d. In the event of termination under this Section 12, Contractor shall, under no circumstances, be entitled to claim or recover consequential, special, punitive, lost business opportunity, lost productivity, field office overhead, general conditions costs, or lost profits damages of any nature arising, or claimed to have arisen, as a result of the termination. 13. Termination for City’s Convenience: a. Should conditions arise which, in the sole opinion and discretion of the City, make it advisable to the City to cease work on the Construction Project, City may terminate this Agreement by written notice to Contractor (“Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience”). The termination shall be effective in the manner specified in the Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience and shall be without prejudice to any claims that the City may otherwise have against Contractor. b. Upon receipt of the Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience, unless otherwise directed in the Notice, the Contractor shall immediately cease work on the Construction Project, discontinue placing orders for materials, supplies, and equipment for the Construction Project, and make every reasonable effort to cancel all existing orders or contracts upon terms satisfactory to the City. Contractor shall do only such work as may be necessary to preserve, protect, and maintain work already completed, in progress, or in transit to the construction site. c. In the event of a termination pursuant to this Section 13, Contractor is entitled to payment only for those services Contractor actually rendered and materials actually purchased or which Contractor has made obligations to purchase on or before the receipt of the Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience, and reasonably incurred costs for demobilization of Contractor’s and any subcontractor’s crews. It is agreed that any materials that City is obligated to purchase from Contractor will remain the City’s sole property. d. The compensation described in Section 13(c) is the sole compensation due to Contractor for its performance of this Agreement. Contractor shall, under no circumstances, be entitled to claim or recover consequential, special, punitive, lost business opportunity, lost productivity, field office overhead, general conditions costs, or lost profits damages of any nature arising, or claimed to have arisen, as a result of the termination. 14. Limitation on Contractor’s Damages; Time for Asserting Claim: Page 9 of 28 Version 12 14 15 a. In the event of a claim for damages by Contractor under this Agreement, Contractor’s damages shall be limited to contract damages and Contractor hereby expressly waives any right to claim or recover consequential, special, punitive, lost business opportunity, lost productivity, field office overhead, general conditions costs, or lost profits damages of any nature or kind. b. In the event Contractor wants to assert a claim for damages of any kind or nature, Contractor shall provide City with written notice of its claim, the facts and circumstances surrounding and giving rise to the claim, and the total amount of damages sought by the claim, within ten (10) days of the facts and circumstances giving rise to the claim. In the event Contractor fails to provide such notice, Contractor shall waive all rights to assert such claim. 15. Representatives: a. City’s Representative: The City’s Representative for the purpose of this Agreement shall be [insert name of representative (could be the consulting architect or engineer) or such other individual as City shall designate in writing. Whenever approval or authorization from or communication or submission to City is required by this Agreement, such communication or submission shall be directed to the City’s Representative and approvals or authorizations shall be issued only by such Representative; provided, however, that in exigent circumstances when City’s Representative is not available, Contractor may direct its communication or submission to other designated City personnel or agents and may receive approvals or authorization from such persons. b. Contractor’s Representative: The Contractor’s Representative for the purpose of this Agreement shall be or such other individual as Contractor shall designate in writing. Whenever direction to or communication with Contractor is required by this Agreement, such direction or communication shall be directed to Contractor’s Representative; provided, however, that in exigent circumstances when Contractor’s Representative is not available, City may direct its direction or communication to other designated Contractor personnel or agents. 16. Locating Underground Facilities: Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and determining the location of any underground facilities, including but not limited to, the location of any pipelines or utility supply, delivery, or service lines in accordance with the provisions of §69-4-501, et seq., MCA. Contractor shall make every effort to avoid damage to underground facilities and shall be solely responsible for any damage that may occur. If City personnel assume responsibility for locating any underground facilities, this fact shall be noted in writing prior to commencement of such location work. 17. Permits: Contractor shall provide all notices, comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations, obtain all necessary permits, licenses, including a City of Bozeman business license, and inspections from applicable governmental authorities, pay all fees Page 10 of 28 Version 12 14 15 and charges in connection therewith, and perform all surveys and locations necessary for the timely completion of the Construction Project. 18. Ownership of Documents; Indemnification: All plans, designs, drawings, specifications, documents, sample results and data, in whatever medium or format, originated or prepared by or for Contractor in contemplation of, or in the course of, or as a result of this Agreement or work on the Construction Project, shall be promptly furnished to the City (“City Documents and Information”). All City Documents and Information shall be the exclusive property of the City and shall be deemed to be works-for-hire. Contractor hereby assigns all right, title, and interest in and to the City Documents and Information, including but not limited to, all copyright and patent rights in and to the City Documents and Information. Neither party grants to the other any express or implied licenses under any patents, copyrights, trademarks, or other intellectual property rights, except to the extent necessary to complete its obligations to the other under this Agreement. 19. Laws and Regulations: Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable state and federal laws, regulations, and municipal ordinances including, but not limited to, all workers’ compensation laws, all environmental laws including, but not limited to, the generation and disposal of hazardous waste, the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), the safety rules, codes, and provisions of the Montana Safety Act in Title 50, Chapter 71, MCA, all applicable City, County, and State building and electrical codes, the Americans with Disabilities Act, and all non- discrimination, affirmative action, and utilization of minority and small business statutes and regulations. 20. Non-discrimination: The Contractor shall have a policy to provide equal employment opportunity in accordance with all applicable state and federal anti-discrimination laws, regulations, and contracts. The Contractor shall not refuse employment to a person, bar a person from employment, or discriminate against a person in compensation or in a term, condition, or privilege of employment because of race, color, religion, creed, political ideas, sex, age, marital status, national origin, actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity, physical or mental disability, except when the reasonable demands of the position require an age, physical or mental disability, marital status or sex distinction. The Contractor shall be subject to and comply with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964; Section 140, Title 2, United States Code, and all regulations promulgated thereunder. The Contractor shall require these nondiscrimination terms of its sub- contractors providing services under this agreement. 21. Intoxicants; DOT Drug and Alcohol Regulations: Contractor shall not permit or suffer the introduction or use of any intoxicants, including alcohol or illegal drugs, upon the site of the Construction Project. Contractor acknowledges it is aware of and shall comply with its responsibilities and obligations under the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations governing anti-drug and alcohol misuse prevention plans and related testing. City shall have the right to request proof of such compliance and Contractor shall be obligated to furnish such proof. 22. Labor Relations: Page 11 of 28 Version 12 14 15 a. Contractor shall post a legible statement of all wages and fringe benefits to be paid to the Contractor’s employees and the frequency of such payments (i.e., hourly wage employees shall be paid weekly). Such posting shall be made in a prominent and accessible location at the site of the Construction Project and shall be made no later than the first day of work. Such posting shall be removed only upon the final completion of the Construction Project and the termination of this Agreement. b. In performing the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the work on the Construction Project, Contractor shall give preference to the employment of bona fide residents of Montana, as required by §18-2-403, MCA, and as such, term is defined by §18-2-401(1), MCA. When making assignments of work, Contractor shall use workers both skilled in their trade and specialized in their field of work for all work to which they are assigned. c. Pursuant to §§18-2-403 and 18-2-422, MCA, Contractor shall pay wages, benefits, and expenses in conformance with the current version of the Prevailing Wage Rates for Building Construction Services as published by the Montana Department of Labor and Industry and which are applicable to Gallatin County. Contractor shall pay all hourly wage employees on a weekly basis. Violation of the requirements to pay applicable prevailing wage rates may subject the Contractor to the penalties set forth in §18-2-407, MCA. Contractor shall maintain payroll records and provide certified copies to the City. Contractor shall maintain such payroll records during the term of this Agreement, the course of the work on the Construction Project, and for a period of three (3) years following the date of final completion of the Construction Project and termination of this Agreement. d. In the event that, during the term of this Agreement and throughout the course of Contractor’s performance of the Construction Project, any labor problems or disputes of any type arise or materialize which in turn cause any work on the Construction Project to cease for any period of time, Contractor specifically agrees to take immediate steps, at its own expense and without expectation of reimbursement from City, to alleviate or resolve all such labor problems or disputes. The specific steps Contractor shall take to resume work on the Construction Project shall be left to the discretion of Contractor; provided, however, that Contractor shall bear all costs of any related legal action. Contractor shall provide immediate relief to the City so as to permit the work on the Construction Project to resume and be completed within the time frames set forth in the Construction Schedule at no additional cost to City. e. Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold the City harmless from any and all claims, demands, costs, expenses, damages, and liabilities arising out of, resulting from, or occurring in connection with any labor problems or disputes or any delays or stoppages of work associated with such problems or disputes. 23. Subcontractors: Page 12 of 28 Version 12 14 15 a. Contractor may employ subcontractors for any work on the Construction Project. Contractor shall provide City with a list of all subcontractors employed. b. Contractor remains fully responsible for the acts and omissions of any subcontractor, just as Contractor is for its own acts and omissions, and Contractor shall remain fully responsible and liable for the timely completion of the Construction Project. c. Contractor is solely liable for any and all payments to subcontractors. Contractor shall hold all payments received from the City in trust for the benefit of subcontractors, and all such payments shall be used to satisfy obligations of the Construction Project before being used for any other purpose. Contractor shall make any payments due to any subcontractor within seven (7) days of Contractor’s receipt of payment, including a proportional part of the retainage Contractor has received from the City. In the event of a dispute regarding any subcontractor’s invoice, Contractor shall promptly pay the undisputed amount to the subcontractor and notify the subcontractor in writing of the amount in dispute and the reasons for the dispute. Any withholding of payment must comply with the requirements of §28-2-2103, MCA. In the event Contractor is unwilling or unable to make timely and proper payment to any subcontractor, City may elect to withhold any payment otherwise due to Contractor and upon seven (7) days’ written notice to Contractor, may pay subcontractor by direct or joint payment. 24. Indebtedness and Liens: Before City may make any final payment to Contractor, Contractor shall furnish City with satisfactory proof that there are no outstanding debts or liens in connection with the Construction Project. If the Contractor allows any indebtedness to accrue to subcontractors or others during the progress of the work, and fails to pay or discharge the same within five (5) days after demand, then City may either withhold any money due to Contractor until such indebtedness is paid or apply the same towards the discharge of the indebtedness. If any lien or claim is filed or made by any subcontractor, material supplier, or any other person, the Contractor shall immediately notify the City and shall cause the same to be discharged of record within thirty (30) days after its filing. 25. Hazard Communication: Contractor shall comply with all hazard communication requirements dictated by the Environmental Protection Agency, the Montana Department of Agriculture, OSHA, Hazard Communications Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200, and applicable City ordinances. Contractor shall supply a chemical list, the associated material safety data sheets (MSDS), and other pertinent health exposure data for chemicals that the Contractor’s, subcontractor’s or the City’s employees may be exposed to while working on City property during the course of the Construction Project. One copy of this documentation must be delivered to City to the attention of the City’s Representative. This documentation must be delivered before work involving these chemicals may commence. 26. Accounts and Records: During the term of this Agreement and for two (2) years following the City’s final acceptance of the Construction Project, Contractor shall maintain accounts and records related to the Construction Project. Upon reasonable notice, City shall have the right to inspect all such accounts and records, including but not limited to, Contractor’s Page 13 of 28 Version 12 14 15 records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, specifications, field and site notes, receipts, invoices, bills, contracts, or other documents relating to the Construction Project. 27. Indemnification; Insurance; Bonds: a. Contractor agrees to release, defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the City, its agents, representatives, employees, and officers (collectively referred to for purposes of this Section as the City) from and against any and all claims, demands, actions, fees and costs (including attorney’s fees and the costs and fees of and expert witness and consultants), losses, expenses, liabilities (including liability where activity is inherently or intrinsically dangerous) or damages of whatever kind or nature connected therewith and without limit and without regard to the cause or causes thereof or the negligence of any party or parties that may be asserted against, recovered from or suffered by the City occasioned by, growing or arising out of or resulting from or in any way related to: (i) the negligent, reckless, or intentional misconduct of the Contractor; (ii) any negligent, reckless, or intentional misconduct of any of the Contractor’s agents; or (iii) the negligent, reckless, or intentional misconduct of any other third party. b. Such obligations shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist. The indemnification obligations of this Section must not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce any common- law or statutory rights of the indemnitee(s) which would otherwise exist as to such indemnitee(s). c. Contractor’s indemnity under this Section shall be without regard to and without any right to contribution from any insurance maintained by City. d. Should any indemnitee described herein be required to bring an action against the Contractor to assert its right to defense or indemnification under this Agreement or under the Contractor’s applicable insurance policies required below the indemnitee shall be entitled to recover reasonable costs and attorney fees incurred in asserting its right to indemnification or defense but only if a court of competent jurisdiction determines the Contractor was obligated to defend the claim(s) or was obligated to indemnify the indemnitee for a claim(s) or any portion(s) thereof. e. In the event of an action filed against City resulting from the City’s performance under this Agreement, the City may elect to represent itself and incur all costs and expenses of suit. f. Contractor also waives any and all claims and recourse against the City or its officers, agents or employees, including the right of contribution for loss or damage to person or property arising from, growing out of, or in any way connected with or incident to the performance of this Agreement except “responsibility for his own fraud, for willful injury to the person or property of another, or for violation of law, whether willful or negligent” as per 28-2-702, MCA. Page 14 of 28 Version 12 14 15 g. These obligations shall survive termination of this Agreement and the services performed hereunder. h. In addition to and independent from the above, Contractor shall at Contractor’s expense secure insurance coverage through an insurance company or companies duly licensed and authorized to conduct insurance business in Montana which insures the liabilities and obligations specifically assumed by the Contractor in this Section. The insurance coverage shall not contain any exclusion for liabilities specifically assumed by the Contractor in subsection (a) of this Section. The insurance shall cover and apply to all claims, demands, suits, damages, losses, and expenses that may be asserted or claimed against, recovered from, or suffered by the City without limit and without regard to the cause therefore and which is acceptable to the City and Contractor shall furnish to the City an accompanying certificate of insurance and accompanying endorsements in amounts not less than as shown on Exhibit E . The amounts of insurance provided shall be exclusive of defense costs. The City of Bozeman, its officers, agents, and employees, shall be endorsed as an additional or named insured on a primary non-contributory basis on both the Commercial General and Automobile Liability policies. The insurance and required endorsements must be in a form suitable to City and shall include no less than a thirty (30) day notice of cancellation or non- renewal. The City must approve all insurance coverage and endorsements prior to the Contractor commencing work. Contractor shall notify City within two (2) business days of Contractor’s receipt of notice that any required insurance coverage will be terminated or Contractor’s decision to terminate any required insurance coverage for any reason. The City must approve all insurance coverage and endorsements prior to the Contractor commencing work. 28. Taxes: Contractor is obligated to pay all taxes of any kind or nature and make all appropriate employee withholdings. Contractor understands that all contractors or subcontractors working on a publicly funded project are required to pay or have withheld from earnings a license fee of one percent (1%) of the gross contract price if the gross contract price is Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000) or more. This license fee is paid to the Montana Department of Revenue. 29. Dispute Resolution: a. Any claim, controversy, or dispute between the parties, their agents, employees, or representatives shall be resolved first by negotiation between senior-level personnel from each party duly authorized to execute settlement agreements. Upon mutual agreement of the parties, the parties may invite an independent, disinterested mediator to assist in the negotiated settlement discussions. b. If the parties are unable to resolve the dispute within thirty (30) days from the date the dispute was first raised, then such dispute shall be resolved in a court of Page 15 of 28 Version 12 14 15 competent jurisdiction in compliance with the Applicable Law provisions of this Agreement. 30. Survival: Contractor’s indemnification and warranty obligations shall survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement for the maximum period allowed under applicable law. 31. Headings: The headings used in this Agreement are for convenience only and are not be construed as a part of the Agreement or as a limitation on the scope of the particular paragraphs to which they refer. 32. Waiver: A waiver by City of any default or breach by Contractor of any covenants, terms, or conditions of this Agreement does not limit City’s right to enforce such covenants, terms, or conditions or to pursue City’s rights in the event of any subsequent default or breach. 33. Severability: If any portion of this Agreement is held to be void or unenforceable, the balance thereof shall continue in effect. 34. Applicable Law: The parties agree that this Agreement is governed in all respects by the laws of the State of Montana. 35. Binding Effect: This Agreement is binding upon and inures to the benefit of the heirs, legal representatives, successors, and assigns of the parties. 36. Amendments: This Agreement may not be modified, amended, or changed in any respect except by a written document signed by all parties. 37. No Third-Party Beneficiary: This Agreement is for the exclusive benefit of the parties, does not constitute a third-party beneficiary agreement, and may not be relied upon or enforced by a third party. 38. Counterparts: This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, which together constitute one instrument. 39. Assignment: Contractor may not assign this Agreement in whole or in part without the prior written consent of the City. No assignment will relieve Contractor of its responsibility for the performance of the Agreement and the completion of the Construction Project. Contractor may not assign to any third party other than Contractor’s subcontractors on the Construction Project, the right to receive monies due from City without the prior written consent of City. 40. Authority: Each party represents that it has full power and authority to enter into and perform this Agreement and the person signing this Agreement on behalf of each party has been properly authorized and empowered to sign this Agreement. Page 16 of 28 Version 12 14 15 41. Independent Contractor: The parties agree and acknowledge that in the performance of this Agreement and the completion of the Construction Project, Contractor shall render services as an independent contractor and not as the agent, representative, subcontractor, or employee of the City. The parties further agree that all individuals and companies retained by Contractor at all times will be considered the agents, employees, or independent contractors of Contractor and at no time will they be the employees, agents, or representatives of the City. 42. Agreement Documents: All work on the Construction Project shall be performed by Contractor in accordance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement and are incorporated herein by this reference: Exhibit A: Contractor’s submitted Bid Form Exhibit B: Construction Schedule Exhibit C: Compensation Schedule Exhibit D: Change of Work Specifications Exhibit E: Required Insurance Coverage Exhibit F: Required Bonds Exhibit G: Plans and Specifications 43. Integration: This Agreement and all Exhibits attached hereto constitute the entire agreement of the parties. Covenants or representations not contained therein or made a part thereof by reference, are not binding upon the parties. There are no understandings between the parties other than as set forth in this Agreement. All communications, either verbal or written, made prior to the date of this Agreement are hereby abrogated and withdrawn unless specifically made a part of this Agreement by reference. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Contractor and City have caused this Agreement to be executed, effective on the date written above, and intend to be legally bound thereby. CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA CONTRACTOR By: _______________________________ By: Andrea Surratt, City Manager Print Name: Title: APPROVED AS TO FORM By: _______________________________ Greg Sullivan, City Attorney Page 17 of 28 Version 12 14 15 EXHIBIT A (Contractors submitted Bid Form) Page 18 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Page 19 of 28 Version 12 14 15 EXHIBIT B (Construction Schedule) Page 20 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Page 21 of 28 Version 12 14 15 EXHIBIT C Compensation Schedule Contractor shall not demand or be entitled to receive payment for any work on the Construction Project, in whole or in part, except in the manner set forth herein. Monthly Progress Payments A. After the commencement of work on the Construction Project, the Contractor may request monthly progress payments by submitting an Application for Payment to the City’s Representative during each successive calendar month, with a copy to the project architect or engineer. The Application for Payment must be based upon the actual or estimated percentage of work completed and materials supplied on the Construction Project prior to the date of the Application and shall be filled out and signed by the Contractor on a form provided by the City. Contractor shall attach all supporting documentation to the Application, including certified payroll records and receipts, to verify that the work claimed in the Application has been completed. Only one Application for Payment may be submitted within a calendar month. B. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall also include an affidavit signed by the Contractor stating that all previous monthly progress payments received have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s obligations associated with the prior Applications for Payment. C. City and its architect or engineer shall promptly review all Applications for Payment and, within twenty-one (21) days after receipt of each Application, determine whether a progress payment should be disapproved in whole or in part. An Application for Payment is considered to have been received when it is submitted to City’s Representative and is considered approved unless prior to the expiration of the 21-day period the City or its architect or engineer provides the Contractor with a written statement containing specific items that are being disapproved. A progress payment or any portion may be disapproved upon a claim of: (1) unsatisfactory job progress; (2) failure to remedy defective construction work or materials; (3) disputed work or materials; (4) failure to comply with material provisions of this Agreement, drawings, plans, specifications for the Construction Project, or other required documents, including but not limited to, payroll certifications, insurance coverage, bonding, lien releases, warranties, material certifications, and test data; (5) failure of Contractor to make timely payment for claims including, but not limited to claims for labor, equipment, materials, subcontracts, taxes, fees, professional services, rent, and royalties; (6) damages to the City; (7) the existence of reasonable evidence that the Agreement cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Agreement’s Compensation; and (8) Contractor’s non-compliance with applicable federal, state, and local laws, rules, and ordinances. D. The City will furnish Contractor a written statement specifying a reason for disapproval that is listed in Section C above for which approval of the Application for Payment or a portion thereof is being withheld. If the City disapproves only a portion of an Application for Payment, the remainder of the Application for Payment is considered approved. Page 22 of 28 Version 12 14 15 E. If the City approves a monthly progress payment, the City shall withhold the five percent (5%) Retainage Amount from the total payment requested in the Application for Payment and may withhold an amount that is sufficient to pay the direct expenses that the City may reasonably expect will be necessary to correct any claim based on the eight (8) items set out in Section C above. City shall tender the balance of the approved monthly progress payment to Contractor within seven (7) days following the approval. F. Contractor understands that the Montana Public Contractors’ Gross Receipts Tax requires all contractors or subcontractors working on a publicly funded project to pay or have withheld from earnings one percent (1%) of the gross contract price if the public contract price, including subcontracts attached thereto, is Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000) or more. If required, the City will withhold this tax from any payment made to Contractor and will remit the amount withheld to the Montana Department of Revenue. Contractor must withhold the tax from payments made to subcontractors by Contractor. G. City’s approval of any progress payment shall not operate as City’s acceptance of any portion of the Construction Project as complete or free of defects or nonconformities, nor shall it operate as a waiver of Contractor’s obligations under the Agreement including, but not limited to, Contractor’s testing and warranty obligations. Final Payment A. Upon completion of the Construction Project, Contractor shall submit a final Application for Payment to the City’s Representative seeking payment of the remaining balance of Contractor’s compensation, including all retainage amounts. Contractor shall attach all supporting documentation and receipts to the final Application for Payment to verify that the Construction Project has been fully and finally completed in compliance with all terms and conditions of the Agreement, including complete and legally effective releases or waivers of all liens or encumbrances that have been filed against the Construction Project, and a consent from all of Contractor’s sureties to final payment. In addition, Contractor shall include an affidavit signed by the Contractor stating that all previous monthly progress payments received have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s obligations associated with the Construction Project and that the prior Applications for Payment and all claims asserted by any person arising from or related to the Construction Project have been settled or satisfied. In the event any claims have not been settled or satisfied, the Affidavit shall contain a complete listing of such claims, the name and address of each person making a claim, the facts and circumstances surrounding each claim, the amount of each claim, and the efforts made to date by Contractor to resolve, settle or satisfy each claim. B. City and its architect or engineer shall promptly review the final Application for Payment and, within twenty-one (21) days after receipt of the request, determine whether it should be disapproved in whole or in part. The final Application for Payment is considered to have been received when it is submitted to City’s Representative and is considered approved unless the City’s Representative provides the Contractor with a written statement containing specific items that are being disapproved prior to the expiration of the 21-day period. A final payment or any portion may be disapproved upon a claim of: (1) unsatisfactory job progress; (2) Page 23 of 28 Version 12 14 15 after City’s final inspection of the Construction Project, Contractor has not completed all punch list items and failed to remedy defective construction work or materials; (3) disputed work or materials; (4) failure to comply with material provisions of this Agreement, drawings, plans, specifications for the Construction Project, or other required documents including, but not limited to, payroll certifications, insurance coverage, bonding, lien releases, warranties, material certifications, and test data; (5) failure of Contractor to make timely payment for claims including, but not limited to, claims for labor, equipment, materials, subcontracts, taxes, fees, professional services, rent, and royalties; (6) claims have been brought or liens have been filed against Contractor or the City related to the Construction Project, or any such claims have not been properly documented in Contractor’s Affidavit; (7) damage to the City; (8) Contractor has not delivered all maintenance and operating instructions, marked-up record documents, and any other documents relating to the Construction Project as required by City; and (9) the Contractor is not in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local laws, rules, and ordinances and has not remedied the noncompliance. C. The City’s Representative will furnish Contractor a written statement specifying a reason for disapproval that is listed in Section B above for which approval of the final Application for Payment or a portion thereof is being withheld. If the City disapproves only a portion of an Application for Payment, the remainder of the Application for Payment is considered approved. D. Final payment is due and payable within fourteen (14) days of the City’s Representative’s approval, but City may withhold an amount that is sufficient to pay the direct expenses that the City may reasonably expect will be necessary to correct any claim based on the nine (9) items set out in Section B above and any tax withholding required by law. Page 24 of 28 Version 12 14 15 EXHIBIT D Change of Work Specifications A. City may, at any time or from time to time, order changes, additions, deletions, or revisions to the work on the Construction Project by submitting a written Change Order to Contractor on a form as provided for by the City. Upon receipt of any Change Order, Contractor shall comply with the terms of the changed work as reflected in the Change Order. B. City and Contractor shall negotiate in good faith for an agreement as to any increase or decrease in the Contractor’s compensation that results from any Change Order. The increased or decreased Contractor’s compensation shall be set forth in the Change Order and both the City and the Contractor shall sign the Change Order as an indication of their respective acceptance of the changes and modifications to the Agreement. In the event the City and Contractor are unable to agree upon the increase or decrease in Contractor’s compensation resulting from any Change Order, such increase or decrease shall be determined as follows: 1. increases to Contractor’s compensation shall be calculated as follows and shall be evidenced by Contractor’s submission to the City of its actual supporting documentation including time slips/cards, invoices, and receipts: a. by unit prices otherwise set forth in the Agreement or subsequently agreed upon; b. by an agreed upon lump sum; or c. by the cost of the work and an agreed upon mark-up for Contractor’s overhead and profit, with the costs of the work determined as follows: (i) Contractor’s actual, direct payroll expenses for the cost of labor. Payroll expenses shall only include actual gross wages paid, without any deductions, withholding, or overhead. The agreed upon mark-up fee shall cover Contractor’s liability insurance, workers’ compensation, and Social Security taxes applicable to said wages, Contractor’s reasonable profit, the costs for the use of small tools and equipment not otherwise classified under heavy equipment use, and Contractor’s general overhead expenses. (ii) Contractor’s actual cost of materials, including actual transportation costs, for all materials supplied by Contractor. (iii) Costs for the use of heavy equipment and the transportation of the same. Such costs shall be the actual rental fees incurred for the use of the heavy equipment and the actual costs of transporting such heavy equipment to and from the site of the Construction Project. Page 25 of 28 Version 12 14 15 2. decreases to Contractor’s compensation shall be determined by the City’s good faith estimate. If Contractor disagrees with such good faith estimate, Contractor can avail itself of the Dispute Resolution provisions set forth in the Agreement. C. Except for minor modifications in the work not involving an increase of costs or Contractor’s compensation and not inconsistent with the purposes of the work required by the Agreement, and except in an emergency situation which endangers life or property, no change to the work requirements shall be made unless pursuant to a written Change Order duly executed. D. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contractor’s compensation or the extension of any deadlines set forth in Construction Schedule with respect to any work performed by Contractor that is not required by the terms and conditions of the Agreement and is not contained in a duly executed Change Order. Page 26 of 28 Version 12 14 15 EXHIBIT E Required Insurance Coverage Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance coverage as set forth below. The insurance policy must protect, defend, and indemnify the City, its employees, officers, and agents and must endorse the City, its employees, officers and agents as an additional insureds and be written on a “primary—noncontributory basis.” Each coverage shall be obtained from an insurance company that is duly licensed and authorized to transact insurance business and write insurance within the state of Montana, with a minimum of “A.M. Best Rating” of A-, VI, as will protect the Contractor, the various acts of subcontractors, the City and its officers, employees, agents, and representatives from claims for bodily injury and/or property damage which may arise from operations and completed operations under this Agreement. All insurance coverage shall remain in effect throughout the life of this Agreement and for a minimum of one (1) year following the date of expiration of Contractor’s warranties. All insurance policies must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed, or renewal refused until at least forty-five (45) days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, City, and all other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. Required Insurance Coverage: 1. Commercial General Liability (bodily injury and property damage) $1,500,000 per occurrence $3,000,000 aggregate 2. Products and Completed Operations $3,000,000 3. Automobile Liability (all owned, hired, non-owned) $1,500,000 per accident 4. Workers’ Compensation Not less than statutory limits 5. Employers’ Liability $1,500,000 6. Professional Liability (E&O) $1,500,000 (only if applicable) 7. Builder’s Risk/Property Insurance (for buildings) Equal to greater of Contractor’s compensation or full replacement (covering all work. buildings, materials and equipment, whether on site or in transit, loss due to fire, lightening, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of laws, water damage, flood if site within a flood plain, repair or replacement costs, testing and start-up costs) 8. Owner’s and Contractor’s Protective Liability $1,000,000 per occurrence $3,000,000 aggregate 9. Contractual Liability Insurance (covering indemnity obligations) $1,000,000 per occurrence $3,000,000 aggregate Page 27 of 28 Version 12 14 15 Additional coverage may be required in the event of the following: crane operating services: add On-Hook Coverage transportation services: add $1,000,000 Transit Coverage Page 28 of 28 Version 12 14 15 EXHIBIT F Required Bonds Contractor shall make, execute, purchase, maintain and deliver to City performance and payment bonds in an amount at least equal to the Contractor’s compensation under this Agreement, conditioned that the Contractor shall faithfully perform of all of Contractor’s obligations under this Agreement and pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, material suppliers and all persons who supply the Contractor or Contractor’s subcontractors with provisions, provender, material, or supplies for performing work on the Construction Project. All bonds must be obtained with a surety company that is duly licensed and authorized to transact business within the state of Montana and to issue bonds for the limits so required. The surety company must have a Best’s Financial Strength Rating of A, as rated by the A. M. Best Co., or an equivalent rating from a similar rating service. All bonds must remain in effect throughout the life of this Agreement and for a minimum of one (1) year following the date of expiration of Contractor’s warranties. A certified copy of the agent’s authority to act must accompany all bonds signed by an agent. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business within the state of Montana is terminated, Contractor shall promptly notify City and shall within twenty (20) days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond with another surety company, both of which shall comply with all requirements set forth herein. Bond Types and Amounts: 1. Performance Bond Equal to Contractor’s compensation amount 2. Labor and Materials Bond Equal to Contractor’s compensation amount Page 29 of 28 Version 12 14 15 EXHIBIT G Drawings, Plans and Specifications The Drawings, Plans and Specifications provided by the City or its architect or engineer as described below: CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS PRODUCED BY ARCHITECTURE 118 AND DATED DECEMBER 1, 2019 Revised 9/2/11 1 PERFORMANCE BOND (Insert full legal name and address of Contractor) as Principal, hereinafter called CONTRACTOR, and: (Insert full legal name and address of Surety) as Surety, hereinafter called SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto: City of Bozeman, Montana 121 North Rouse Ave. PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 as Obligee, hereinafter called CITY, in the amount of: (Dollars) ($ ) for the payment, whereof CONTRACTOR and SURETY bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR has, by written agreement dated 20 , entered into a contract with CITY for: (Insert project name) in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by: (Insert company name) which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Agreement. NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if CONTRACTOR shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. As a minimum, this obligation shall remain in full force and effect beyond the completion of all work to include the correction period as specified in the Contract Documents. The SURETY hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by CITY. Revised 9/2/11 2 Whenever CONTRACTOR shall be, and declared by CITY to be, in default under the Agreement, CITY having performed CITY’s obligations thereunder, the SURETY may promptly remedy the default or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Agreement in accordance with its terms and conditions; or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Agreement in accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon determination by SURETY of the lowest responsible bidder, or, if CITY elects, upon determination by CITY and the SURETY jointly of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and CITY, and make available as work progresses (even though there should be a default or a succession of defaults under the contract or contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the contract price; but not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which SURETY may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term “balance of the contract price,” as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by CITY to CONTRACTOR under the Agreement and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by CITY to CONTRACTOR. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than CITY named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators, or successors of CITY. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in ( ) counterparts, each one (number) of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of , 20 . CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL: SURETY: (Seal) Company Name Surety Name and Corporate Seal By: Signature (Seal) By: Signature Attorney-in-Fact Printed Name Printed Name (Attach Power of Attorney) Title Attest: Signature Attest: Signature Title Title NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is a partnership, all partners must execute Bond. Version 12 16 15 Page 1 of 3 PAYMENT BOND (Insert full legal name and address of Contractor) as Principal, hereinafter called CONTRACTOR, and: (Insert full legal name and address of Surety) as Surety, hereinafter called SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto: City of Bozeman, Montana 121 North Rouse Ave. PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 as Obligee, hereinafter called CITY, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinbelow defined in the amount of: (Dollars) ($ ) for the payment, whereof CONTRACTOR and SURETY bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, CONTRACTOR has, by written agreement dated 20 , entered into a contract with CITY for: (Insert project name) in accordance with drawings and specification prepared by: (Insert company name) which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Agreement. NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if CONTRACTOR shall promptly make payments to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and materials used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Agreement, and any duly authorized modifications that may hereafter be made, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions: Version 12 16 15 Page 2 of 3 1. A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR or with a subcontractor of CONTRACTOR as defined by Title 18, Chapter 2, Part 2, MCA, for labor, materials, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Agreement; labor and material being construed to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the Agreement. 2. The above named CONTRACTOR and SURETY hereby jointly and severally agree with CITY that every claimant as herein defined who has not been paid in full before the expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the last of such claimant’s work or labor was done or performed, or materials were furnished by such claimant, may sue on this Bond for the use of such claimant in the name of CITY, prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant, and have execution thereon, provided, however, that CITY shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit. 3. A claimant may only commence a suit or action: a. If the claimant has complied with applicable state laws; and b. In District Court located in and for Gallatin County, Montana, in Bozeman Municipal Court, if applicable, or in the United States District Court for the district in which the project, or any part thereof, is situated and not elsewhere. 4. Special exceptions: 5. The amount of this Bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or payments made in good faith hereunder, inclusive of the payments by SURETY of construction liens which may be filed on record against said improvement, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this Bond. Version 12 16 15 Page 3 of 3 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in ( ) counterparts, each one (number) of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of , 20 . CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL: SURETY: (Seal) Company Name Surety Name and Corporate Seal By: Signature (Seal) By: Signature Attorney-in-Fact Printed Name Printed Name (Attach Power of Attorney) Title Attest: Signature Attest: Signature Title Title NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is a partnership, all partners must execute Bond. SUBMITTED BY (CONTRACTOR) AUTHORIZED AGENT DATE REVIEWED BY (CONSULTANT) AUTHORIZED AGENT DATE APPROVED BY (OWNER) AUTHORIZED AGENT DATE Project Name: Alfred Stiff Professional Building Renovation Project No.: 19-022 Location: Bozeman, Montana Owner: City of Bozeman, Strategic Services Contractor: 20 E. Olive Street Bozeman, Montana 59715 This information is submitted for the approval of the Owner. The following Subcontractors have been retained to provide materials and / or labor in the interests of the Project. All Subcontractors with contracts in the amount of $5,000.00 or more have been listed. The Contractor certifies:  The Subcontractors have been advised of all requirements, provisions, and standards applicable to the Project.  The provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor will be incorporated into the contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors.  The Subcontractors are qualified to accomplish the work for which they have been retained. SUBCONTRACTOR NAME SCOPE OF WORK LICENSE NO. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS SUBMITTED BY (CONTRACTOR) AUTHORIZED AGENT DATE REVIEWED BY (CONSULTANT) AUTHORIZED AGENT DATE APPROVED BY (OWNER) AUTHORIZED AGENT DATE Project Name: Location: Alfred Stiff Professional Building Renovation Bozeman, Montana Project No.: 19-022 Owner: City of Bozeman, Strategic Services Contractor: 20 E. Olive Street Bozeman, Montana 59715 This information is submitted for the purpose of evaluating applications for payment. The following is a complete accounting of the amounts used to generate the Contract Sum: DIVISION SCOPE OF WORK MATERIAL LABOR OTHER TOTAL TOTALS SCHEDULE OF VALUES SUBMITTED BY (CONTRACTOR) AUTHORIZED AGENT DATE REVIEWED BY (CONSULTANT) AUTHORIZED AGENT DATE APPROVED BY (OWNER) AUTHORIZED AGENT DATE MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE RATES FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION SERVICES 2019 Effective: January 26, 2019 Steve Bullock, Governor State of Montana Galen Hollenbaugh, Commissioner Department of Labor and Industry To obtain copies of prevailing wage rate schedules, or for information relating to public works projects and payment of prevailing wage rates, visit ERD at www.mtwagehourbopa.com or contact: Employment Relations Division Montana Department of Labor and Industry P. O. Box 201503 Helena, MT 59620-1503 Phone 406-444-6543 The department welcomes questions, comments, and suggestions from the public. In addition, we’ll do our best to provide information in an accessible format, upon request, in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act. MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS The Commissioner of the Department of Labor and Industry, in accordance with Sections 18-2-401 and 18-2-402 of the Montana Code Annotated (MCA), has determined the standard prevailing rate of wages for the occupations listed in this publication. The wages specified herein control the prevailing rate of wages for the purposes of Section 18-2-401, et seq., MCA. It is required each employer pay (as a minimum) the rate of wages, including fringe benefits, travel allowance, zone pay and per diem applicable to the district in which the work is being performed as provided in the attached wage determinations. All Montana Prevailing Wage Rates are available on the internet at www.mtwagehourbopa.com or by contacting the department at (406) 444-6543. In addition, this publication provides general information concerning compliance with Montana’s Prevailing Wage Law and the payment of prevailing wages. For detailed compliance information relating to public works contracts and payment of prevailing wage rates, please consult the regulations on the internet at www.mtwagehourbopa.com or contact the department at (406) 444-6543. GALEN HOLLENBAUGH Commissioner Department of Labor and Industry State of Montana 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS MONTANA PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS: A. Date of Publication ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………........... 3 B. Definition of Building Construction ……………………………………………………………………………………….................... 3 C. Definition of Public Works Contract …………………………………………………………………………………………............... 3 D. Prevailing Wage Schedule ………………………………………………………………………………………………………........... 3 E. Rates to Use for Projects ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….......... 3 F. Wage Rate Adjustments for Multiyear Contracts ……………………………………………………………………………….......... 3 G. Fringe Benefits ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………........... 4 H. Prevailing Wage Districts ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….......... 4 I. Dispatch City ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….......... 5 J. Zone Pay …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………............. 5 K. Computing Travel Benefits ………………………………………………………………………………………………………........... 5 L. Per Diem …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………............. 5 M. Apprentices ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………............. 5 N. Posting Notice of Prevailing Wages ……………………………………………………………………………………………........... 5 O. Employment Preference ……………………………………………………………………………………………………................... 5 P. Projects of a Mixed Nature ........................................................................................................................................................ 6 Q. Occupations Definitions Website …………………………………………………………………………….................………......... 6 R. Welder Rates ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………............. 6 S. Foreman Rates …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………............. 6 WAGE RATES: BOILERMAKERS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………........................ 7 BRICK, BLOCK, AND STONE MASONS ……………………………………………………………………………………….............................. 7 CARPENTERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………........................ 7 CEMENT MASONS AND CONCRETE FINISHERS ………………………………………………………………………………........................ 8 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS OPERATORS GROUP 1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….......................... 8 OPERATORS GROUP 2 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………....................... 9 OPERATORS GROUP 3 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………....................... 9 OPERATORS GROUP 4 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………....................... 10 OPERATORS GROUP 5 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………....................... 10 OPERATORS GROUP 6 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………....................... 10 OPERATORS GROUP 7 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………....................... 11 CONSTRUCTION LABORERS LABORERS GROUP 1 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….......................... 11 LABORERS GROUP 2 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….......................... 11 LABORERS GROUP 3 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….......................... 12 LABORERS GROUP 4 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….......................... 12 DRYWALL APPLICATORS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………....................... 12 ELECTRICIANS: INCLUDING BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL ……………………………………………………………....................... 13 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………........................ 13 FLOOR LAYERS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………......................... 14 GLAZIERS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………........................ 14 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING …………………………………………………………………………………………………...................... 14 INSULATION WORKERS - MECHANICAL (HEAT AND FROST) ………………………………………………………………......................... 15 IRONWORKERS - STRUCTURAL STEEL AND REBAR PLACERS ……………………………………………………………......................... 15 MILLWRIGHTS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………........................ 15 PAINTERS: INCLUDING PAPERHANGERS ………………………...………………………………………………………………...................... 16 PILE BUCKS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………........................ 16 PLASTERERS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….......................... 16 PLUMBERS, PIPEFITTERS, AND STEAMFITTERS ………………………………………………………………………………........................ 17 ROOFERS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………........................ 18 SHEET METAL WORKERS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………....................... 18 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC INSTALLERS ....................................................................................................................................................... 19 SPRINKLER FITTERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………....................... 19 TAPERS …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………........................ 20 3 A. Date of Publication January 26, 2019 B. Definition of Building Construction For the purposes of Prevailing Wage, the Commissioner of Labor and Industry has determined that building construction occupations are defined to be those performed by a person engaged in a recognized trade or craft, or any skilled, semi-skilled, or unskilled manual labor related to the construction, alteration, or repair of a public building or facility, and does not include engineering, superintendence, management, office or clerical work. The Administrative Rules of Montana (ARM), 24.17.501(2) – 2(a), states “Building construction projects generally are the constructions of sheltered enclosures with walk-in access for housing persons, machinery, equipment, or supplies. It includes all construction of such structures, incidental installation of utilities and equipment, both above and below grade level, as well as incidental grading, utilities and paving. Examples of building construction include, but are not limited to, alterations and additions to buildings, apartment buildings (5 stories and above), arenas (closed), auditoriums, automobile parking garages, banks and financial buildings, barracks, churches, city halls, civic centers, commercial buildings, court houses, detention facilities, dormitories, farm buildings, fire stations, hospitals, hotels, industrial buildings, institutional buildings, libraries, mausoleums, motels, museums, nursing and convalescent facilities, office buildings, out-patient clinics, passenger and freight terminal buildings, police stations, post offices, power plants, prefabricated buildings, remodeling buildings, renovating buildings, repairing buildings, restaurants, schools, service stations, shopping centers, stores, subway stations, theaters, warehouses, water and sewage treatment plants (buildings only), etc.” C. Definition of Public Works Contract Section 18-2-401(11)(a), MCA defines “public works contract” as “…a contract for construction services let by the state, county, municipality, school district, or political subdivision or for nonconstruction services let by the state, county, municipality, or political subdivision in which the total cost of the contract is in excess of $25,000…”. D. Prevailing Wage Schedule This publication covers only Building Construction occupations and rates. These rates will remain in effect until superseded by a more current publication. Current prevailing wage rate schedules for Heavy Construction, Highway Construction, and Nonconstruction Services occupations can be found on the internet at www.mtwagehoubopa.com or by contacting the department at (406) 444-6543. E. Rates to Use for Projects ARM, 24.17.127(1)(c), states “The wage rates applicable to a particular public works project are those in effect at the time the bid specifications are advertised.” F. Wage Rate Adjustments for Multiyear Contracts Section 18-2-417, MCA states: “(1) Any public works contract that by the terms of the original contract calls for more than 30 months to fully perform must include a provision to adjust, as provided in subsection (2), the standard prevailing rate of wages to be paid to the workers performing the contract. (2) The standard prevailing rate of wages paid to workers under a contract subject to this section must be adjusted 12 months after the date of the award of the public works contract. The amount of the adjustment must be a 3% increase. The adjustment must be made and applied every 12 months for the term of the contract. (3) Any increase in the standard rate of prevailing wages for workers under this section is the sole responsibility of the contractor and any subcontractors and not the contracting agency.” 4 G. Fringe Benefits Section 18-2-412, MCA states: “(1) To fulfill the obligation...a contractor or subcontractor may: (a) pay the amount of fringe benefits and the basic hourly rate of pay that is part of the standard prevailing rate of wages directly to the worker or employee in cash; (b) make an irrevocable contribution to a trustee or a third person pursuant to a fringe benefit fund, plan, or program that meets the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 or that is a bona fide program approved by the U. S. department of labor; or (c) make payments using any combination of methods set forth in subsections (1)(a) and (1)(b) so that the aggregate of payments and contributions is not less than the standard prevailing rate of wages, including fringe benefits and travel allowances, applicable to the district for the particular type of work being performed. (2) The fringe benefit fund, plan, or program described in subsection (1)(b) must provide benefits to workers or employees for health care, pensions on retirement or death, life insurance, disability and sickness insurance, or bona fide programs that meet the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 or that are approved by the U. S. department of labor.” Fringe benefits are paid for all hours worked (straight time and overtime hours). However, fringe benefits are not to be considered a part of the hourly rate of pay for calculating overtime, unless there is a collectively bargained agreement in effect that specifies otherwise. H. Prevailing Wage Districts Montana counties are aggregated into 4 districts for the purpose of prevailing wage. The prevailing wage districts are composed of the following counties: 5 I. Dispatch City ARM, 24.17.103(11), defines dispatch city as “...the courthouse in the city from the following list which is closest to the center of the job: Billings, Bozeman, Butte, Great Falls, Helena, Kalispell, and Missoula.” A dispatch city shall be considered the point of origin only for jobs within the counties identified in that district (as shown below): District 1 – Kalispell and Missoula: includes Flathead, Lake, Lincoln, Mineral, Missoula, Ravalli, and Sanders; District 2 – Butte and Helena: includes Beaverhead, Broadwater, Deer Lodge, Glacier, Granite, Jefferson, Lewis and Clark, Liberty, Madison, Pondera, Powell, Silver Bow, Teton, and Toole; District 3 – Bozeman and Great Falls: includes Blaine, Cascade, Chouteau, Fergus, Gallatin, Golden Valley, Hill, Judith Basin, Meagher, Park, Petroleum, Phillips, Sweet Grass, and Wheatland; District 4 – Billings: includes Big Horn, Carbon, Carter, Custer, Daniels, Dawson, Fallon, Garfield, McCone, Musselshell, Powder River, Prairie, Richland, Roosevelt, Rosebud, Sheridan, Stillwater, Treasure, Valley, Wibaux, and Yellowstone. J. Zone Pay Zone pay is not travel pay. ARM, 24.17.103(24), defines zone pay as “...an amount added to the base pay; the combined sum then becomes the new base wage rate to be paid for all hours worked on the project. Zone pay must be determined by measuring the road miles one way over the shortest practical maintained route from the dispatch city to the center of the job.” See section I above for a list of dispatch cities. K. Computing Travel Benefits ARM, 24.17.103(22), states “ ‘Travel pay,’ also referred to as ‘travel allowance,’ is and must be paid for travel both to and from the job site, except those with special provisions listed under the classification. The rate is determined by measuring the road miles one direction over the shortest practical maintained route from the dispatch city or the employee's home, whichever is closer, to the center of the job.” See section I above for a list of dispatch cities. L. Per Diem ARM, 24.17.103(18), states “ ‘Per diem’ typically covers costs associated with board and lodging expenses. Per diem is paid when an employee is required to work at a location outside the daily commuting distance and is required to stay at that location overnight or longer.” M. Apprentices Wage rates for apprentices registered in approved federal or state apprenticeship programs are contained in those programs. Additionally, Section 18-2-416(2), MCA states “…The full amount of any applicable fringe benefits must be paid to the apprentice while the apprentice is working on the public works contract.” Apprentices not registered in approved federal or state apprenticeship programs will be paid the appropriate journey level prevailing wage rate when working on a public works contract. N. Posting Notice of Prevailing Wages Section 18-2-406, MCA provides that contractors, subcontractors and employers who are “…performing work or providing construction services under public works contracts, as provided in this part, shall post in a prominent and accessible site on the project or staging area, not later than the first day of work and continuing for the entire duration of the project, a legible statement of all wages and fringe benefits to be paid to the employees.” O. Employment Preference Sections 18-2-403 and 18-2-409, MCA requires contractors to give preference to the employment of bona fide Montana residents in the performance of work on public works contracts. 6 P. Projects of a Mixed Nature Section 18-2-408, MCA states: “(1) The contracting agency shall determine, based on the preponderance of labor hours to be worked, whether the public works construction services project is classified as a highway construction project, a heavy construction project, or a building construction project. (2) Once the project has been classified, employees in each trade classification who are working on that project must be paid at the rate for that project classification” Q. Occupations Definitions You can find definitions for these occupations on the following Bureau of Labor Statistics website: http://www.bls.gov/oes/current/oes_stru.htm R. Welder Rates Welders receive the rate prescribed for the craft performing an operation to which welding is incidental. S. Foreman Rates Rates are no longer set for foremen. However, if a foreman performs journey level work, the foreman must be paid at least the journey level rate. 7 BOILERMAKERS WAGE RATES Wage Benefit Travel: District 1 $32.19 $30.61 All Districts District 2 $32.19 $30.61 0-120 mi. free zone District 3 $32.19 $30.61 >120 mi. federal mileage rate/mi. District 4 $32.19 $30.61 Special Provision: Duties Include: Construct, assemble, maintain, and repair stationary steam boilers, boiler house auxiliaries, process vessels, and pressure vessels. Travel is paid only at the beginning and end of the job. Per Diem: All Districts 0-70 mi. free zone >70-120 mi. $65.00/day >120 mi. $80.00/day ↑ Back to Table of Contents BRICK, BLOCK, AND STONE MASONS Wage Benefit Travel: District 1 $28.71 $14.79 All Districts District 2 $28.71 $14.79 0-45 mi. free zone District 3 $28.71 $14.79 >45-60 mi. $32.50/day District 4 $28.71 $14.79 >60-90 mi. $62.00/day >90 mi. $75.00/day ↑ Back to Table of Contents CARPENTERS Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $23.00 $13.07 All Districts District 2 $23.00 $13.36 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $23.23 $13.07 >30-60 mi. base pay + $4.00/hr. District 4 $23.00 $13.07 >60 mi. base pay + $6.00/hr. Duties Include: Install roll and batt insulation, and hardwood floors. ↑ Back to Table of Contents 8 CEMENT MASONS AND CONCRETE FINISHERS Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $22.21 $12.18 All Districts District 2 $22.21 $12.18 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $21.80 $12.18 >30-60 mi. base pay + $2.95/hr. District 4 $22.21 $12.18 >60 mi. base pay + $4.75/hr. Duties Include: Smooth and finish surfaces of poured concrete, such as floors, walks, sidewalks, or curbs. Align forms for sidewalks, curbs, or gutters. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 1 Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $27.41 $13.25 All Districts District 2 $27.41 $13.25 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $27.41 $13.25 >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. District 4 $27.41 $13.25 >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. This group includes but is not limited to: Air Compressor; Auto Fine Grader; Belt Finishing; Boring Machine (Small); Cement Silo; Crane, A-Frame Truck Crane; Crusher Conveyor; DW-10, 15, and 20 Tractor Roller; Farm Tractor; Forklift; Form Grader; Front-End Loader, under 1 cu. yd; Oiler, Heavy Duty Drills; Herman Nelson Heater; Mucking Machine; Oiler, All Except Cranes/Shovels; Pumpman. ↑ Back to Table of Contents 9 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 2 Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $28.20 $13.25 All Districts District 2 $28.20 $13.25 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $28.20 $13.25 >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. District 4 $28.20 $13.25 >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. This group includes but is not limited to: Air Doctor; Backhoe\Excavator\Shovel, up to and incl. 3 cu. yds; Bit Grinder; Bitunimous Paving Travel Plant; Boring Machine, Large; Broom, Self-Propelled; Concrete Travel Batcher; Concrete Float & Spreader; Concrete Bucket Dispatcher; Concrete Finish Machine; Concrete Conveyor; Distributor; Dozer, Rubber-Tired, Push, & Side Boom; Elevating Grader\Gradall; Field Equipment Serviceman; Front-End Loader, 1 cu. yd up to and incl. 5 cu. yds; Grade Setter; Gravel Conveyor; Heavy Duty Drills, All Types; Hoist\Tugger, All; Hydralift Forklifts & Similar; Industrial Locomotive; Motor Patrol (except finish); Mountain Skidder; Oiler, Cranes\Shovels; Pavement Breaker, EMSCO; Power Saw, Self- Propelled; Pugmill; Pumpcrete\Grout Machine; Punch Truck; Roller, other than Asphalt; Roller, Sheepsfoot (Self-Propelled); Roller, 25 tons and over; Ross Carrier; Rotomill, under 6 ft; Trenching Machine; Washing /Screening Plant. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 3 Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $28.95 $13.25 All Districts District 2 $28.95 $13.25 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $28.95 $13.25 >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. District 4 $28.95 $13.25 >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. This group includes but is not limited to: Asphalt Paving Machine; Asphalt Screed; Backhoe\Excavator\Shovel, over 3 cu. yds; Cableway Highline; Concrete Batch Plant; Concrete Curing Machine; Concrete Pump; Cranes, Creter; Cranes, Electric Overhead; Cranes, 24 tons and under; Curb Machine\Slip Form Paver; Finish Dozer; Front-End Loader, over 5 cu. yds; Mechanic\Welder; Pioneer Dozer; Roller Asphalt (Breakdown & Finish); Rotomill, over 6 ft; Scraper, Single, Twin, or Pulling Belly-Dump; YO-YO Cat. ↑ Back to Table of Contents 10 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 4 Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $29.95 $13.25 All Districts District 2 $29.95 $13.25 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $29.95 $13.25 >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. District 4 $29.95 $13.25 >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. This group includes but is not limited to: Asphalt\Hot Plant Operator; Cranes, 25 tons up to and incl. 44 tons; Crusher Operator; Finish Motor Patrol; Finish Scraper. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 5 Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $30.95 $13.25 All Districts District 2 $30.95 $13.25 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $30.95 $13.25 >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. District 4 $30.95 $13.25 >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 45 tons up to and incl. 74 tons. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 6 Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $31.95 $13.25 All Districts District 2 $31.95 $13.25 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $31.95 $13.25 >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. District 4 $31.95 $13.25 >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 75 tons up to and incl. 149 tons; Cranes, Whirley (All). ↑ Back to Table of Contents 11 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT OPERATORS GROUP 7 Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $32.95 $13.25 All Districts District 2 $32.95 $13.25 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $32.95 $13.25 >30-60 mi. base pay + $3.50/hr. District 4 $32.95 $13.25 >60 mi. base pay + $5.50/hr. This group includes but is not limited to: Cranes, 150 tons up to and incl. 250 tons; Cranes, over 250 tons—add $1.00 for every 100 tons over 250 tons; Crane, Tower (All); Crane Stiff-Leg or Derrick; Helicopter Hoist. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 1/FLAG PERSON FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $19.90 $9.22 All Districts District 2 $19.90 $9.22 0-15 mi. free zone District 3 $19.90 $9.22 >15-30 mi. base pay + $0.65/hr. District 4 $19.90 $9.22 >30-50 mi. base pay + $0.85/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $1.25/hr. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 2 Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $19.11 $6.92 All Districts District 2 $22.35 $9.22 0-15 mi. free zone District 3 $22.67 $5.18 >15-30 mi. base pay + $0.65/hr. District 4 $20.87 $4.93 >30-50 mi. base pay + $0.85/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $1.25/hr. This group includes but is not limited to: General Labor; Asbestos Removal; Burning Bar; Bucket Man; Carpenter Tender; Caisson Worker; Cement Mason Tender; Cement Handler (dry); Chuck Tender; Choker Setter; Concrete Worker; Curb Machine-lay Down; Crusher and Batch Worker; Heater Tender; Fence Erector; Landscape Laborer; Landscaper; Lawn Sprinkler Installer; Pipe Wrapper; Pot Tender; Powderman Tender; Rail and Truck Loaders and Unloaders; Riprapper; Sign Erection; Guardrail and Jersey Rail; Spike Driver; Stake Jumper; Signalman; Tail Hoseman; Tool Checker and Houseman and Traffic Control Worker. ↑ Back to Table of Contents 12 CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 3 Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $20.90 $9.22 All Districts District 2 $20.90 $9.22 0-15 mi. free zone District 3 $20.90 $9.22 >15-30 mi. base pay + $0.65/hr. District 4 $20.90 $9.22 >30-50 mi. base pay + $0.85/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $1.25/hr. This group includes but is not limited to: Concrete Vibrator; Dumpman (Grademan); Equipment Handler; Geotextile and Liners; High-Pressure Nozzleman; Jackhammer (Pavement Breaker) Non- Riding Rollers; Pipelayer; Posthole Digger (Power); Power Driven Wheelbarrow; Rigger; Sandblaster; Sod Cutter-Power and Tamper. ↑ Back to Table of Contents CONSTRUCTION LABORERS GROUP 4 Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $22.44 $9.67 All Districts District 2 $22.44 $9.67 0-15 mi. free zone District 3 $22.44 $9.67 >15-30 mi. base pay + $0.65/hr. District 4 $22.44 $9.67 >30-50 mi. base pay + $0.85/hr. >50 mi. base pay + $1.25/hr. This group includes but is not limited to: Hod Carrier***; Water Well Laborer; Blaster; Wagon Driller; Asphalt Raker; Cutting Torch; Grade Setter; High-Scaler; Power Saws (Faller & Concrete) Powderman; Rock & Core Drill; Track or Truck Mounted Wagon Drill and Welder incl. Air Arc. ↑ Back to Table of Contents DRYWALL APPLICATORS Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $23.00 $13.07 All Districts District 2 $23.00 $13.36 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $23.00 $13.07 >30-60 mi. base pay + $4.00/hr. District 4 $23.00 $13.07 >60 mi. base pay + $6.00/hr. Duties Include: Drywall and ceiling tile installation. ↑ Back to Table of Contents 13 ELECTRICIANS: INCLUDING BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL Wage Benefit District 1 $30.51 $14.17 District 2 $30.38 $13.77 District 3 $31.05 $13.15 District 4 $33.58 $13.93 Duties Include: Electrical wiring; equipment and fixtures; street lights; electrical control systems. Installation and/or adjusting of building automation controls also during testing and balancing, commissioning and retro-commissioning. Travel: District 1 No mileage due when traveling in employer’s vehicle. The following travel allowance is applicable when traveling in employee’s vehicle: 0-10 mi. free zone >10-45 mi. $0.585/mi. in excess of the free zone. >45 mi. $75.00/day Districts 2 & 3 No mileage due when traveling in employer’s vehicle. The following travel allowance is applicable when traveling in employee’s vehicle: 0-08 mi. free zone >08-50 mi. federal mileage rate/mi. in excess of the free zone. >50 mi. $66.00/day District 4 No mileage due when traveling in employer’s vehicle. The following travel allowance is applicable when traveling in employee’s vehicle: 0-18 mi. free zone >18-60 mi. federal mileage rate/mi. >60 mi. $75.00/day ↑ Back to Table of Contents ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS Wage Benefit Travel: District 1 $52.41 $33.00 All Districts District 2 $52.41 $33.00 0-15 mi. free zone District 3 $52.41 $33.00 >15-25 mi. $42.01/day District 4 $52.41 $33.00 >25-35 mi. $84.01/day >35 mi. $84.90/day or cost of receipts for hotel and meals, whichever is greater. ↑ Back to Table of Contents 14 FLOOR LAYERS (EXCEPT CARPET, WOOD, AND HARD TILES) No Rate Established Apply blocks, strips, or sheets of shock-absorbing, sound-deadening, or decorative coverings to floors. Travel and Per Diem: All Districts No travel or per diem established ↑ Back to Table of Contents GLAZIERS Wage Benefit Travel and Per Diem: District 1 $18.48 $2.74 All Districts District 2 $18.01 $2.50 No travel or per diem established. District 3 $18.82 $2.82 District 4 $19.81 $3.02 ↑ Back to Table of Contents HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Wage Benefit Travel: District 1 $29.62 $18.00 All Districts District 2 $29.62 $18.00 0-50 mi. free zone District 3 $29.62 $18.00 >50 mi. District 4 $29.62 $18.00  $0.25/mi. in employer vehicle.  $0.65/mi. in employee vehicle. Duties Include: Testing and balancing, commissioning and retro- commissioning of all air-handling equipment and duct work. Per Diem: All Districts $70/day ↑ Back to Table of Contents 15 INSULATION WORKERS - MECHANICAL (HEAT AND FROST) Wage Benefit Travel: District 1 $31.17 $19.47 All Districts District 2 $31.17 $19.47 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $31.17 $19.47 >30-40 mi. $20.00/day District 4 $31.17 $19.47 >40-50 mi. $30.00/day >50-60 mi. $40.00/day Duties Include: >60 mi. $45.00/day plus Insulate pipes, ductwork or other mechanical systems.  $0.56/mi. if transportation is not provided.  $0.20/mi. if in company vehicle. >60 mi. $86.00/day on jobs requiring an overnight stay plus  $0.56/mi. if transportation is not provided.  $0.20/mi. if in company vehicle. ↑ Back to Table of Contents IRONWORKERS - STRUCTURAL STEEL AND REBAR PLACERS Wage Benefit District 1 $27.75 $25.45 District 2 $27.25 $22.14 District 3 $27.25 $22.14 District 4 $27.25 $22.14 Duties Include: Structural steel erection; assemble prefabricated metal buildings; cut, bend, tie, and place rebar; energy producing windmill type towers; metal bleacher seating; handrail fabrication and ornamental steel. Travel: District 1 0-45 mi. free zone >45-60 mi. $40.00/day >60-100 mi. $65.00/day >100 mi. $85.00/day Special Provision: When the employer provides transportation, travel will not be paid. However, when an employee is required to travel over 70 miles one way, the employee may elect to receive the travel pay in lieu of the transportation. Districts 2, 3 & 4 0-45 mi. free zone >45-85 mi. $60.00/day >85 mi. $90.00/day ↑ Back to Table of Contents MILLWRIGHTS Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $33.00 $13.07 All Districts District 2 $33.00 $13.36 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $33.00 $13.07 >30-60 mi. base pay + $4.00/hr. District 4 $33.00 $13.07 >60 mi. base pay + $6.00/hr. ↑ Back to Table of Contents 16 PAINTERS: INCLUDING PAPERHANGERS Wage Benefit Travel and Per Diem: District 1 $19.66 $6.98 All Districts District 2 $21.42 $6.81 No travel or per diem established. District 3 $23.47 $6.29 District 4 $19.28 $5.84 ↑ Back to Table of Contents PILE BUCKS Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $30.00 $13.07 All Districts District 2 $30.00 $13.36 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $30.00 $13.07 >30-60 mi. base pay + $4.00/hr. District 4 $30.00 $13.07 >60 mi. base pay + $6.00/hr. Duties Include: Set up crane; set up hammer; weld tips on piles; set leads; insure piles are driven straight with the use of level or plum bob. Give direction to crane operator as to speed and direction of swing. Cut piles to grade. ↑ Back to Table of Contents PLASTERERS Wage Benefit Zone Pay: District 1 $22.21 $12.18 All Districts District 2 $22.21 $12.18 0-30 mi. free zone District 3 $21.80 $12.18 >30-60 mi. base pay + $2.95/hr. District 4 $22.21 $12.18 >60 mi. base pay + $4.75/hr Duties Include: All materials beyond the substrate, such as a moisture barrier, any type of drainage installation between the moisture barrier and insulation or EPS board, the attachment of the EPS board, installation of fiberglass mesh embedded in the base coat, any water-resistant coat that is applied on top of the insulation to serve as a weather barrier, and the application of the finish coat. ↑ Back to Table of Contents 17 PLUMBERS, PIPEFITTERS, AND STEAMFITTERS Wage Benefit District 1 $29.88 $13.56 District 2 $30.00 $16.00 District 3 $30.00 $16.00 District 4 $32.31 $18.36 Duties Include: Assemble, install, alter, and repair pipe-lines or pipe systems that carry water, steam, air, other liquids or gases. Testing of piping systems, commissioning and retro-commissioning. Workers in this occupation may also install heating and cooling equipment and mechanical control systems. Travel: District 1 0-30 mi. free zone >30-50 mi. $25.00/day >50-75 mi. $40.00/day >75 mi. $75.00/day Special Provision If transportation is not provided, mileage at $0.35/mi. with a separate free zone of 20 miles is added to the amounts above. However, if the employee is traveling more than 75 miles/day, only subsistence is required. Districts 2 & 3 0-40 mi. free zone >40-80 mi. $30.00/day >80 mi. $60.00/day Special Provision: If employer provides transportation, travel pay will be ½ of the amounts listed above unless the employee stays overnight. If the employee chooses to stay overnight, the employee will receive the full amount of travel listed above even if the employer furnishes transportation. District 4 0-70 free zone >70 mi.  On jobs when employees do not work consecutive days: $0.55/mi. if employer doesn’t provide transportation. Not to exceed two trips.  On jobs when employees work any number of consecutive days: $100.00/day. ↑ Back to Table of Contents 18 ROOFERS Wage Benefit District 1 $20.23 $8.63 District 2 $16.00 $9.08 District 3 $19.33 $4.52 District 4 $19.45 $4.31 Duties Include: Metal roofing. Travel: District 1 0-50 mi. free zone >50 mi. $0.35/mi. District 2 and 3 0-25 mi. free zone >25 mi. $0.35/mi only when employer doesn’t provide transportation. District 4 0-30 mi. free zone >30 mi. $0.25/mi only when employer doesn’t provide transportation. Per Diem: District 1 $60.00/day District 2 and 3 Employer pays for room + $25.00/day. District 4 Employer pays for room + $25.00/day. ↑ Back to Table of Contents SHEET METAL WORKERS Wage Benefit District 1 $29.62 $18.00 District 2 $29.62 $18.00 District 3 $29.62 $18.00 District 4 $29.62 $18.00 Duties Include: Testing and balancing, commissioning and retro- commissioning of all air-handling equipment and duct work. Manufacture, fabrication, assembling, installation, dismantling, and alteration of all HVAC systems, air veyer systems, and exhaust systems. All lagging over insulation and all duct lining. Travel: All Districts 0-50 mi. free zone >50 mi.  $0.25/mi. in employer vehicle  $0.65/mi. in employee vehicle Per Diem: All Districts $70.00/day ↑ Back to Table of Contents 19 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC INSTALLERS Wage Benefit Travel: District 1 $30.51 $14.17 District 1 District 2 $31.05 $14.56 No mileage due when traveling in employer’s vehicle. District 3 $31.05 $13.15 District 4 $33.58 $13.93 The following travel allowance is applicable when traveling in employee’s vehicle: 0-10 mi. free zone >10-45 mi. $0.585/mi. in excess of the free zone. >45 mi. $75.00/day Districts 2 & 3 No mileage due when traveling in employer’s vehicle. The following travel allowance is applicable when traveling in employee’s vehicle: 0-08 mi. free zone >08-50 mi. federal mileage rate/mi. in excess of the free zone. >50 mi. $66.00/day District 4 No mileage due when traveling in employer’s vehicle. The following travel allowance is applicable when traveling in employee’s vehicle: 0-18 mi. free zone >18-60 mi. federal mileage rate/mi. >60 mi. $75.00/day ↑ Back to Table of Contents SPRINKLER FITTERS Wage Benefit Travel: District 1 $34.35 $20.44 All Districts District 2 $34.35 $20.44 0-60 mi. free zone District 3 $29.90 $20.44 >60-80 mi. $19.00/day District 4 $34.35 $20.44 >80-100 mi. $29.00/day >100 mi. $100.00/day Duties Include: Duties Include but not limited to any and all fire protection systems: Installation, dismantling, inspection, testing, maintenance, repairs, adjustments, and corrections of all fire protection and fire control systems, including both overhead and underground water mains, all piping, fire hydrants, standpipes, air lines, tanks, and pumps used in connection with sprinkler and alarm systems. ↑ Back to Table of Contents 20 TAPERS Wage Benefit Travel and Per Diem: District 1 $19.66 $6.98 All Districts District 2 $21.42 $6.81 No travel or per diem established. District 3 $23.47 $6.29 District 4 $19.28 $5.84 ↑ Back to Table of Contents TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS Wage Benefit District 1 $27.23 $9.58 District 2 $23.62 $6.96 District 3 $23.57 $7.85 District 4 $23.47 $7.25 Duties Include: Install voice; sound; vision and data systems. This occupation includes burglar alarms, fire alarms, fiber optic systems, and video systems for security or entertainment. Travel: All Districts The federal mileage rate/mi. in effect when travel occurs if using own vehicle. Per Diem: All Districts Employer pays for meals and lodging up to $75.00/day. When jobsite is located in Big Sky, West Yellowstone, and Gardiner, lodging and meals will be provided by the employer for all actual and reasonable expenses incurred. ↑ Back to Table of Contents TILE, TERRAZZO AND MARBLE FINISHERS No Rate Established Duties Include: Finish work on hard tile, marble, and wood tile to floors, ceilings, and roof decks. Travel: All Districts 0-60 mi. free zone >60-75 mi. $30.00/day >75-215 mi. $65.00/day >215 mi. $80.00/day ↑ Back to Table of Contents TILE, TERRAZZO AND MARBLE SETTERS No Rate Established Duties Include: Apply hard tile, marble, and wood tile to floors, ceilings, and roof decks. Travel: All Districts 0-60 mi. free zone >60-75 mi. $30.00/day >75-215 mi. $65.00/day >215 mi. $80.00/day ↑ Back to Table of Contents 20 No Rate Established This group includes but is not limited to: Combination Truck & Concrete Mixer; Distributor Driver; Dry Batch Trucks; DumpTrucks & Similar Equipment; Flat Trucks; Lowboys, Four-Wheel Trailers, Float Semitrailer; Powder Truck Driver (Bulk Unloader Type); Servicemen; Service Truck Drivers, Fuel Truck Drivers, Tiremen; Trucks with Power Equipment; Truck Mechanic; Water Tank Drivers, Petroleum Product Drivers. ↑ Back to Table of Contents ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BLDG. 20 E. Olive Street Bozeman, Montana Report Requested By: CITY OF BOZEMAN DATE OF INSPECTION: 12/26/15 ASBESTOS INSPECTION REPORT FOR CITY OF BOZEMAN ALFRED M. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING Prepared By: Environmental Solutions LLC Page 2 Table of Contents Introduction ............................................................................................................................................... 3 Inspection Procedures ............................................................................................................................... 3 Inspection Summary Table ........................................................................................................................ 5 Disclaimer .................................................................................................................................................. 8 Appendix A – Photographs of Samples ..................................................................................................... 9 Appendix B – Sample Analysis Report by EMSL Raleigh, NC Laboratory ................................................ 14 Appendix C – Chain of Custody Documents ............................................................................................ 23 Appendix D – Floor Plans ......................................................................................................................... 26 Appendix E – Acronyms & Abbreviations ................................................................................................ 30 Credentials Authored By: ______________________________________ Sonia Rogers, IH Reviewed By: ______________________________________ Scott Rogers, CIH, CHMM Asbestos Certifications: Name MTA # Inspector Contractor / Supervisor Project Designer Management Planner Scott Rogers, CIH CSP CHMM 2322 09/13/2016 09/15/2016 09/12/2016 09/12/2016 Sonia Rogers, IH 3150 09/13/2016 09/15/2016 09/12/2016 Darrell Freeland 3892 02/12/2016 02/11/2016 Environmental Solutions LLC Page 3 INTRODUCTION Sonia Rogers and Scott Rogers, of Environmental Solutions LLC performed an asbestos inspection on December 26, 2015 of the Alfred M. Stiff Professional Building located at 20 E. Olive Street, Bozeman, Montana. This evaluation was performed at the request of Lonnie Wirtz with the Facilities Department for the City of Bozeman. The two story building that was built in the early 1970’s and sits on the corner of Olive Street and Black is constructed of concrete and brick with a flat built up roof and sits on a concrete basement. The building has undergone multiple renovations over the years. In the late 1970’s the upper level (2 nd Floor) was added. In 1998 a major renovation to the main floor was completed. The basement bathrooms were remodeled in 2002. A complete boiler replacement was completed in 2003. The second floor also received a remodel in 2005. And the roof was complete replaced in 2012. The intent of this report is to properly identify the presence of asbestos containing materials that will be impacted during upcoming renovation projects and does not include any roofing materials. This report and its recommendations are pursuant to the NESHAP requirements (40 CFR 61.145) and the Administrative Rules of Montana (17.74.307) as administered by the Montana Department of Environmental Quality, Asbestos Control Program. The regulations require the building owner to have the facility inspected for the presence of asbestos containing material(s) (ACM) prior to the construction, renovation or demolition of the facility. The owner is required to provide information obtained from the inspection to those who may be impacted such as, but not limited to, contractors, sub-contractors and/or employees. ARM 17.74.307 requires that the inspection be conducted by a Montana Accredited Inspector. INSPECTION PROCEDURES The inspection was conducted by our accredited inspectors, Sonia Rogers and Scott Rogers, and consisted of a visual survey of the building. Following a brief review, the inspectors entered the building with sampling equipment and began to assess the homogenous areas. Suspect ACBM was then grouped into homogenous materials and a sampling plan was developed and materials were collected. Inspectors determined that 29 homogeneous materials were present and collected 96 representative samples from these materials. One (1) of the 29 materials was found to contain asbestos quantities greater than 1% (9x9 Floor Tile w/Mastic). One (1) material was found to contain asbestos quantities of a trace or less than 1% (Linoleum Glue). Two (2) materials were assumed to contain quantities greater than 1% (Stainless Steel Sink Insulation and the Incinerator). See the Inspection Summary for a more detailed description and location of materials sampled. Materials were collected wet to avoid dust generation and placed into Ziploc bags for transport. The materials were submitted to EMSL Laboratories, Raleigh, North Carolina. EMSL is an “accredited” laboratory under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), Laboratory Code #200671-0, which employs Polarized Light Microscopic (PLM) techniques with dispersion staining for identification of mineral forms of asbestos. The quantification of asbestos in the sample is intended to be an estimate only and the limit of detection for this method is approximately 1% by volume. Environmental Solutions LLC Page 4 Bulk samples obtained during the inspection were assigned bulk sample numbers and entered on the sample summary / chain of custody forms. The samples were transported to the laboratory via Fed-Ex (Standard Overnight). Sample locations for this survey were chosen in a random fashion, with emphasis placed on obtaining samples of each type of accessible, suspect material and minimizing damage to the material being sampled. Samples were collected by carefully removing small portions of the suspect material in a non- invasive manner, when possible. If possible, samples from existing damaged areas or loose pieces of material were collected. The intent of the inspection was to identify the suspect materials, assume that materials contain asbestos or collect samples of materials to determine if they are ACM and assess the friability of the materials. Materials that were assumed to contain asbestos or that were identified as containing greater than 1% asbestos were categorized as a regulated asbestos containing material (RACM), Category I Non-Friable ACM, Category I RACM or Category II Non-Friable ACM based on the type and the condition of the material. Sample analysis results are included in Appendix B and Chain of Custody documents are included in Appendix C. Environmental Solutions LLC Page 5 ENVIRONMENTAL SOLUTIONS INSPECTION SUMMARY SAMPLE ID SAMPLE DESCRIPTION SAMPLE COLOR APPROX SQ/FT MATERIAL DESIGNATION LAB RESULTS MATERIAL LOCATIONS RECOMMENDATIONS 01, 02, 03 12x12 Ceiling Tiles White & Brown N/A N/A None Detected Elevator Machine Room N/A 04, 05, 06 12x12 Ceiling Tile Glue Brown N/A N/A None Detected Elevator Machine Room N/A 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 Drywall / Mud / Texture White N/A N/A None Detected Throughout the Interior of the Building N/A 16, 17, 18 2x2 Ceiling Tile White & Gray N/A N/A None Detected Basement Level N/A 19, 20, 21 9x9 Floor Tile w/Mastic Pink w/Gray & White Category I Non-Friable Tile = 2-3% Chrysotile Mastic = 5-8% Chrysotile Basement File Storage Rooms *See Notes Below Renovation that requires the removal of the floor tiles and/or Mastic must include the abatement of the materials and must be performed by a Montana accredited asbestos abatement contractor according to local, state, and federal regulations. 22, 23, 24 4” Rubber Base w/Glue Black N/A N/A None Detected Basement Hallways and Rooms N/A 25, 26, 27 12x12 Floor Tile Blue w/Specs N/A N/A None Detected Basement File Storage Room File Track Platform N/A 28, 29, 30 Linoleum w/Glue Beige w/Square Pattern N/A N/A Lino = None Detected Glue = <1% Chrysotile Basement Restrooms N/A 31, 32, 33 4” Rubber Base w/Glue White N/A N/A None Detected Basement Restrooms N/A Environmental Solutions LLC Page 6 ENVIRONMENTAL SOLUTIONS INSPECTION SUMMARY SAMPLE ID SAMPLE DESCRIPTION SAMPLE COLOR APPROX SQ/FT MATERIAL DESIGNATION LAB RESULTS MATERIAL LOCATIONS RECOMMENDATIONS 46, 47, 48 8x8 Terracotta Brick Red N/A N/A None Detected Basement Mechanical Room N/A 49, 50, 51 8x8 Terracotta Brick Mortar Gray N/A N/A None Detected Basement Mechanical Room N/A 52, 53, 54 Fire Brick Cream N/A N/A None Detected Basement Boiler Room N/A 55, 56, 57 Fire Brick Mortar Gray N/A N/A None Detected Basement Boiler Room N/A 58, 59, 60 Chimney Brick Red N/A N/A None Detected Basement Boiler Room N/A 61, 62, 63 2x4 Ceiling Tile White & Gray N/A N/A None Detected N Hallway Lower Level N/A 64, 65, 66 Linoleum Green w/Gray Specs N/A N/A None Detected 2nd Floor – Janitor/Storage and Janitor’s Closet N/A 67, 68, 69 2x2 Ceiling Tile White & Gray N/A N/A None Detected 2nd Floor N/A 70, 71, 72 Linoleum Red N/A N/A None Detected 2nd Floor Restrooms N/A 73, 74, 75 Felt Membrane Dark Brown N/A N/A None Detected Between Wood Subfloors on Main Level and Upper Level N/A 76, 77, 78 Linoleum Beige Leaf Pattern N/A N/A None Detected Main Floor West End Men’s Restroom, Janitors Closet, Server/Phone Room & Planning Restroom N/A 79, 80, 81 Linoleum Gray w/Black Streaks N/A N/A None Detected Main Floor West End Women’s Restroom N/A 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87 Various Carpets Multi N/A N/A None Detected Throughout all Three Levels N/A Environmental Solutions LLC Page 7 ENVIRONMENTAL SOLUTIONS INSPECTION SUMMARY SAMPLE ID SAMPLE DESCRIPTION SAMPLE COLOR APPROX SQ/FT MATERIAL DESIGNATION LAB RESULTS MATERIAL LOCATIONS RECOMMENDATIONS 94, 95, 96 Exterior Caulk Gray w/White N/A N/A None Detected Located between the Brick and Concrete Foundation N/A N/A Stainless Steel Sinks w/Insulation Silver & Black 2 Sinks Category II Non-Friable Assumed Main Floor Break Room and Upper Level Break Room Note: Sink in Upper Lever Suite 208 has a Rubber Coating and is not assumed to contain asbestos. Sinks must be removed prior to renovation/demolition and disposed of as asbestos containing waste. Work to be performed by a Montana Accredited Abatement Contractor according to local, state, and federal regulations. N/A Incinerator Silver To Be Determined RACM Assumed **See Notes Below Impact of this assumed asbestos containing material is regulated by both environmental and worker protection regulations. Asbestos accredited persons must perform all work impacting, disturbing, or requiring the removal of this material following regulatory requirements. Materials containing >1% Asbestos Materials of Note – Containing Trace Amounts of Asbestos ENVIRONMENTAL SOLUTIONS INSPECTION SUMMARY *Mastic: Black Mastic is located throughout the building either under 9x9 Floor Tiles or underneath of carpet. All areas with black mastic should be treated as asbestos containing, and all work is to be performed by licensed Montana Abatement Contractor. Areas with black mastic underneath of floor tiles are identified above. Mastic located underneath carpet is identified in the following areas (Basement Hallways, Basement Conference Room, Basement Tool Room, LL03 A, B, C, D, E, F, LL03 Elect. Storage, LL05, LL07, LL09, and LL21). Black mastic is also located in the North and South Stairwells on all levels underneath of the floor coverings and under the Linoleum in the Men and Women’s Restrooms in the basement. **Waste Incinerator NOTE: There are multiple suspect materials on or part of the incinerator. The doors to the incinerator at the time of the inspection were sealed shut and interior materials were inaccessible. All material that make up the incinerator are to be assumed to contain asbestos until otherwise tested. Window NOTE: All of the windows observed by inspectors were metal or wood framed with rubber gaskets. Roofing Materials NOTE: The roof was replaced in 2012 and at the request of the customer no inspection or sampling of these materials were performed. Areas of Limited or No Access:  Vertical pipe chases behind walls (limited access). All visible pipe chases contained straight runs of fiberglass insulation.  Elevator brakes and shoes have not been tested due to access and safety of the elevator operation while it is still in use. All other Elevator components are free of Environmental Solutions LLC Page 8 DISCLAIMERS This document and its contents incorporated herein, is proprietary information and as an instrument of professional services, is the property of Environmental Solutions LLC, and are not to be used, in part or in whole for any other project without the written authorization of Environmental Solutions LLC. This asbestos assessment report was prepared based on information obtained during the surveys, interpretation of the laboratory results of bulk samples of building materials collected during the surveys. The conclusions of this report are professional opinions based solely upon visual site observations and interpretations of laboratory analysis and field data as described in our report. This report has been prepared to provide information concerning the various types and estimated quantities of asbestos-containing materials that will be impacted during upcoming renovations. While extreme effort was made to inspect every aspect of the building, it still includes only those materials that were visible and accessible at the time of our inspection. Our opinions are intended exclusively for use by the City of Bozeman. The scope of services performed by Environmental Solutions LLC may not be appropriate to satisfy the needs of other users, and any use or re-use of this document, or the findings presented herein, is at the sole risk of the user. The opinions presented herein apply to the site conditions existing at the time of our investigation. Therefore, our opinions and recommendations may not apply to future conditions that may exist at the site, which we have not had the opportunity to evaluate. Environmental Solutions LLC Page 9 APPENDIX A PHOTOGRAPHS OF SAMPLES 12x12 Ceiling Tile 12x12 Ceiling Tile Glue Example of Drywall / Mud / Texture 2x2 Ceiling Tiles 9x9 Floor Tile & Black Mastic 4” Rubber Base Environmental Solutions LLC Page 10 APPENDIX A PHOTOGRAPHS OF SAMPLES CONTINUED 12x12 Floor Tile (Blue w/Specs) Linoleum – Beige w/Square Pattern 4” Rubber Base 2x2 Ceiling Tile CMU Cloth Wrap on Straight Runs of Pipe Environmental Solutions LLC Page 11 APPENDIX A PHOTOGRAPHS OF SAMPLES CONTINUED Terracotta Brick & Mortar Fire Brick Chimney Brick & Mortar 2x4 Ceiling Tiles Linoleum – Green w/Gray Specs 2x2 Ceiling Tiles Environmental Solutions LLC Page 12 APPENDIX A PHOTOGRAPHS OF SAMPLES Linoleum - Red Felt on Wood Sub Floors Linoleum – Beige w/Leaf Pattern Linoleum – Gray w/Black Splashes Exterior Brick & Mortar Exterior Caulk – Between Foundation & Brick Environmental Solutions LLC Page 13 APPENDIX A PHOTOGRAPHS OF SAMPLES Coating on Stainless Steel Sinks Incinerator Environmental Solutions LLC Page 14 APPENDIX B Sample Analysis Report by EMSL Raleigh, NC Laboratory EMSL Analytical, Inc. 2500 Gateway Centre Blvd., Suite 600 Morrisville, NC Tel/Fax: (919) 465-3900 / (919) 465-3950 http://www.EMSL.com / raleighlab@emsl.com EMSL Order: 291507541 Customer ID: ENSO62 Customer PO: Project ID: Attention: Sonia Rogers Phone: (406) 579-1441 Environmental Solutions, LLC Fax: PO Box 7010 Received Date: 12/29/2015 10:00 AM Bozeman, MT 59771 Analysis Date: 1/ 4/2016 Collected Date: Project: 15064 - City of Boz. Prof. Bldg. Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 01 291507541-0001 Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 Ceiling Tile 65% Cellulose 35% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 02 291507541-0002 Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 Ceiling Tile 65% Cellulose 35% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 03 291507541-0003 Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 Ceiling Tile 85% Cellulose 15% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 04-Ceiling Tile 291507541-0004 Brown Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 Ceiling Tile None Detected w/Glue 65% Cellulose 35% Non-fibrous (Other) 04-Glue 291507541-0004A Brown Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 Ceiling Tile None Detected w/Glue 3% Cellulose 97% Non-fibrous (Other) 05-Ceiling Tile 291507541-0005 Brown Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 Ceiling Tile None Detected w/Glue EMSL Analytical, Inc. 2500 Gateway Centre Blvd., Suite 600 Morrisville, NC Tel/Fax: (919) 465-3900 / (919) 465-3950 http://www.EMSL.com / raleighlab@emsl.com EMSL Order: 291507541 Customer ID: ENSO62 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 09-Mud 291507541-0009A White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture <1% Wollastonite 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 09-Texture 291507541-0009B White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 5% Cellulose 95% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 10-Drywall 291507541-0010 Gray/White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 25% Cellulose 75% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 10-Mud 291507541-0010A White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% None Detected 2% Cellulose Glass 96% Non-fibrous (Other) 10-Texture 291507541-0010B White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 3% Cellulose 97% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 11-Drywall 291507541-0011 Gray/White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 10% None Detected 2% Cellulose Glass 88% Non-fibrous (Other) 11-Mud 291507541-0011A White EMSL Analytical, Inc. 2500 Gateway Centre Blvd., Suite 600 Morrisville, NC Tel/Fax: (919) 465-3900 / (919) 465-3950 http://www.EMSL.com / raleighlab@emsl.com EMSL Order: 291507541 Customer ID: ENSO62 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 15-Texture 291507541-0015B Tan Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% None Detected 2% Cellulose Glass 96% Non-fibrous (Other) 16 291507541-0016 Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous 2x2 Ceiling Tiles 15% None Detected 60% 20% Cellulose Min. Wool Glass 5% Non-fibrous (Other) 17 291507541-0017 Brown/White Fibrous Homogeneous 2x2 Ceiling Tiles 15% None Detected 60% 20% Cellulose Min. Wool Glass 5% Non-fibrous (Other) 18 291507541-0018 Tan/White Fibrous Heterogeneous 2x2 Ceiling Tiles 40% None Detected 20% Cellulose Min. Wool 20% 20% Perlite Non-fibrous (Other) EMSL Analytical, Inc. 2500 Gateway Centre Blvd., Suite 600 Morrisville, NC Tel/Fax: (919) 465-3900 / (919) 465-3950 http://www.EMSL.com / raleighlab@emsl.com EMSL Order: 291507541 Customer ID: ENSO62 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 28-Linoleum 291507541-0028 Various Fibrous Homogeneous Linoleum w/Glue 3% Glass 97% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 28-Glue 291507541-0028A Brown/Tan Fibrous Homogeneous Linoleum w/Glue 3% Cellulose 97% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 29-Linoleum 291507541-0029 Various Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Linoleum w/Glue 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 29-Glue 291507541-0029A Brown/Tan Fibrous Homogeneous Linoleum w/Glue 5% Cellulose 95% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 30-Linoleum 291507541-0030 Gray/White Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum w/Glue 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 30-Glue 291507541-0030A Tan/Black Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum w/Glue 3% Cellulose 97% Non-fibrous (Other) <1% Chrysotile 31-Rubber Base 291507541-0031 Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 4" Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 100% Non-fibrous (Other) 31-Glue 291507541-0031A Tan/White EMSL Analytical, Inc. 2500 Gateway Centre Blvd., Suite 600 Morrisville, NC Tel/Fax: (919) 465-3900 / (919) 465-3950 http://www.EMSL.com / raleighlab@emsl.com EMSL Order: 291507541 Customer ID: ENSO62 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 41 291507541-0041 Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Concrete 3% None Detected 2% Cellulose Wollastonite 95% Non-fibrous (Other) 42 291507541-0042 Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Concrete 3% None Detected 2% Cellulose Wollastonite 95% Non-fibrous (Other) 43 291507541-0043 Beige Fibrous Homogeneous Fiberglass Insulation None Detected Wrap 85% Cellulose 15% Non-fibrous (Other) 44 291507541-0044 Tan/Beige Fibrous Homogeneous Fiberglass Insulation None Detected Wrap 85% Cellulose 15% Non-fibrous (Other) 45 291507541-0045 Tan/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous Fiberglass Insulation None Detected Wrap 85% Cellulose 15% Non-fibrous (Other) 46 291507541-0046 Red EMSL Analytical, Inc. 2500 Gateway Centre Blvd., Suite 600 Morrisville, NC Tel/Fax: (919) 465-3900 / (919) 465-3950 http://www.EMSL.com / raleighlab@emsl.com EMSL Order: 291507541 Customer ID: ENSO62 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 60 291507541-0060 Red/Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Chimney Brick 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 61 291507541-0061 White/Beige Fibrous Homogeneous 2x4 Ceiling Tiles 40% None Detected 20% Cellulose Min. Wool 20% 20% Perlite Non-fibrous (Other) 62 291507541-0062 White/Beige Fibrous Homogeneous 2x4 Ceiling Tiles 40% None Detected 20% Cellulose Min. Wool 20% 20% Perlite Non-fibrous (Other) 63 291507541-0063 White/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous 2x4 Ceiling Tiles 40% None Detected 20% Cellulose Min. Wool 20% 20% Perlite Non-fibrous (Other) 64 291507541-0064 EMSL Analytical, Inc. 2500 Gateway Centre Blvd., Suite 600 Morrisville, NC Tel/Fax: (919) 465-3900 / (919) 465-3950 http://www.EMSL.com / raleighlab@emsl.com EMSL Order: 291507541 Customer ID: ENSO62 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type 79 291507541-0079 Gray/Tan Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum 15% None Detected 3% Cellulose Synthetic 82% Non-fibrous (Other) 80 291507541-0080 Gray/Tan Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum 25% None Detected 10% Cellulose Synthetic 65% Non-fibrous (Other) 81 291507541-0081 Gray/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum 15% None Detected 5% Cellulose Synthetic 80% Non-fibrous (Other) 82 291507541-0082 Various/Blue Fibrous Heterogeneous Carpets 5% None Detected 50% Cellulose Synthetic 45% Non-fibrous (Other) 83 291507541-0083 Tan/Various Fibrous Heterogeneous Carpets 5% None Detected 65% EMSL Analytical, Inc. 2500 Gateway Centre Blvd., Suite 600 Morrisville, NC Tel/Fax: (919) 465-3900 / (919) 465-3950 http://www.EMSL.com / raleighlab@emsl.com EMSL Order: 291507541 Customer ID: ENSO62 Customer PO: Project ID: Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/R-93/116 Method using Polarized Light Microscopy Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous Non-Asbestos Asbestos % Type Analyst(s) Billy Barnes (6) Essie Spencer (81) Joshua Moorman (42) Essie Spencer, Laboratory Manager or Other Approved Signatory EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis. This report relates only to the samples reported and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations. Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of the federal government . Non-friable organically bound materials present a problem matrix and therefore EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction prior to analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. Estimated accuracy, precision and uncertainty data available upon request. Unless requested by the client, building materials manufactured with multiple layers (i.e. linoleum, wallboard, etc.) are reported as a single sample. Reporting limit is 1% Samples analyzed by EMSL Analytical, Inc. Morrisville, NC NVLAP Lab Code 200671-0, VA 3333 000278, WVA LT000296 Initial report from: 01/04/2016 16:16:44 PLM - 1.65 Printed: 1/5/2016 8:56 AM Page 8 of 8 Environmental Solutions LLC Page 23 APPENDIX C CHAIN OF CUSTODY DOCUMENTS OrderID: 291507541 Page 1 Of 2 OrderID: 291507541 Page 2 Of 2 Environmental Solutions LLC Page 26 APPENDIX D FLOOR PLANS Mechanical Room Boiler Room Tool LL14 Room Conference Room Incinerator Chimney LL21 Restroom A Restroom B File Storage Room LL02 LL05 LL07 LL09 LL03 A Elec. Storage B C D E F Elev. Machine Room ELEV. B C D LL10 A Water/Sewer Service Gas Closet IT / ELEC. Old "Dumbwaiter" *No Access Floor Plans Are For Illustrative Purpose Only 120 118 116 Women's Restroom Break Room 114 112 102 110 104 108 106 ELEV. North Vestibule Restroom South Vestibule 126 128 130 132 134 124 122 129 131 Men's Restroom Server / Phone Room 115 Work Room 111 Plat Room Reception Janitor Closet Floor Plans Are For Illustrative Purpose Only 206 Suite 202 Break Room 204 ELEV. Women's Restroom Men's Restroom Janitor/ Storage Phone/Power Closet Suite 208 A Meeting Room Janitor Closet Roof Access 205 106 Coat Closet Suite 203 A 203 B 209 Suite 211 A 211 B 211 C 211 D 211 E 208 Admin. 208 208Reception F 208 E 208 D 208 C 208 B Floor Plans Are For Illustrative Purpose Only Environmental Solutions LLC Page 30 APPENDIX E ABBREVIATIONS A/C asbestos/cement ACM asbestos-containing material AHERA Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act of 1986 ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials BID background information document CAA Clean Air Act CPSC Consumer Products Safety Commission DOT Department of Transportation EPA Environmental Protection Agency ID identification LEV local exhaust ventilation NADC National Association of Demolition Contractors NARS National Asbestos Registry System NESHAP National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health OAQPS Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSW Office of Solid Waste PEL permissible exposure limit PLM polarized light microscopy RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act SARA Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 TEM transmission electron microscopy TSCA Toxic Substances Control Act City of Bozeman Professional Bldg. – Asbestos Report Addendum No. 1 Page 1 of 4 ADDENDUM No.: 1 Number of Pages: 4 Date Issued: 08/30/19 ASBESTOS INSPECTION REPORT ADDENDUM Date of Original Inspection: December 2015 Project: Alfred M. Stiff Professional Building City of Bozeman 20 E. Olive Street Bozeman – Montana Client: City of Bozeman Architecture 118 Original Project Description: Full Building Inspection Reason for Addendum: The City of Bozeman will be undergoing a renovation project on the Stiff Professional building that will impact areas on all three floors. The original inspection was completed in 2015. This Addendum is to re-inspect and confirm building materials to be impacted by this project. This addendum is to be used in conjunction with the original inspection. Date of Inspection: 08/29/19 Sampled By: Sonia Rogers / MTA# 3150 / Exp.08-14-20 Number of Materials Additional Sampled: 0 Total Number of Additional Samples Collected: 0 *Materials were collected wet to avoid dust generation and placed into Ziploc bags for transport. Bulk samples were assigned sample numbers and entered on the sample summary / chain of custody forms. For sample identification and location, please see the attached Environmental Solutions Sample Summary Form. Is Asbestos Present: ☒ YES ☐ NO No. of Positive Materials: *See Notes Below Samples Submitted To: EMSL Laboratories, Raleigh, NC (NVLAP #200671-0) NOTE: Laboratory Results and Chain of Custody documents are enclosed. Samples Submitted VIA: ☐ Fed-Ex ☐ UPS ☐ USPS ☐ Other City of Bozeman Professional Bldg. – Asbestos Report Addendum No. 1 Page 2 of 4 ENVIRONMENTAL SOLUTIONS INSPECTION SUMMARY A full building inspection was completed in December 2015. This inspection is to re-inspect and confirm building materials that may be impacted by this project. This report is to be used in conjunction with the original inspection**Please see attached floor plans for identification of areas included in this project and re-inspected for asbestos containing materials. NOTE: This Addendum forms a part of the original inspection report. The scope of services performed by Environmental Solutions LLC may not be appropriate to satisfy the needs of other users, and any use or re-use of this document, or the findings presented herein, is at the sole risk of the user. The opinions presented herein apply to the site conditions existing at the time of our investigation. Therefore, our opinions and recommendations may not apply to future conditions that may exist at the site, which we have not had the opportunity to evaluate. Authored By: _____________________________ Reviewed By: ________________________________ Sonia Rogers, IH Scott Rogers, CIH, CSP, CHMM Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 Division Section Title DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 SUMMARY 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 8213 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5100 METAL STAIRS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 4100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 6400 PLASTIC PANELING DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 08 8000 GLAZING Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6813 TILE CARPETING 09 9100 PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 1400 SIGNAGE 10 2800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 4413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 3623 PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPRESSION 21 1300 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 2200 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEM DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 0000 BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 0010 DEMOLITION 22 0523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING EQUIPMENT 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 1010 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 22 4200 PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 - HVAC 23 0000 BUILDING MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 23 0010 DEMOLITION 23 0523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0540 ANTIFREEZE 23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 23 0719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0900 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 23 2113 HVAC PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS 23 2116 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 3100 DUCTWORK 23 3300 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3401 EXHAUST FANS 23 3713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 8216 HOT WATER COILS 23 8236 FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 0500 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0513 MEDIUM, LOW & CONTROL VOLTAGE CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0533 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 26 0800 ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS 26 2000 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2900 MOTOR CONTROLS 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 SUMMARY 011000 - 1 SECTION 011000 - PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY 1.1 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Professional Building Renovation, Architect’s project #19-022. 1. Project Location: Alfred Stiff Professional Building, 20 East Olive Street, Bozeman, MT 59715. B. Owner: City of Bozeman, 20 East Olive Street, Bozeman, MT 59715. 1. Representative: Mike Gray, (406) 582-3232. C. Architect: Architecture 118, LLC, 115 East Oak Street, Bozeman, MT 59715. 1. Representative: Mike Wiseman, (406) 404-1777. D. The Work consists of: Renovation of professional office space on three floors of the building. E. Work by Owner: 1. Owner will coordinate the moving and installing of furniture with the Contractor. F. Owner-Furnished Products: The following products will be furnished by Owner and shall be installed by Contractor as part of the Work: 1. Owner will provide some shelving and countertops for possible re-use. Extent of work will be determined and addressed as a change-order. 1.2 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Contractor's Use of Premises: During construction, Contractor will have limited use of area indicated. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or employ other contractors on portions of Project and as follows: 1. Owner will occupy premises during construction. Perform construction only during normal working hours (8 AM to 5 PM Monday thru Friday, other than holidays), unless otherwise agreed to in advance by Owner. Clean up work areas and return to usable condition at the end of each work period. 2. Driveways, Walkways, and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Weekend Hours: as arranged with Owner. 2. Early Morning Hours: as arranged with Owner. C. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012000 - 1 SECTION 012000 - PART 1 - GENERAL PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.1 ALLOWANCES A. Advise Architect of the date when selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. D. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. E. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight and delivery to Project site. F. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. 1.2 UNIT PRICES A. Unit price is a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. B. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. C. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. 1.3 ALTERNATES A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. B. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012000 - 2 C. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. 1.4 PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Submit a Schedule of Values at least seven days before the initial Application for Payment. Break down the Contract Sum into at least one line item for each Specification Section in the Project Manual table of contents. Coordinate the schedule of values with Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 2. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 3. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. 4. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials and for total installed value of that part of the Work. B. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner as form for Applications for Payment. C. Submit two copies of each application for payment according to the schedule established in Owner/Contractor Agreement. 1. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. 2. With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub- subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 3. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. a. Include insurance certificates, proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid, and evidence that claims have been settled. b. Include affidavit of payment of debts and claims. c. Include affidavit of release of liens. d. Include consent of surety to final payment. e. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Carpet Tile: As specified in Section 096813 “Tile Carpeting.” 1. Include removal and disposal of existing carpet and installation of new product. 2. Payment will be made on the square footage of floor area being considered plus an additional 5 percent to account for waste. B. Paint: As specified in Section 099100 “Painting.” 1. Payment will be made on the square footage of wall area being considered for one coat of paint. 2. Notify Owner for direction if multiple coats are recommended based on color and condition wall. C. Room Signs: As specified in Section 101400 “Signage.” Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012000 - 3 1. Include room sign and installation. 2. Payment will be made per occurrence. 3. Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with allowance adjustment requirements. END OF SECTION 012000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 SECTION 012500 - PART 1 - GENERAL SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 1.1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Substitutions include changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Submit requests within 15 days after the Notice to Proceed. 2. Identify product to be replaced and show compliance with requirements for substitutions. Include a detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified, a list of changes needed to other parts of the Work required to accommodate proposed substitution, and any proposed changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time should the substitution be accepted. C. Architect will review proposed substitutions and notify Contractor of their acceptance or rejection. If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation. 1. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. D. Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 SECTION 012600 - PART 1 - GENERAL CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 1.1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work. 1. Proposal Requests are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. C. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. D. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor, for all changes to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. E. Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. F. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 1 SECTION 013000 - PART 1 - GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION A. Subcontract List: Submit a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. List e-mail addresses and telephone numbers. C. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. D. Requests for Information (RFIs): On discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI. Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner. E. Schedule and conduct progress meetings at Project site at biweekly intervals. Notify Owner and Architect of meeting dates and times. Require attendance of each subcontractor or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. 1. Record minutes and distribute to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect. 1.2 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 1. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 2. Submit three copies of each action submittal. Architect will return two copies. 3. Submit two copies of each informational submittal. Architect will not return copies. 4. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. C. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches 1. Project name. on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. Include the following information on the label: 2. Date. 3. Name and address of Contractor. 4. Name and address of subcontractor or supplier. 5. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 2 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with unique identifier, including project identifier, Specification Section number, and revision identifier. 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. E. Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Contractor's Construction Schedule Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit required submittals in the following format: a. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. b. PDF electronic file. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to legibly display entire schedule for entire construction period. a. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label. 3. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. B. Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable products and options. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written recommendations, product specifications, and installation instructions. 2. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. 3. Printed performance curves and operational range diagrams. 4. Testing by recognized testing agency. 5. Compliance with specified standards and requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Submit on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches 1. Dimensions and identification of products. . Include the following: 2. Fabrication and installation drawings and roughing-in and setting diagrams. 3. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 3 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Include name of manufacturer and product name on label. 1. If variation is inherent in material or product, submit at least three sets of paired units that show variations. 2.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. B. Qualification Data: Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. C. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 2.4 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 2.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. C. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and indicate date by which recovery will be accomplished. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013000 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITTAL REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Architect will review each action submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, will stamp each submittal with an action stamp, and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribute copies of approved schedule to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties. END OF SECTION 013000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 SECTION 014000 - PART 1 - GENERAL QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. B. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision. C. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum. The actual installation may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. Indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision. D. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. E. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. F. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, notices, receipts for fee payments, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 G. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. H. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. I. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. J. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies in the Work observed during performance of its services. 2. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. K. Associated Services: Cooperate with testing agencies and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment. L. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. M. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. B. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 SECTION 015000 - PART 1 - GENERAL TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Use Charges: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. B. Water and Electric Power: Available from Owner's existing system without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES high with galvanized-steel pipe posts and top and bottom rails. A. Provide field offices, storage and fabrication sheds, and other support facilities as necessary for construction operations. Store combustible materials apart from building. 1. Coordinate location of facilities and access to building with Owner. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Install project identification and other signs in locations approved by Owner to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to Project. B. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 3.2 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. B. Furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. C. Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise. D. Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities. Comply with NFPA 241. 3.3 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. C. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. END OF SECTION 015000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 SECTION 016000 - PART 1 - GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. 1. Show compliance with requirements for comparable product requests. 2. Architect will review the proposed product and notify Contractor of its acceptance or rejection. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Show compliance with requirements. D. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products, select product compatible with products previously selected. E. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original sealed container or packaging, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 3. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 4. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 5. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. F. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 2. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 3. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Where the following headings are used to list products or manufacturers, the Contractor's options for product selection are as follows: 1. Products: Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 a. Where requirements include "one of the following," provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. b. Where requirements do not include "one of the following," provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements or a comparable product. 2. Manufacturers: a. Where requirements include "one of the following," provide a product that complies with requirements by one of the listed manufacturers. b. Where requirements do not include "one of the following," provide a product that complies with requirements by one of the listed manufacturers or another manufacturer. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product named, or indicated on the Drawings, or a comparable product. C. Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. D. Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. 3. List of similar installations for completed projects, if requested. 4. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 1 SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS A. Cutting and Patching: 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 3. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit one copy of manual. D. PDF Electronic File: Assemble manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media. E. Record Drawings: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. F. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Before requesting Substantial Completion inspection, complete the following: 1. Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, property surveys, similar final record information, warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 3. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in other sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. 4. Submit test/adjust/balance records. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 2 5. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Before requesting Substantial Completion inspection, complete the following: 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 6. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 7. Remove temporary facilities and controls. 8. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 9. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will advise Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment. 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. B. Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will advise Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. B. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 3 2.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize manual into separate sections for each system and subsystem, and separate sections for each piece of equipment not part of a system. C. Organize data into three-ring binders with identification on front and spine of each binder, and envelopes for folded drawings. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance documentation. 2. Maintenance and service schedules. 3. Maintenance service contracts. Include name and telephone number of service agent. 4. Emergency instructions. 5. Spare parts list and local sources of maintenance materials. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Copies of warranties. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims 2.3 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain a set of prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. Mark to show actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. 1. Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings. 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work. B. Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 4 E. Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 3. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. C. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. D. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. E. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. F. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. G. Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide temporary support of work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. D. Cutting: Cut in-place construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. 1. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. E. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. 2. Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 5 3. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. 3. Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. B. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion: 1. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities. Sweep paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. 2. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. 3. Remove labels that are not permanent. 4. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds. 5. Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign substances. Sweep concrete floors broom clean. 6. Vacuum carpeted surfaces and finish resilient flooring as directed by Owner. 7. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and foreign substances. Clean plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors. 8. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. B. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are unavailable and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. C. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. Include a detailed review of the following: Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 6 1. Include instruction for basis of system design and operational requirements, review of documentation, emergency procedures, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repairs. END OF SECTION 017000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 SECTION 024119 - PART 1 - GENERAL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain Owner's property. Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere. B. Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements. Submit before Work begins. C. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with EPA regulations and with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMOLITION A. Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. Before proceeding with demolition, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of the building. B. Locate, identify, shut off, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. E. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. F. Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2 G. Provide temporary weather protection to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. H. Requirements for Building Reuse: 1. Maintain existing building structure (including structural floor and roof decking) and envelope (exterior skin and framing, excluding window assemblies and nonstructural roofing material) not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond indicated limits. 2. Maintain existing interior nonstructural elements (interior walls, doors, floor coverings, and ceiling systems) not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish such existing construction beyond indicated limits. I. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. J. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site. Do not burn demolished materials. K. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 1 SCOPE OF WORK ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. This document describes the requirements for the abatement, remediation and disposal of asbestos containing building materials for the renovation project on the Stiff Professional Building for the City of Bozeman. This section includes general requirements for abatement of the materials where necessary, work practices required and disposal for control or impact of the materials. B. Known Asbestos Containing Materials are identified as: Black Mastic located underneath of floor coverings such as carpet and vinyl stair treads. Roofing material is assumed at this time. One stainless steel sink with insulation. C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, testing, monitoring, insurance, and incidental items and services necessary to remove and dispose of all identified asbestos containing materials and general construction materials within the work areas as indicated in the project specifications and in accordance will all federal, state, and local regulations and in compliance with the entirety of this specification. D. Compliance with regulations: The Contractor is required to comply with and shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable federal, state and local asbestos regulations pertaining to work practices, air monitoring, transportation and disposal of waste, communication of hazards, notification and protection of workers, visitors to the site, and persons occupying areas adjacent to the site. E. Upon commencement of the project all work is to be coordinated with the General Contractor (GC) until completion and the Owner(s) representative or IHC has inspected the work, clearances have been achieved and Certificate of Completion has been issued. The contractor will not be allowed to start an identified portion of the project and then leave for a period of time and return to finish the project at a later date unless specifically allowed in contract and schedule language provided by the General Contractor or Owner(s) representative. Failure to comply with this requirement will be considered nonconformance with this specification and will result in penalty. F. The Owner(s), Project Manager or IHC may stop work at any time for failure to comply with this specification, or regulations, or due to visible dust generation, or poor/altered work practices, or compromised containment or equipment, or failure of negative pressure, or non-compliance with submittals and/or incomplete documentation. Abatement Contractor will NOT be monetarily compensated for additional time or materials incurred do to a stoppage in work for failure to comply with the above. 1.02 MATERIALS & ESTIMATED QUANTITIES A. Estimated quantities and location of materials are provided below. Exact quantities, site conditions and condition of materials are to be verified by the Contractor prior to submission of bid and are the sole responsibility of the bidding contractor. Abatement diagrams attached at the end of this specification are STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 2 representative to layout and approximate location but are not to scale, and site visits must be used to determine exact dimensions and quantities. B. Estimated Quantities: Location Material Qty. Requirement BASEMENT Facilities Shop Area Carpet over Black Mastic on Concrete 406 ft² Material is considered RACM for this project. Carpet is to be removed and disposed of as asbestos containing waste. Mastic is to be removed by grinding/ blasting methods (Blastrac/Diamond Bit Grinding) to clean bare concrete. Air Clearance Required by Project IH. BASEMENT Facilities Office Area Carpet over Black Mastic on Concrete 465 ft² Material is considered Category I, Non- Friable for this project. Carpet is to be removed and disposed of as asbestos containing waste. Mastic is to be hand scraped to a smooth surface. Air Clearance Required by Project IH. BASEMENT Facilities IT Area Carpet over Black Mastic on Concrete 590 ft² Material is considered Category I, Non- Friable for this project. Carpet is to be removed and disposed of as asbestos containing waste. Mastic is to be hand scraped to a smooth surface. Air Clearance Required by Project IH. Stairwells North & South Carpet and/or Vinyl Stair Coverings over Black Mastic on Wood and Concrete 450 ft² in each Material is considered Category I, Non- Friable for this project. Carpet is to be removed and disposed of as asbestos containing waste. Mastic is to be hand scraped to a smooth surface. Air Clearance Required by Project IH. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 3 1.04 SUBMITTALS (Required) A. With Bid Submission 1. Number of accredited workers available and planned for use if awarded project. 2. Equipment list available and planned for use if awarded project i. NAM ii. Fans/Air Movers iii. Blasting or Grinding Equipment ( include redundancy and backup) iv. Decontamination Unit showers or facility plans v. Manometer—logging full time during abatement 3. Supervisor/Competent Persons credentials 4. 2-References for similar mastic removal projects by blasting/grinding 5. Signed Statement with regulatory citation/infraction history for previous 3-years and current status of regulatory investigation or penalty. (Contractors with regulatory citations or pending citation in past 3-years may not be considered for award at the discretion of the project team) B. The selected contractor must provide a work plan and project design to the contracted industrial hygienist (IHC) and project team for approval prior to submission to MDEQ for a Permit. Any and all requests for a variance to deviate from the bid specification or regulatory requirements are to be submitted in writing to the IHC and project team for prior approval. Failure to secure prior approval from the IHC or project team will results in an immediate shutdown of work until the issue can be corrected or resolved, No Exceptions. The submittal must be approved and returned prior to beginning work. Delays and costs associated with failure to comply with this requirement are the sole responsibility of the abatement contractor. The work plan must comply with all applicable regulations and this specification. The plan is to detail specific work practices, prevent uncontrolled disturbance of asbestos containing materials, completely remove specified materials, clean all surfaces in proximity to work area, meet schedule and project requirements, address material disposal and ensure prevention of asbestos fiber release. Failure to meet project objectives will result in rejection of the work plan. C. The IHC, Project Manager(s) or Owner(s) may deny a work plan and require revisions if the work plan is inadequate to meet regulatory and specification requirements or to achieve the goals and needs of the project. Specific containment requirements, staffing, ventilation design, and monitoring may be required to achieve the goals of the project and will be at the discretion of the IHC, Project Manager(s) or Owner(s) at no additional cost or impact to the schedule for the project. D. Required Work Plan Content: (All Listed subjects must be addressed in plan) 1. Schedule of work and containments with shift times and number of shifts included i. Location of negative air machines ii. Ventilation routes iii. Negative pressure and air change calculation iv. Location of constant reading manometer 2. List of Equipment planned for use during this project, including manufacturer’s literature and certification if appropriate. (Redundant equipment is needed in case of breakdown) 3. Identification of encapsulates and chemicals to be used along with Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each. 4. Identification of Project on-site Supervisor and alternate—One must be present at all times work is being performed 5. Fire and Emergency Evacuation Plan STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 4 6. Plan for communication system between work area and outside 7. Telephone numbers, names, certificates for all workers 8. Containment Construction Design 9. Air Monitoring Plan (NEA for this project required if planning reduction of monitoring) 10. Identification of secured area for storage of Contractors equipment and waste 11. Methods to maintain security to prevent unauthorized entry into the work space 12. Emergency evacuation procedures for medical or safety reasons (i.e. fire and smoke) so that exposure to ACM shall be minimized 13. Method for packaging, labeling, loading, transporting, and disposing contaminated material in a way that minimizes exposure and contamination 14. Transportation Plan and Disposal Location—with date of disposal location confirmation 15. Work Plan and Contingency Plan for maintaining schedule (CRITICAL PATH) 16. Plan for maintaining negative pressure regardless of external factors. 17. Standard operating procedures showing how workmen, visitors and Owner’s employees will be protected from exposure, how space outside the work areas will be protected from contamination through completion of work, work procedures utilized during the project and final clean-up/decontamination procedures to be implemented. E. Documentation satisfactory to the IHC and project team that the Contractor’s employees, including foremen, supervisors, and any other company personnel or agents who may be exposed to airborne asbestos fibers or who may be responsible for any aspect of abatement activities, have received adequate training and are properly licensed by the appropriate agencies. This includes copies of all licenses for each employee working on the site. F. Documentation of respirator fit testing for all Contractor’s employees and agents who must enter the work area. This fit testing shall be conducted in accordance with testing procedures as required by OSHA. G. Physician’s Documentation that all employees or agents who may be exposed to airborne asbestos in excess of background level have been provided with an opportunity to be medically monitored to determine whether they are physically capable of working while wearing the respirator required without suffering adverse health effects. In addition submit documentation that personnel have received medical monitoring as required by OSHA regulations. The Contractor must be aware of and provide information to the examining physician regarding unusual conditions in the work place environment (e.g., high temperatures, humidity and chemical contaminants) that may impact on the employees’ ability to perform work activities. H. A copy of the Contractor’s training program, safety manuals and policies, and written respiratory protection program. I. Submit copies of all MSDS as required under the OSHA Hazard Communication Act OSHA 1900.1200. J. The abatement contractor must submit a permit application and project design to the Montana Department of Environmental Quality, Asbestos Control Program (MDEQ) once approval is granted by the IHC and project team. The abatement contractor is responsible for all fees associated with the asbestos abatement work. K. Upon completion the contractor must submit disposal manifests, all air monitoring data, and containment entry/exit logs for the project to the contracted Industrial Hygienist (IHC). STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 5 1.05 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The areas have been inspected for asbestos containing building materials by Montana accredited inspectors. A copy of the Asbestos Inspection Report can be obtained from the owner. B. All drawings, specifications, and technical notes for the project must be reviewed by all abatement contractors for inclusion of abatement requirements. C. All abatement of asbestos must be coordinated with the building owner, project manager and IHC. Abatement must occur prior to the disturbance of material by non-accredited individuals. Abatement schedule is critical and MUST be maintained. Failure to meet the schedule will be deemed nonconformance with this specification and result in application of liquidated damages at the discretion of the owner. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Abatement: Procedures to control fiber release from ACM including removal, encapsulation, enclosure and repair. B. Abatement Activities: all activities from the initiation of work area preparation through successful clearance air monitoring to be performed at the conclusion of an asbestos project or minor project. C. ACM: Asbestos Containing Material D. Aggressive Method: Removal or disturbance of building material by sanding, abrading, grinding, or other method that breaks, crumbles, or disintegrates intact asbestos containing material (ACM). E. Aggressive Sampling: A sampling method in which the air sampling technician agitates and makes airborne any settled dust and residual asbestos fibers through the use of mechanical equipment to stir up settled dust during the sampling period, thus simulating activity in that area of the building. F. AIHA: The American Industrial Hygiene Association G. Air Lock: A system for permitting entrance and exit while restricting air movement between a contaminated area and an uncontaminated area. It consists of two (2) curtained doorways separated by a distance of at least three (3) feet such that one (1) passes through one doorway into the air lock, allowing the doorway sheeting to overlap and close off the opening before proceeding through the second doorway, thereby preventing flow-through contamination. H. Air Sampling: The process of measuring the fiber content of a known volume of air collected during a specific period of time. The procedure utilized for asbestos follows the NIOSH Standard Analytical Method 7400 or the provisional method developed by the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), which are utilized for lower detectability and specific fiber identification. I. Amended Water: Water containing a wetting agent or surfactant with a surface tension of at least 29 dynes/cm² when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1331. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 6 J. Asbestos: Any hydrated mineral silicate separable into commercially usable fiber, including but not limited to Chrysotile (serpentine), Amosite (cummingtonite-grunerite), Crocidolite (riebeckite), Tremolite, Anthrophyllite, and Actinolite. K. Asbestos Containing Material (ACM): Any material containing more than one percent (1%) asbestos when tested according to EPA NESHAP regulations. L. Asbestos Fiber: A particulate form of asbestos, 5 micrometers or longer, with a length to width ratio of at least 3 to 1. M. Authorized Person: Any person authorized by the contractor and required by work duties to be present in the regulated areas. They must have all proper training and PPE documentation. N. Category I Non-Friable Asbestos-Containing Building Material: Asbestos-containing packing, gaskets, resilient floor covering, and asphalt roofing products containing more than 1 percent asbestos as determined using the methods specified in appendix E, Subpart E, 40 CFR Part 763, Section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy. O. Category II Non-Friable Asbestos-Containing Building Material: Any material excluding Category I Non- Friable ACM, containing more than 1% asbestos that, when dry, cannot be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure. P. Class II Asbestos Work: Activities defined by OSHA involving the removal of ACM, which is not thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not limited to, the removal of asbestos- containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting, roofing and siding shingles, and construction mastic. Certain “incidental” roofing materials such as mastic, flashing and cements when they are still intact are excluded from Class II Asbestos work. Removal of small amounts of these materials, which would fit into a glove bag, may be classified as a class III job. Q. Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room that is part of the worker decontamination enclosure with provisions for storage of workers’ street clothes and protective equipment. R. Clearance Air Monitoring: The employment of aggressive sampling techniques using the volume of air collected to determine the airborne concentrations of residual fibers. It is to be performed as the final abatement activity. S. Competent Person: In addition to the definition in 29 CFT 1926, Section 32(f), a person who is capable of identifying existing asbestos hazards as defined in 29 CFR 1926 Section 1101, selecting the appropriate control strategy, has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them and has EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) “Contractor/Supervisor” training,; accreditation required by 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix C. Additionally, this person must be accredited in accordance with MCA Title 75. Environmental Protection, Chapter 2, Air Quality, Part 5 Asbestos Control (75-2-511 State of Montana Accreditation requirements). T. Contractor/Supervisor: Individual who supervises asbestos abatement work and has EPA Model Accreditation Plan “Contractor/Supervisor” training; accreditation required by 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, and Appendix C. Additionally, Contractors and/or Supervisors must be accredited in accordance with MCA Title 75, Environmental Protection, Chapter 2, Air Quality, Part 5 Asbestos Control (75-2-5111 State of Montana Accreditation Requirements). STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 7 U. Critical Barrier: One or more layers of plastic sealed over all openings into a regulated area or any other similarly placed physical barrier sufficient to prevent airborne asbestos in a regulated area from migrating to an adjacent area. V. Decontamination Area: An enclosed area adjacent and connected to the regulated area and consisting of an equipment room shower area, and clean room which is used for the decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment that are contaminated with asbestos. W. Encapsulant (sealant) or Encapsulating Agent: A liquid material which can be applied to an ACM and which temporarily controls the possible release of asbestos fibers from the material by creating a membrane over the surface (bridging encapsulation) or by penetrating into the material and binding its components together (penetrating encapsulant). X. Encapsulation: The coating or spraying of asbestos materials with a sealant/encapsulating agent. Y. Enclosure: The construction of air tight walls and a ceiling between the asbestos material and the facility environment, or around surfaces coated with asbestos materials, or any appropriate and approved procedure that prevents the release of asbestos materials. Z. Equipment Room: A contaminated area or room that is part of the worker DES with provisions for the storage of contamination clothing and equipment. AA. Friable Asbestos Containing Material: Any material containing more than 1% Asbestos that, when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized to powder by hand pressure. BB. HEPA Filter: A high efficiency particulate air filter capable of trapping and retaining 99.97 percent of particles (asbestos fibers) greater than 0.3 micrometers mass median aerodynamic equivalent diameter. CC. Industrial Hygienist: The professional contracted or employed by the Building Owner(s) and or Project Manager(s) to supervise and/or conduct air monitoring and analysis, perform inspections and act as the Owner(s) Representative. DD. NESHAP: The National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR Part 61). EE. NIOSH: The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. FF. Personal Air Monitoring: A method used to determine employee’s exposure to airborne fibers. Samples are collected outside the respirator in the workers’ breathing zone as OSHA asbestos standards (29 CFR 1926.58). GG. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): Appropriate clothing, headgear, eye protection, footwear and MSHA/NIOSH approved respiratory protection. HH. Regulated Asbestos-Containing Material: Regulated asbestos-containing material (RACM) means: 1. Friable asbestos material; 2. Category I non-friable ACM that has become friable; 3. Category I non-friable ACM that will be or has been subjected to sanding, grinding, cutting, or abrading; or STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 8 4. Category I and II non-friable ACM that has a high probability of becoming or has become crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by the forces expected to act on the material in the course of demolition operations. II. Removal: The stripping of any ACM from surfaces or asbestos components of a facility. JJ. Respiratory Protection Standard: Respiratory protection provided to workers in accordance with Personal Protection Equipment Requirements (OSHA 20 CFR 1926.58). KK. Shower Room: A room between the clean room and the equipment room in the worker decontamination enclosure with hot and cold running water controllable at a tap and arranged for complete showering during decontamination. LL. Staging Area: The area near the waste transfer air lock where containerized asbestos waste had been placed prior to removal from the work area. MM. Surfactant: A chemical wetting agent added to water to improve penetration. NN. Visible Emissions: Any emissions containing particulate asbestos material that are visually detectable without the aid of instruments. OO. Work Area: Designated rooms, spaces, or areas of the project where asbestos abatement activities take place. PP. Work Site: Premises where asbestos abatement activity is taking place and that may be comprised of one or more work areas. 1.07 APPLICABLE REGULATIONS A. General: This section sets forth governmental regulations and industry standards, which are included and incorporated herein by reference and made a part of the specifications. Except to the extent that more explicit or more stringent requirements are written directly into the contract documents, all applicable codes, regulations, and standards have the same force and effect. Any conflicts or overlap of these requirements shall be governed by the more stringent regulation or standard. Publications shall be the current edition in effect. Codes, standards and regulations which govern asbestos abatement work or hauling and disposal of asbestos waste materials include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Publications: OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1001 General Industry Standard 29 CFR 1926.1101 Construction Industry Standard 29 CFR 1926.59 Hazard Communication 29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection 29 CFR 1910.145 Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags EPA 40 CFR 61 Subpart A General Provisions 40 CFR 61 Subpart M National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 9 40 CFR 763 Subpart G Worker Protection Rule 40 CFR 763 Subpart E AHERA, Asbestos-Containing Materials in Schools Transportation 49 CFR Parts 171, 172 Transportation of Hazardous Materials C. State Requirements: MCA Title 75, Chapter 2, Parts 1-4 Air Quality MCA Title 75, Chapter 10, Part 4 Hazardous Waste Management MCA Title 75, Chapter 2, Part 5 Asbestos Control ARM Title 17, Chapter 8 Air Quality ARM Title 17, Chapter 53 Hazardous Waste Management ARM Title 17, Chapter 74 Asbestos Control Asbestos abatement work within the State of Montana, including removal, transportation and disposal of asbestos waste, is regulated by: Waste and Underground Tank Bureau, Asbestos Control Program, Department of Environmental Quality, 1520 East 6th Avenue, P.O. Box 200901, Helena, MT 59620-0901, (406) 444-5300. 1.08 ACCREDITATION AND EXPERIENCE A. General: Submit documentation to verify that all contractor/supervisors and workers involved in asbestos abatement are currently licensed by the Montana State Department of Environmental Quality to perform asbestos abatement. For extended projects the Contractor must maintain credentials for all workers requiring refresher training. B. Personnel: Provide certificates of accreditation for each employee who will be participating in, or working in a close proximity to, asbestos abatement operations within the work plan submittal. 1. Competent Person a. The designated Competent Persons shall be on-site at all times asbestos work is under way. These persons shall be experienced in administration and supervision of asbestos abatement projects including work practices, protective measures for building and personnel, disposal procedures, etc. These persons are the Contractor’s Representative responsible for compliance with all applicable federal, state and local regulations, particularly those relating to asbestos- containing materials. b. Accreditation: The Competent Persons shall be accredited by the State of Montana as an asbestos abatement contractor/supervisor, as required by OSHA, NESHAP, and State of Montana asbestos abatement regulations. Submit copies of certificates of accreditation with submittal of work plan. c. If in the opinion of the IHC and Project team the designated Competent Person is not capable of making decisions, taking corrective actions, or demonstrates inability to oversee the abatement scope the Contractor will be required to replace the designated person with a New Competent Person at no cost to the project. 2. Workers STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 10 a. Accreditation: All asbestos abatement workers shall be accredited by the State of Montana to perform asbestos abatement work in the State of Montana as required by OSHA, NESHAP and State of Montana asbestos abatement regulations. Submit copies of certificates of accreditation with work plan submittal package. 1.09 CONTRACTOR CONDUCT All contractor personnel must adhere to the City of Bozeman expectations for conduct while on site. No smoking, possession or use of ANY tobacco product or weapons is allowed on the property and all posted signs must be complied with at all times. Workers are to comply with all Site Safety Requirements and OSHA Safety Requirements. At minimum worker attire is to be standard construction attire with, at a minimum, a tee shirt with 4-inch sleeves, pants, and closed toe shoes. Workers entering/exiting decontamination must adhere to this standard. Contractor must ensure that Clean-Room stages of decontamination units are large enough to meet clothing changing needs and secure entry requirements. Work areas must be kept clean and free of all dust and debris at all times. Cooperation with all City of Bozeman employees, Project Managers and IHC directives is required of all contractor personnel at all times. 1.10 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE CONSULTANT - (IHC) The Industrial Hygiene Consultant (IHC) shall be hired by the Owner(s) and be independent of the Abatement Contractor on the job. The IHC shall assist the Owner(s) in the administration and enforcement of this specification and achievement of project goals. Services provided by the IHC are determined by the owner and may include but are not limited to: a. Review of the Abatement Contractor work plan and variance requests for approval prior to submittal to MDEQ for a permit. b. Monitoring of work practices, containments, security, decontamination, air monitoring and schedule. If the IHC determines a failure or based upon evaluation a possible failure to meet regulatory, specification, or schedule requirements: corrective action must be taken by the abatement contractor. c. The IHC will make inspections after each stage of work is completed to assure proper completion before the next stage begins. Inspections will take place after containment has been completed (prior to removal) and at the end of abatement for Visual Inspections and Final Air Clearance Testing. d. If any inspection fails, the IHC shall notify the Abatement Contractor stating the reason for the failure. The Abatement Contractor shall correct the problem and the IHC shall perform another inspection. This process shall be repeated until the Abatement Contractor’s work has passed inspection. The IHC determination is considered necessary for project goal achievement and as such is NOT subject to refusal by the contractor. e. Visual monitoring of work practices, work area and smoke testing periodically at the discretion of the IHC. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 11 f. Review of Personal and Area Monitoring performed by the Abatement Contractor. g. Possible area air monitoring during abatement activities. h. The IHC shall have the authority to stop work at any time when conditions are not within the Specification requirements or applicable regulations. The stoppage of work shall continue until conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the IHC or other authorized representative. Standby time required to resolve violations shall be at the Abatement Contractor’s expense. i. The IHC will perform all Visual Inspection and Final Air Sampling of individual containments. j. The IHC will perform a Visual Inspection of all waste material prior to transport to the landfill. k. The IHC will issue a written Certification of Completion for the project. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide all materials and equipment, suitable and in adequate quantity, required to accomplish the work as specified herein within the scheduled time frame. Isolation of the regulated area from adjacent workers and spaces must be achieved at all times. Adequate equipment must be on-site to meet negative pressure requirements and work schedule at all times. It is the contractor’s sole responsibility to maintain all equipment in adequate working order. B. Ensure all MSDS information is on the job site and hazard communication requirements are met. C. Ensure all chemical containers, waste containers, tools, and equipment are appropriately labeled and secured during all phases of work. D. Ensure critical equipment is available on-site with redundant capacity to ensure continuation of work even with breakdown or equipment failure. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. It is the responsibility of the Abatement Contractor to familiarize themselves with the building(s) and scope of the project for bidding and abatement plan purposes. Weather, wind, building characteristics, and some site conditions are subject to natural change and must be anticipated by the contractor. Abatement work areas are to be secured and isolated from other on- site areas and abatement is to be performed only in these secured areas. B. ALL ABATEMENT tasks are to be performed in compliance with applicable regulations and with this specification. Where this specification creates conflict with regulatory documents the regulatory document will supersede this specification where the specification may result in non-compliance or where STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 12 the regulatory requirement is more stringent. In no circumstance is the Contractor to violate regulatory requirements for handling and removal of asbestos containing building materials. C. Negative pressure enclosure is required for all asbestos abatement activity. All dust, water, debris, and potential contamination must be controlled and maintained within the enclosure. Smoke testing and inspection must be performed by the abatement contractor each day prior to start of work and as needed during the work period. Containment must be monitored by a logging/printing electronic manometer measuring inches of water column. Containment must be maintained at a pressure differential of at least 0.020” of water column at all times from initiation of abatement through air clearance. Contractor is required to stop work and make necessary corrections to containments and/or work practice if pressure differential drops below the required 0.020” of water column at any time. D. Smoke testing by the IHC may be performed at any time to verify containment and negative pressure. Containment must isolate the abatement work area from floor to hard ceiling in all directions. 3.02 WORK AREA PREPARATION A. Personnel Qualifications All Abatement Contractor personnel involved with asbestos work must be trained and tested prior to any work, and shall be thoroughly familiar with the approved Abatement Contractor’s work plan for the abatement work on this project. All personnel shall undergo the specific medical examinations required by OSHA. The superintendent and the foreman shall be thoroughly familiar with all applicable regulations and practices for asbestos work and shall have participated in at least two abatement projects of similar size and scope within the past year. All personnel shall be in possession of valid respirator fit test paperwork. All personnel shall have a valid Montana Asbestos Abatement Contractor/Supervisor or Worker certification issued by the MDEQ. Anyone without the above qualifications shall not be allowed to work during the abatement phase at any time. It is the Abatement Contractor’s sole responsibility to comply with all worker protection and certification requirements. There shall be a sufficient number of trained and qualified workers, foremen and superintendents to accomplish the work in accordance with the required schedules. Since general work cannot start prior to the successful abatement of the work area, it is imperative that a sufficient number of trained personnel be engaged throughout the abatement process. No untrained, unqualified or unapproved person shall be employed to hasten completion of the abatement work. 1. Superintendent and Forman Qualifications and Duties shall consist of but are not limited to: a. Training and knowledge of applicable regulations and expertise in safety and environmental protection. b. Fluency in English and the languages spoken by all employees, or a designated interpreter for each language shall be available on each shift. A list of designated interpreters and their work schedules shall be provided for the Owner(s). c. Assuring that the decontamination chambers are kept clean. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 13 d. Surveying the work area a minimum of two (2) times per shift for proper housekeeping, safety precautions, barrier integrity and integrity of negative air pressure. All observations shall be recorded and made available to the owner’s representative and IHC. Damage and defects in the enclosure system are to be repaired immediately upon discovery. e. Ensure that each worker is wearing proper personal protective equipment and is trained in its use, and shall instruct workers on evacuation procedures during hazards. NO Facial hair (beards) shall be permitted to be worn when wearing respiratory protection that requires a mask to face seal. f. Ensure safe practices to prevent accidents in the work space, especially from electrical shocks, slippery surfaces and entanglements in loose hoses/cords and equipment. g. Safe work practices including, provisions for inter-room communications and the exclusion of eating, drinking, smoking and any activity that may beak a respiratory protection seal. h. Ensure that all workers are certified and licensed. i. Take precautions to prevent overstressing of workers. j. Proper exit procedures from the work space to the outside through the decontamination facility. B. Isolation of Work Area 1. Access to work areas shall be controlled through the use of signs, barricades, or other means as appropriate to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering the work area. 2. Post “Asbestos Danger Signs” prominently at all possible points of entry into the work area prior the disturbance of any ACM. Signs should be in accordance with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1001. The Asbestos Contractor shall provide all OSHA and NESHAP required labels for all plastic bags and all drums utilized to transport asbestos contaminated material to the landfill. The Asbestos Contractor shall provide any other signs, labels, warning and posted instructions that are necessary to protect, inform and warn people of the hazard from asbestos exposure. The signs shall be posted in a prominent and convenient place to warn of the hazard at a sufficient distance to avoid any possible exposure. 3. Deactivate electrical circuits in the enclosure unless equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters or positive grounding is confirmed. Coordination with General Contractor for identification of electrical isolation is required. C. Isolation of Heating/Ventilation/Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems 1. Abatement Contractor shall coordinate with Owner(s) and project team for the proper shut-down and isolation of any and all HVAC systems prior to installation of critical barriers and start of abatement activities. 2. HVAC systems for this project may NOT be able to be shut down and thus the contractor must isolate these systems from work areas. Operational HVAC, heating, electrical, and plumbing STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 14 systems are not a change of condition for this project and must be anticipated by the contractor. D. Construction of Containments 1. Critical barriers shall be placed on all windows and all openings in the work area with not less than two (2) layers of 6-mil, fire retardant polyethylene sheeting. These barriers shall be sealed and remain in place until final air clearance testing has been completed. 2. Block any floor drains in the work area with critical barriers and do not allow any asbestos waste to enter any drains. 3. Where determined by work plan or project design two (2) layers of 6-mil, fire retardant polyethylene sheeting shall be placed on floors, walls and used to cover building components within the work area. All ceilings are to be protected with a minimum of one (1) layer of 6-mil fire retardant polyethylene sheeting in order to provide protective barriers and to achieve negative air pressure inside the work area. Sheeting shall be sized to minimize seams. When seams are necessary they shall be staggered and separated at least 6 feet to reduce the potential for water to penetrate and have minimum overlap of 12 inches. All Floor sheeting shall extend at least 12 inches up the walls of the work area. 4. Walls, critical barriers, and ceilings of the Negative pressure enclosure must be sealed and actively inspected during work for integrity and isolation of the work space. 5. Should critical barrier erection disturb any ACM, the Abatement Contractor shall bring the issue to the IHC and project team for evaluation. Possible removal techniques may include the material to be removed by application of amended water and removal using tent procedures and HEPA vacuuming with a funnel attachment or possible glove-bag methods when applicable. These procedures are limited to only those materials absolutely necessary for proper construction of containment. Appropriate respiratory and protective equipment shall be worn during this operation. 6. All remaining non-removable items within in the work area shall be covered with two layers of 6- mil fire retardant polyethylene sheeting and taped securely. 7. Fire-Exits must be accessible at all times and each should be equipped with an emergency egress air lock to be utilized only in an emergency. 8. All entrances to the work area not used for worker entry or emergency exits shall be locked and sealed to prevent unauthorized entry. E. Decontamination Unit Construction & Maintenance 1. In work areas where it is required, a three (3) stage decontamination (decon) chamber shall be constructed. This shall take place prior to any work being started in any area. 2. The decon unit shall be composed of a series of three (3) rooms/spaces set up in a consecutive arrangement from the abatement work area to the outside work area. If, required, a decontamination trailer shall be provided to the workers and placed in an isolated position in the uncontained environment. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 15 3. The first, innermost room of the decon chamber shall be designated as the “Dirty Room”. It will be located at the closest proximity to the enclosed work area and separated by an airlock. This in turn shall be attached to a “Shower Room” by an air lock to prevent fiber release. This shower room, which the workers shall use to decontaminate themselves of all remaining asbestos fibers when exiting the work area, shall be attached to the “Clean Room”. The clean room shall be used as the entrance to the actual decon chamber. It is here where street clothes and uncontaminated personnel protective equipment shall be accessed. 4. All rooms of the decontamination unit must be of a size capable of meeting needs of crew size and work required. Failure to maintain clothing, equipment, and containment requirements will require correction by the contractor. 5. Air locks used to separate the rooms shall be composed of fire-retardant, plastic doors and weighted to prevent contaminated air from escaping into the environment. 6. A two (2) stage load-out/equipment access is to be used for the removal of material or the access of equipment. Proper decontamination is required and no-material or fiber release is to occur through this load out unit. Contractor work plan MUST address the use of this two (2) stage unit with worker restrictions and decontamination procedures for material and equipment. 7. The decontamination chamber doors shall be of sufficient height and width to enable a safe ease of access for workers. 8. All shower water is to be drained, collected and filtered through a system with the capability to collect particles 5.0 microns in size, at a minimum, and discharge into a sanitary sewer or other state or federally approved waste disposal system. 9. A decon unit shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable regulations and approved work plan. If work procedures create a change in material or work, or if the IHC determines that material may become friable that was not previously identified as such the decontamination unit construction may change at no additional cost to the project. F. Establishment of Negative Pressure 1. HEPA (rated at 99.97% capture of 0.3um particles) air filtration equipment of sufficient quantity and capacity shall be determined on a per containment basis to achieve negative pressure. A minimum of -0.02 column inches of water pressure differential, relative to outside containment pressure, shall be achieved prior to the start of any abatement work and maintained for the duration of the containment. The capacity shall be enough to cause a complete air change or total air filtration within the work area four (4) times per hour. Air changes per hour are to be calculated by the contractor using 75% of the rated CFM of the negative air machine. 2. Negative pressure is to be maintained during ALL asbestos work from the initiation through final air clearance. 3. Negative pressure is to be evidenced by manometric measurement constantly monitored by a manometer equipped with a strip chart printout or data logging capability. Multiple locations of evaluation may be required by the IHC for demonstration of pressure differential. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 16 4. Negative air exhaust is to be ducted outdoors, where possible, the shortest distance possible using self-supporting ridged flex duct for all distances in excess of 10-feet. “Lay-Flat” or non-self- supporting duct is not allowed for exhaust distances greater than 10-feet. 5. Abatement contractor must demonstrate air flow within the containment without spaces isolated from air exchange. Fans, additional interior Negative Air machines or other methods must be addressed in the work plan to ensure adequate air movement and worker protection. 6. Where outdoor ventilation of negative air exhaust is not possible (basement) a redundant system of HEPA filtration may be constructed to ensure NO asbestos or dust release from the work space. Where planned redundant HEPA filtration must be approved by the IHC prior to start of work and included in the submitted work plan. G. Construction of Waste Handling Unit 1. The waste handling unit shall be equipped with the facilities to wash and wipe the outside of the asbestos bags or containers prior to removing them from the work area for transportation. Provisions must be made to prevent any contaminated water run-off and all captured water shall be disposed of as asbestos containing waste or sufficiently filtered through a system with the capability to collect particles 5.0 microns in size, at a minimum, and discharge into a sanitary sewer or other state or federally approved waste disposal system. 2. The waste “load out” unit shall be separated by an air locked room adjacent either to the decontamination unit or to the regulated work area. This unit is ONLY for the removal of clean waste bags entry/exit of equipment and is not to be used for worker access. H. IHC Visual Sign-Off of Containment & Work Area 1. Prior to the start of abatement work the containment and work area is to be inspected and approved by the IHC. Documented approval will be posted at the entry to the regulated area by the IHC. 3.03 WORK PRACTICES A. Respiratory Protection 1. Respiratory protection shall be worn by all individuals inside the work area from the initiation of the asbestos project until all areas have successfully passed visual clearance or air monitoring. 2. All respiratory protection shall be MSHA/NIOSH approved in accordance with the provisions of 29 CFP 1926.103 or 30 CFR Part 11. All respiratory protection shall be provided by the Abatement Contractor and used by the workers in conjunction with the written respiratory protection program. B. Personal Protective Equipment 1. The Abatement Contractor shall provide to all workers, foremen, superintendents and authorized visitors and inspectors, protective disposable clothing consisting of full body coveralls and head STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 17 covers. 2. The Abatement Contractor shall provide eye protection, hard hats and safety shoes as required by job conditions and safety regulations. Safety shoes and hard hats shall be approved in accordance with ANSI Z89.1 1969 and ANSI Z41.1 1967. 3. Reusable footwear, hard hats and eye protection shall be left in the “Dirty Room” until the end of the asbestos abatement work or until they have been acceptably decontaminated. 4. All disposable protective clothing shall be discarded and disposed of as asbestos waste every time the wearer exits the work area to the outside area through the decon facilities. AT NO TIME ARE WORKERS TO EXIT WORK AREA IN CONTAMINATED PPE. 5. If it is absolutely necessary that non-disposable clothing be worn for the asbestos project, laundering services shall be conducted in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.58. C. Work Place Entry and Exit Procedures 1. All workers and authorized personnel shall enter the work area through the decontamination unit. 2. All personnel shall proceed to the clean room, remove all street clothes and don appropriate respiratory protection and personal protection coveralls and other possible PPE (i.e. hard hats, eye protection, hearing protection etc.). 3. Personnel wearing designated PPE shall proceed from the clean room through the shower room and dirty room into the work area. 4. Before leaving the work area all personnel shall remove gross contamination from the outside of their respirators and protective clothing by brushing, vacuuming or wet wiping procedures. 5. Personnel shall proceed to the dirty room where they shall remove all PPE except respirators. All disposable PPE is to be discarded as ACM containing waste. 6. Reusable, contaminated footwear shall be stored in the equipment room when not in use in the work area. 7. While still wearing respirators personnel shall proceed to the shower area, clean the outside of the respirators and the exposed face area under running water prior to removal of respirator, then shower and shampoo to remove residual asbestos contamination. Filter cartridges must be replaced for each new entry into the work area. Used cartridges are to be discarded as ACM waste. 8. After showering and drying off, workers may proceed to the clean room and don street clothing. D. Removal of Asbestos Containing Material 1. Material to be removed shall be sufficiently wetted with amended water prior to removal. Material that will not accept amended water (tile) must be managed to prevent dust generation. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 18 2. Remove the saturated asbestos material in small sections. As it is removed, pack the material in sealable plastic bags. The ACM removal shall begin within areas closest to the decon unit and proceed towards the HEPA filtration units. 3. Wet ACM shall be disposed of in doubled 6-mil bags marked with warning labels. Soaked fallen ACM shall be collected and bagged while wet. Contaminated materials containing sharp edges shall be cut to size while still wet, placed in cardboard boxes of manageable size and double bagged or placed in a leak-tight container. Waste bags and containers shall be properly labeled. 4. Use abatement tools and techniques that will not damage containment or building components and are in accordance with the approved work plan. Any use of unauthorized equipment or tools may result in immediate stoppage of work. 5. ACM shall not be dropped or thrown from heights exceeding ten (10) feet above the floor. At heights above 10 feet, ACM shall be placed into incline chutes, placed onto scaffolding, or containerized at that height for later disposal. At all times dust must be controlled where wetting of material is not possible (floor tile). 6. Materials will be bagged and removed at the end of each work shift. No ACM debris shall be left in the work area overnight. 7. Bagged Asbestos Containing Waste (ACW) will be removed from the work area double bagged in either the decontamination area or separate waste exit chamber, and stored in a stationary sealed container. E. Containment Inspections, Safety and Hygiene 1. Supervisors must survey the work area a minimum of two (2) times per shift for proper housekeeping, safety precautions, barrier integrity and integrity of negative air pressure. All observations shall be recorded. 2. Damage and defects in the enclosure system are to be repaired immediately upon discovery. 3. Supervisors must ensure that each worker is wearing proper personal protective equipment. 4. Supervisors must ensure all entry and exit procedures are properly used. Assuring that the decontamination chambers are kept clean. 5. Safe work practices including, provisions for inter-room communications and the exclusion of eating, drinking, smoking and any activity that may beak a respiratory protection seal. 6. Supervisors and workers must ensure safe practices to prevent accidents in the work space, especially from electrical shocks, slippery surfaces and entanglements in loose hoses/cords and equipment. F. Waste Pass Out Procedures & Handling 1. Asbestos contaminated waste that has been containerized shall be transported out of the work STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 19 area through the waste container enclosure system (or through the worker decon unit if a separate waste chamber has not been constructed). 2. Waste pass-out procedures shall utilize two teams of workers, an “inside team” and an “outside team”. 3. The inside team, wearing appropriate PPE shall clean the outside, including bottoms, of properly labeled containers (bags, drums, or wrapped components). Using HEPA vacuums and wet wiping techniques, they shall transport the containers into the waste container pass-out air lock. No worker form the inside team shall further exit the work area through the air lock of the enclosure system. 4. The outside team, wearing appropriate PPE shall enter the air lock from outside the work area, enclose the containers in clean, labeled, 6-mil polyethylene bags or sheeting as the items’ physical characteristics demand, and remove them from the air lock to the outside. No worker from the outside team shall further enter the work area through this air lock, which shall be secured to prevent unauthorized entry. 5. The Asbestos Contractor shall maintain compliance with the strictest set of regulations of U.S. EPA, Asbestos Regulations 40 CFR 61.152 and 29 CFR 1910.1200(f) of OSHA’s Hazard Communication Standard and any other applicable standards or specification requirements. Note: Any penalties incurred for failure to comply with any of the above requirements, will be the sole responsibility of the Abatement Contractor. The Owner(s) claims no responsibility for fines imposed due to the negligence of the Abatement Contractor. 6. Keep all Asbestos Containing Waste (ACW) separate from any other waste. 7. Ensure that ACW has been sufficiently wet down and examine the integrity of the container’s leak-tight/airtight seals. Re-wet and re-package any damaged containers. Ensure no visible emissions of dust into the air. 8. Keep ACW in a secured, enclosed and lockable container. G. Waste Transportation 1. The Abatement Contactor shall transport all packaged asbestos waste to a facility that handles asbestos waste and is registered with the applicable regulatory agencies that has been pre- approved by the IHC, Owner(s) and landfill personnel to accept ACW or RACM waste. 2. Prior to transport for disposal all waste may be visually inspected by the IHC. 3. Labels are required on containers of ACW materials indicating the material content, the name of the waste generator and the location where the waste was generated. 4. The Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all such sealed containers are not ruptured during processing, including packaging, handling, loading, transporting and unloading. Any containers that are found to be ruptured upon arrival at the landfill shall be re- containerized by the Abatement Contractor immediately. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 20 5. Require all individuals who transport or handle asbestos waste to use proper PPE and be appropriately licensed and/or accredited to handle ACM. 6. Transport waste vehicles operated by or escorted by a MDEQ accredited asbestos project worker or asbestos project contractor/supervisor. 7. Upon completion of the project the Abatement Contractor shall provide a waste manifest dually executed by the Abatement Contractor, Transporter and Disposal Facility. The manifest shall be all-inclusive, describing volume of materials, dates of transport and date of disposal. A waste manifest shall be produced for each load. Waste manifest is to be forwarded to the IHC and Owner for completion of work. H. Final Clean-up of Containment Area 1. After removal of all visible accumulations of ACM, HEPA vacuuming shall be performed on all surfaces. 2. All surfaces in the work area shall be cleaned using a fine spray of mist of amended water followed by wet wiping using disposable cloths. These cloths shall be disposed of or rinsed thoroughly and frequently to prevent visible accumulation of debris. Surfaces must be allowed to dry before proceeding to the next cleaning step. 3. Allow for surfaces to dry and repeat above procedures. The cleaned layer of surface barriers may be removed, plastic used to maintain critical barriers shall not be removed until final air clearance has been achieved. 4. After completion of clean-up operations, the Abatement Contractor shall notify the IHC that an inspection is required prior to air clearances testing to ensure that no visible asbestos remains. A fine mist of removal encapsulant may then be applied. After PCM air samples are found to have airborne fiber concentrations of less than 0.010 f/cc final area breakdown, encapsulation of abated surfaces and removal of critical barriers may begin. If results are found to be above the acceptance criteria, the clean-up shall be repeated until compliance is achieved. Only after acceptable levels are achieved may the critical barriers be removed. All repairs and refinishing shall be performed. 5. TEM evaluation of air samples for asbestos fiber concentration may be performed at the contractor’s expense. Clearance will be considered achieved if asbestos fiber concentration is equal to or less than background samples when evaluated by AHERA methods. 6. All microscopy review/analysis of filter cassettes is to be performed by an independent third party laboratory: EMSL Analytical Morrisville NC, AIHA PAT Proficient, NVLAP accredited. Air clearances must be STARTED BY 2:00PM to make last Federal Express drop-off on the day of sampling. Results of samples will be available the following day. CONTACTOR MUST TAKE THIS INTO CONSIDERATION FOR SCHEDULE!! FAILURE TO ACHIEVE CLEARANCE OR TO MEET DAILY DELIVERY TIME IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. I. Tear Down and Project Completion STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 21 1. Abatement Contractor shall remove all signs of containment including critical barriers unless otherwise instructed. All tape, tape or glue residue, all equipment and materials used to perform work, must be removed. Contractor is to remove all signage, barriers and debris from the work area. Make any and all necessary repairs to leave building materials in condition as before containment construction. 2. Upon satisfactory completion, application for the Certificate of Completion may be made. 3.04 AIR MONITORING & CLEARANCES A. Environmental Conditions to be maintained and monitored by Abatement Contractor: 1. Outside Asbestos Work Area: Air concentrations of asbestos shall be maintained at a daily average below 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter of air when measured using industry standard PCM methods. If fibers exceed this level, all non-licensed workers will be barred from this area, work shall cease, the area shall be cleaned and any problem shall be corrected prior to re-commencement of work. This required cleaning and work stoppage is at the expense of the abatement contractor and will not result in a change request or an extension of schedule. 2. Inside Asbestos Regulated Area: Air concentrations of asbestos shall be maintained as low as reasonably possible and monitored by personal air monitoring in compliance with OSHA requirements. B. The Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for conducting air monitoring required under OSHA standards (Area & personal monitoring). The initial testing results will determine the level of respiratory protection necessary during the preparation phase of the abatement project. C. The Contractor’s approved means and methods of abatement will determine the need for and frequency of air clearance testing in accordance with federal, state and local regulations. D. The IHC hired by the Owner(s) will be responsible for the following: 1. A Visual Clearance of individual containments with Contractor Supervisor prior to encapsulation and prior to Final Air Clearance testing is to be completed by the IHC. The Abatement Contractor shall have available ladders and/or scaffolds of sufficient dimension and quantity so that all work surfaces can be easily and safely reached by inspectors. 2. A PCM aggressive Final Air Clearance test in each work area after removal, encapsulation and cleanup have been completed, but before the critical barriers and decontamination chambers are removed. Aggressive samples are conducted with the use of at least one (1) horsepower leaf blower and fans. Each room of the work area shall have at least one (1) final air test. 3. All PCM air samples shall be analyzed utilizing the NIOSH 7400 method using Counting Rules A. Clearance shall be deemed successful when all PCM results are less than 0.01 f/cc or subsequent TEM analysis by AHERA Counting rules result in equal to or less than background concentration levels of asbestos structures. 4. If any of the Final Air Clearance tests exceed 0.01 f/cc by PCM, at the expense and impact to the contractor samples may be analyzed by TEM for comparison to background. If greater than STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 22 background or following PCM analysis the entire work area shall be re-cleaned immediately upon receipt of air test results. The area shall then be re-visualed and re-tested at no additional cost to the Owner(s). All costs associated with additional air clearance tests including but not limited to travel, labor and analytical costs shall be at the sole expense of the Abatement Contractor. 5. The Abatement Contractor is to notify the IHC 48-hours prior to the need for clearance evaluation. 3.05 PROJECT COMPLETION & CLOSE-OUT The certification of final completion shall not be issued until the following conditions have been satisfied. A. Final inspection by the Owner(s) and/or IHC reveals that no visible ACM exists in the designated work areas. B. All inspections required by this Specification are complete and satisfactory. C. A final Visual Clearance has been performed and Air Clearance tests indicate airborne fiber levels of less than 0.01 f/cc or less than background for TEM analysis for each area of containment have been met. D. The Abatement Contractor submits copies of all daily OSHA personal monitoring results. E. The Abatement Contractor submits all required disposal documentation. F. The Abatement Contractor has removed all debris, tools, surplus materials, equipment, temporary buildings and materials from the work area. G. The IHC shall issue a Certificate of Completion certifying that all conditions set forth in this Specification have been satisfactorily completed. 3.06 STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING ABATEMENT Abatement includes the removal of asbestos containing mastic and contaminated floor coverings such as carpet and vinyl stair treads. This specification provides the bidding contractor with site information, work practice requirements, and project goal clarification. ALL bidders are to carefully review all sections of this specification prior to bid in preparation of their submittal for consideration. A. Power Power needs by the abatement contractor must be coordinated with the general contractor prior to arrival immediately following award of bid. Where the general contractor and owner are not able to provide desired number of power locations, voltages, amperage needs, or service the Abatement contractor must provide generator to meet needs. B. Heat Work is to take place in an occupied building, heat will be maintained in adjacent work areas. Additional heat needs by the abatement contractor must be coordinated with the general contractor prior to arrival immediately following award of bid. C. Water Cold and Hot water sources are available in the building and will be identified prior to the start of work. STIFF PROFESSIONAL BUILDING CITY OF BOZEMAN ASBESTOS ABATEMENT Page 23 D. Access Access to the work areas for equipment will need to be coordinated with the General Contractor in conjunction with the owner. E. Waste Egress All waste will be transferred to designated waste containers provided by the Abatement Contractor in a specified route coordinated with the General and IHC. F. Site Access Abatement contractor is required to provide notification and schedule of work 72-hrs in advance of increase from standard. Abatement hours are to be coordinated with the GC. G. Parking Limited site parking is available. H. Staging Staging area for equipment, trailers, waste storage, and materials is to be coordinated with the GC. Limited space is available immediately adjacent to the work site. 3.07 FLOORING & MASTIC / SINK / ROOFING MATERIAL REMOVAL See abatement floor plans for locations, quantities and scope of work. 3.08 WORK PRACTICES All impact, removal, and cleaning of asbestos containing material must be performed inside HEPA filtered negative pressure containments. Schedule requires the abatement contractor to be diligent and thorough in the work plan. All requirements of this specification, local, state, and federal regulations must be met by the abatement contractor. ALL surfaces must be dust free and clean to achieve visual clearance requirements prior to air sample collection. Abatement contractor’s competent person must ensure a dust free work area prior to IHC review. 4.0 ABATEMENT FLOOR PLANS (Attached) Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data concrete mix designs and submittals required by ACI 301. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete Producer Qualifications: ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," and with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 2.2 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, as drawn, flat sheet. D. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. E. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. F. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. G. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. H. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, [Class 3S] [Class 3M] [Class 1N] <Insert class> coarse aggregate or better, graded[, with at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications]. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Maximum Aggregate Size for Concrete in Insulating Concrete Forms: 3/4 inch. I. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. J. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494, water reducing. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. K. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. L. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. M. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. N. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self- expanding cork. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 2.3 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301. B. Normal-Weight Concrete: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent. 5. Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. 6. For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, limit use of fly ash to 25 percent replacement of portland cement by weight and granulated blast-furnace slag to 40 percent of portland cement by weight; silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight. C. Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETING A. Construct formwork according to ACI 301 and maintain tolerances and surface irregularities within ACI 347R limits of Class A, 1/8 inch for concrete exposed to view and Class B, 1/4 inch for other concrete surfaces. B. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. C. Install construction, isolation, and contraction joints where indicated. Install full-depth joint-filler strips at isolation joints. D. Place concrete in a continuous operation and consolidate using mechanical vibrating equipment. E. Protect concrete from physical damage, premature drying, and reduced strength due to hot or cold weather during mixing, placing, and curing. F. Formed Surface Finish: Smooth-formed finish for concrete exposed to view, coated, or covered by waterproofing or other direct-applied material; rough-formed finish elsewhere. G. Slab Finishes: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. Provide the following finishes: 1. Scratch finish for surfaces to receive mortar setting beds. 2. Float finish for surfaces to receive waterproofing, roofing, or other direct-applied material. 3. Troweled finish for floor surfaces and floors to receive floor coverings, paint, or other thin film-finish coatings. 4. Trowel and fine-broom finish for surfaces to receive thin-set tile. 5. Nonslip-broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. H. Cure formed surfaces by moisture curing for at least seven days. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 I. Begin curing concrete slabs after finishing. Apply membrane-forming curing and sealing compound to concrete. J. Polished Concrete Floor Treatment: Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs. 1. Machine grind floor surfaces level and smooth. 2. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Continue polishing with progressively finer polishing pads to gloss level required. 4. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces. K. Owner will engage a testing agency to perform field tests and to submit test reports. L. Protect concrete from damage. Repair and patch defective areas. END OF SECTION 033000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1 SECTION 055000 - PART 1 - GENERAL METAL FABRICATIONS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. C. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M. D. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 E. Rolled Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M. . F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), black finish. H. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed steel channels complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches by 0.053 inch I. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 47/A 47M. minimum thickness, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. J. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. K. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. L. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. M. Stainless-Steel Wire Rope and Fittings: 1. Wire Rope: 7-by-7 wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type 316. 2. Wire-Rope Fittings: Connectors of types indicated, fabricated from stainless steel, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. N. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 O. Aluminum Extrusions: , Alloy 3003-H14. ASTM B 221 P. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6. , Alloy 6063-T6. Q. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 R. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. S. Bronze Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (architectural bronze). T. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 62, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (85-5-5-5 or No. 1 composition commercial red brass) or ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C86500 (No. 1 manganese bronze). U. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper). 2.2 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease exposed edges. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work. B. Welding: Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed connections, finish welds and surfaces smooth with contour of welded surface matching those adjacent. 1. Where welding cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finish joints to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed. C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop brazing. Braze behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed brazed joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 1. Where brazing cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finish joints to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed. D. On units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, provide welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches E. Fabricate steel pipe columns with o.c. 1/2-inch steel base plates and 1/4-inch steel top plates welded to pipe with continuous fillet weld same size as pipe wall thickness. Drill top plates for connection bolts and base plates for 5/8-inch F. Fabricate pipe guards from anchor bolts. 3/8-inch- thick by 12-inch- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch G. Fabricate gratings according to NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." Provide welded gratings as follows: anchor bolts. 1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 15/16 inch 2. Bearing Bar Depth: o.c. 1 inch 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: . 1/8 inch 4. Crossbar Spacing: . 4 inches o.c. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 5. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized. 2.4 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Hot-dip galvanize steel fabrications at exterior locations. B. Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," and paint with a fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure items to in-place construction. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints or, where indicated, with uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. D. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. E. Install pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes where not protected by curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with drilled-in expansion anchors. END OF SECTION 055000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 METAL STAIRS 055100 - 1 SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data Shop Drawings and structural analysis data signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the state where Project is located. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide stairs capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 lbf/sq. ft. and a concentrated load of 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Provide railings capable of withstanding a uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. and a concentrated load of 200 lbf applied to handrails and top rails of guards in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Provide railing infill capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. Infill load and other railing loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.2 METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). C. Rolled Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M. D. Iron Castings: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M. E. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25. F. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30. G. Expanded Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Class 1 (uncoated). H. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease exposed edges. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work. B. Welding: Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength of base metals. At exposed connections, finish welds and surfaces smooth. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 METAL STAIRS 055100 - 2 C. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members. D. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Treads and platforms as shown on drawings. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets. E. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 1. Configuration: 1-5/8-inch- diameter top and bottom rails, 1-1/2-inch- square posts, and 1/2-inch- square pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear. 2. Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. 3. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated fittings. 4. Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. 5. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding. 2.4 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal stairs after assembly. B. Hot-dip galvanize steel stairs at exterior locations. C. Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," and paint with a fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. END OF SECTION 055100 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1 SECTION 061053 - PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Used) MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: Provide dressed lumber, S4S, marked with grade stamp of inspection agency. 2.2 TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative-Treated Materials: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2. 1. Use treatment containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 3. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Provide preservative-treated materials for items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. above the ground. 2.3 LUMBER A. Interior Partition Framing: : Western woods: WCLIB or WWPA with 19 percent maximum moisture content. B. Miscellaneous Dimension Lumber: Construction, or No. 2 grade with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. Provide for nailers, blocking, and similar members. 2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, not less than 1/2- inch 2.5 FASTENERS nominal thickness. A. Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 1. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set miscellaneous rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Securely attach miscellaneous rough carpentry to substrates, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the IBC. END OF SECTION 061053 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000 - 1 SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Used) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. C. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin. D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin. E. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper. 2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Interior Hardwood Lumber Trim: Clear, kiln-dried, white birch. B. Wood Moldings: WMMPA WM 4 made to patterns in WMMPA WM 12 from kiln-dried stock. 1. Hardwood Moldings for Transparent Finish: White Birch. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: hot-dip galvanized steel. B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer. 1. Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less. 2. Use waterproof resorcinol glue for exterior applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Condition interior finish carpentry in installation areas for 24 hours before installing. B. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Cut to length and prime ends. C. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts. 1. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000 - 2 D. Install standing and running trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim. Cope at returns and inside corners and miter at outside corners. END OF SECTION 062000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064100 - 1 SECTION 064100 - PART 1 - GENERAL ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Shop Drawings Samples showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish and AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is completed, and HVAC system is operating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: AWI, AWMAC, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: Custom grade. 1. Type of Construction: Frameless. 2. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. 3. Laminate Cladding: Horizontal surfaces other than tops, Grade HGS; postformed surfaces, Grade HGP; vertical surfaces, Grade VGS; edges, PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch 4. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood. thick; semiexposed surfaces, Grade VGS. 5. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent. B. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. D. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1[, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde]. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 1. Basis of Design: Formica, Natural Birch 7481-58. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self- closing. B. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064100 - 2 C. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip. E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100. 2. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200. 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1. 4. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1. F. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated. 1. Finish: Satin Chrome: BHMA 626 or BHMA 652. H. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to 15 percent moisture content. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Install cabinets to comply with referenced quality standard for grade specified. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. . E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Fasten with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush. F. Cabinets: Install so doors and drawers are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch END OF SECTION 064100 penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. Prof Bldg Renovarion 19-022 PLASTIC PANELING 066400 SECTION 066400 - PART 1 - GENERAL PLASTIC PANELING 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and material Samples. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. General: Gel-coat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. 1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch 2. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture. . B. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. C. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. D. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches 1. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. wide. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through panels. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. END OF SECTION 066400 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 SECTION 072100 - PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Used) THERMAL INSULATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION PRODUCTS A. Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, unfaced; nominal density of 6 lb/cu. ft. B. Glass-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively. , with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively. C. Mineral-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced with flame-spread index of 25 or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in areas and in thicknesses indicated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. B. Maintain 3-inch END OF SECTION 072100 clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 SECTION 076200 - PART 1 - GENERAL SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, not less than 0.032 inch 1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat fluoropolymer system with color coat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight. thick; and finished as follows: 2. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized structural-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, or aluminum- zinc alloy-coated structural-steel sheet, ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; 0.022-inch 1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat fluoropolymer system with color coat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight. nominal thickness. 2. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps or factory- applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel or Series 300 stainless steel. B. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant. C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2 C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible. B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. C. Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For aluminum, form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. D. Aluminum Flashing and Trim: Coat back side of aluminum flashing and trim with bituminous coating where it will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. E. Separate dissimilar metals with a bituminous coating or polymer-modified, bituminous sheet underlayment. END OF SECTION 076200 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 SECTION 079200 - PART 1 - GENERAL JOINT SEALANTS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F PART 2 - PRODUCTS . 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS A. Low-Emitting Materials: Sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 3. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 4. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. 5. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 6. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 7. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. 8. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L. B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions. C. Sealant for General Exterior Use Where Another Type Is Not Specified, One of the Following: 1. Single-component, nonsag polysulfide sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for Use NT. 2. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for Use NT. 3. Single-component, nonsag urethane sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and for Use NT. D. Sealant for Use in Interior Joints in Ceramic Tile and Other Hard Surfaces in Kitchens and Toilet Rooms and Around Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Single-component, mildew-resistant silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for Use NT; formulated with fungicide. E. Sealant for Interior Use at Perimeters of Door and Window Frames: 1. Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. F. Acoustical Sealant: 1. Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. D. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 1193. B. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants that allow optimum sealant movement capability. C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. D. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal perimeters, control joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919. END OF SECTION 079200 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1 SECTION 081416 - PART 1 - GENERAL FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Samples for factory-finished doors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: WDMA I.S.1-A. B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. C. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. D. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extra Heavy Duty: Public toilets, Janitor's closets, Assembly spaces and where indicated. E. Particleboard-Core Doors: Provide blocking in particleboard cores or provide structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors with exit devices or protection plates. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Interior Solid-Core Doors: Premium grade, five or seven-ply, particleboard cores. a. Faces: Grade A rotary-cut select white birch. b. Veneer Matching: Book and running match. c. Pair matching and set matching. d. Continuous matching for doors with transoms. 2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood frames indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B. Grade: Custom. C. Wood Species and Cut: Match existing woodwork. 1. Species: White birch (assumed). 2. Cut: Plain sliced/plain sawn (assumed). 2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Light Frames: Wood beads of same species as door faces. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 2.5 FABRICATION AND FINISHING A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated and to comply with clearances specified. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI- WDHS-3. C. Cut and trim openings to comply with referenced standards. 1. Trim light openings with moldings indicated. 2. Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. 3. Factory install louvers in prepared openings. D. Factory finish doors indicated for transparent finish with manufacturer's standard finish complying with WDMA TR-6, catalyzed polyurethane for grade specified for doors. 1. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and WDMA I.S.1-A, and as indicated. B. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. C. Clearances: As follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. 1/8 inch 2. at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. 1/8 inch 3. from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. 1/4 inch 4. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. from bottom of door to top of threshold. D. Repair, refinish, or replace factory-finished doors damaged during installation, as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 081416 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1 SECTION 083323 - PART 1 - GENERAL OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS A. Basis of Design: 1. Raynor, DuraShutter Select. B. Door Curtain Slats: Aluminum, flat-profile slats. 1. Finish: Clear Anodized. C. Operation: Manual. D. Mounting: Face Mount. E. Enclosure: Aluminum Hood to match curtain slats. F. Tracks, Supports, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard. 1. Thumb Lock, with locking bar. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports. 1. Provide blocking and supports as required for attaching unit and proper operation. B. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. END OF SECTION 083323 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1 SECTION 084113 - PART 1 - GENERAL ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples. 1. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS A. Accessible Entrances: Comply with ICC A117.1. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Limit deflection of framing members normal to wall plane to 1/175 of clear span or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch 2. Limit deflection of framing members parallel to glazing plane to L/360 of clear span or , whichever is less. 1/8 inch 3. Air Infiltration: Limited to , whichever is smaller. 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. 4. Water Penetration: Systems do not evidence water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than . 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 5. Thermal Conductance: Average U-factor of not more than . 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F C. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated; when tested according to AAMA 1503. ASTM B 209 sheet; ASTM B 221 D. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." extrusions. E. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. F. Doors: 1-3/4-inch- thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- 1. Door Design: Wide stile; thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. Provide snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops, and preformed gaskets. 5-inch 2. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within nominal width. 10 inches 3. Interior Doors: Provide BHMA A156.16 silencers, three on strike jamb of single-door frames and two on head of double-door frames. above floor or ground plane. 4. Hardware: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." G. Fasteners and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 2 H. Fabrication: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units for hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components. I. Aluminum Finish: Class II, color anodic finish; complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible materials, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or primer, or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer. B. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. D. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch 2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to over total length. 1/16 inch. For surfaces meeting at corners, limit offset to 1/32 inch 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to . 1/8 inch E. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation. . END OF SECTION 084113 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 SECTION 087100 - PART 1 - GENERAL DOOR HARDWARE 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Hardware schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HARDWARE A. Hinges: 1. Stainless-steel hinges with stainless-steel pins for exterior. 2. Nonremovable hinge pins for exterior and public interior exposure. 3. Ball-bearing hinges for doors with closers and entry doors. 4. Three hinges for 1-3/4-inch- thick doors 90 inches or less in height; four hinges for doors more than 90 inches B. Locksets and Latchsets: in height. 1. BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, for bored locks and latches. 2. BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 for exit devices. 3. BHMA A156.5, for auxiliary locks. 4. BHMA A156.12, Series 5000, for interconnected locks and latches. 5. BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, for mortise locks and latches. 6. Lever handles on locksets and latchsets,. 7. Provide trim on exit devices matching locksets. C. Key locks to Owner's existing master-key system. 1. Provide cylinders for storefront doors, and other locking doors that do not require other hardware. D. Closers: 1. Mount closers on interior side (room side) of door opening. Provide regular-arm, parallel-arm, or top-jamb-mounted closers as necessary. 2. Adjustable delayed opening (accessible to people with disabilities) feature on closers. E. Provide wall stops or floor stops for doors without closers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware in locations required to comply with governing regulations and according to SDI A250.8 and DHI WDHS.3. B. Deliver keys to Owner. 3.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. As shown on attached. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1 11/25/19 SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE & HARDWARE SCHEDULE SUPPLEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for: a. Swinging doors. 2. Field verification, preparation and modification of existing doors and frames to receive new door hardware. 3. The intent of the hardware specification is to specify the hardware for interior and exterior doors, and to establish a type, continuity, and standard of quality. However, it is the door hardware supplier’s responsibility to thoroughly review existing conditions, schedules, specifications, drawings, and other Contract Documents to verify the suitability of the hardware specified. B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for: 1. Windows 2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 3. Signage 4. Toilet accessories 5. Overhead doors C. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting this section. 2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold installation specified in this section. 3. Division 09 sections for touchup, finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by this section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories 1. UL 305 - Panic Hardware DOOR HARDWARE 087100-2 11/25/19 B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute 1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements. 2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work. 3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein. B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. 2. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include: a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number. b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening. c. Quantity, type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. d. Name and manufacturer of each item. e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. h. Mounting locations for hardware. i. Door and frame sizes and materials. j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. 3. Key Schedule: a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled. b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 11/25/19 c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations. d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions. e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as directed by Owner. f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. 4. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared for door hardware installation. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Product data for electrified door hardware: a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. 3. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include: a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Factory order acknowledgement numbers (for warranty and service) d. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. e. Parts list for each product. f. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed. g. Final keying schedule h. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature i. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. j. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-4 11/25/19 3. Coordination Responsibility: Assist in coordinating installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements: 1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. 3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. 4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams. 5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical engineers. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein. E. Keying Conference 1. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including: a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. F. Pre-installation Conference 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. 6. Conference can be done remotely via web or conference call. G. Coordination Conferences: 1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware. 2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-5 11/25/19 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. 1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging. C. Project Conditions: 1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods. 2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. D. Protection and Damage: 1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or repair products damaged during Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent. E. Deliver keys and permanent cores/ cylinders to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Existing Openings: Where existing doors, frames and/or hardware are to remain, field verify existing functions, conditions and preparations and coordinate to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Beginning from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-6 11/25/19 a. Closers: 1) Mechanical: 30 years. b. Exit Devices: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. c. Locksets: 1) Mechanical: 10 years. d. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty. 2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as “Scheduled Manufacturer” or “Acceptable Manufacturers” in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein. B. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product. C. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fasteners 1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish. 3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required. 4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer. B. Modification and Preparation of Existing Doors: Where existing door hardware is indicated to be removed and reinstalled. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-7 11/25/19 1. Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with existing materials, as required for mounting new opening hardware and to cover existing door and frame preparations. 2. Use materials which match materials of adjacent modified areas. 3. When modifying existing fire-rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as required to maintain fire-rating. C. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation. 1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material. 2.03 HINGES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, McKinney TB/T4B series, Stanley FBB Series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high 3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 4. 2 inches or thicker doors: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height. 6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame. 7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins 8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening. 9. All hinges to be ball bearing. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-8 11/25/19 2.04 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Aluminum Geared 1. Manufacturers: a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Select, Stanley. 2. Requirements: a. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.26, Grade 1. b. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges, where specified in the hardware sets, fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum. c. Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self-lubricating operation. d. Provide hinges capable of supporting door weights up to 450 pounds, and successfully tested for 1,500,000 cycles. e. On fire-rated doors, provide aluminum geared continuous hinges that are classified for use on rated doors by testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. f. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges with electrified option scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. g. Install hinges with fasteners supplied by manufacturer. h. Provide hinges 1 inch (25 mm) shorter in length than nominal height of door, unless otherwise noted or door details require shorter length and with symmetrical hole pattern. 2.05 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS – GRADE 1 A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage ND series (Owner’s Standard). Substitutions by Architect and Owner approval. B. Requirements: 1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1, and UL Listed for 3 hour fire doors. 2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 3. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with 1/2 inch latch throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs. 4. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws. 5. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag. 6. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 7. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. 8. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts and wrought roses on both sides. a. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-9 11/25/19 2.06 ACCESS CONTROL LOCKSETS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Trilogy PDL6100/ ETPDLN (Owner’s Standard). Substitutions by Architect and Owner approval. B. Requirements: 1. Provide at locations indicated in hardware schedule. 2.07 EXIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 98 series (Owner’s Standard). Substitutions by Architect and Owner approval. B. Requirements: 1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. 2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 3. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware. 4. Touchpad must extend a minimum of one half of door width. No plastic inserts are allowed in touchpads. 5. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrified requirements. 6. Provide flush end caps for exit devices. 7. Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes. 8. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Install exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect. 9. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits. 10. Provide cylinder or hex-key dogging as specified at non fire-rated openings. 11. Removable Mullions: 2 inches (51 mm) x 3 inches (76 mm) steel tube. Where scheduled as keyed removable mullion, provide type that can be removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self-locking when re-installed. 12. Provide exit devices with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs used on the project. a. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction. Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to be hazardous. 2.08 CYLINDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: match existing key system(s) as directed by Owner. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-10 11/25/19 B. Requirements: 1. Provide cylinders/cores to match Owner’s existing key system, compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. C. Construction Keying: 1. Temporary Construction Cylinder Keying. OPTION if using construction keying with full-sized non-IC core; NOT AVAILABLE with Primus high security cylinders. a. Provide construction cores that permit voiding construction keys without cylinder removal, furnished in accordance with the following requirements. 1) Split Key or Lost Ball Construction Keying System. 2) 3 construction control keys, and extractor tools or keys as required to void construction keying. 3) 12 construction change (day) keys. b. Owner or Owner’s Representative will void operation of temporary construction keys. 2. Replaceable Construction Cores. OPTION if using temporary construction cores in IC core cylinder in either F/S or S/F. a. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores, furnished in accordance with the following requirements. 1) 3 construction control keys 2) 12 construction change (day) keys. b. Owner or Owner’s Representative will replace temporary construction cores with permanent cores. 2.09 KEYING A. Provide a factory registered keying system, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. B. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing factory registered keying system. C. Comply with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. D. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing keying system complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. Contact: 1. Contact Person: Mike Gray 2. Telephone: 406.579.5343 3. Email: MGray@BOZEMAN.NET E. Requirements: 1. Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system. a. Master Keying system as directed by the Owner. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-11 11/25/19 2. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders, by means as directed by Owner. Failure to comply with forwarding requirements will be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner. 3. Provide keys with the following features: a. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm) 4. Identification: a. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature” for identification. Do not provide blind code marks with actual key cuts. b. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner. c. Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED” or patent number to enforce the patent protection. d. Failure to comply with stamping requirements will be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner. e. Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by Owner. 5. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities. a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core. b. OPTION for LFIC or SFIC: Permanent Control Keys: 3. c. Master Keys: 6. 2.10 DOOR CLOSERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4040XP series (Owner’s Standard). Substitutions by Architect and Owner approval. B. Requirements: 1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code. 2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with high strength cast iron cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft. 3. Cylinder Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter double heat- treated pinion journal. 4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. 5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. 6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 7. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty forged forearms for parallel arm closers. 8. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-12 11/25/19 9. Finish for Closer Cylinders, Arms, Adapter Plates, and Metal Covers: Powder coating finish which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in ANSI Standard A156.4 and ASTM B117, or has special rust inhibitor (SRI). 10. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.11 OVERHEAD STOPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rixson, Sargent. B. Requirements: 1. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for exterior and interior vestibule single acting doors. 2. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for double acting doors. 3. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and where conditions do not allow wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard. 4. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without closer and positive type at doors with closer. 2.12 DOOR STOPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Provide door stops at each door leaf: 1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used. 2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options. 3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop. 2.13 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Guard, Reese. B. Requirements: DOOR HARDWARE 087100-13 11/25/19 1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items. 2. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 3. Size of thresholds: a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door width 4. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available. 2.14 SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood. B. Requirements: 1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for each pair frame. 3. Omit where gasketing is specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required: 1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect, tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein. 2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed. 3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-14 11/25/19 4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for new door hardware and with: a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware preparation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer. C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section. I. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Mount closers so they are not visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect. J. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors. K. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." DOOR HARDWARE 087100-15 11/25/19 L. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard. M. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. N. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. O. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three to six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant must examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors and door hardware. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.06 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hardware items are referenced in the following hardware. Refer to the above-specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements. B. Hardware Sets: DOOR HARDWARE 087100-16 11/25/19 Hardware Group No. 01 For use on Door #(s): 100-1 101-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 112HD (MATCH STOREFRONT FINISH) CPC IVE 1 EA CYLINDER MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA ELECTRONIC LOCK (EXIT DEVICE TRIM) TRILOGY ETPDLN (LEVER PREP AS REQ'D) 626 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98-EO 626 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER (W/ SPRING STOP) 4040XP SCUSH TBWMS 689 LCN 1 SET CLOSER BRACKET(S) AS REQ'D TO INSTALL CLOSER 689 LCN 1 SET SEALS BY ALUM DOOR/FRAME MFG Hardware Group No. 02 For use on Door #(s): 005-1 014-2 006-1 007-1 213-1 220-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70 (LEVER PREP AS REQ'D) RHO 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 03 For use on Door #(s): 104-1 103-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70 (LEVER PREP AS REQ'D) RHO 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA MOUNTING PLATE 4040XP-18 AS REQ'D 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE A CONFLICT MAY OCCUR BETWEEN THE DEVICE THRU BOLT AND THE DOOR CLOSER CYLINDER. IF THIS CONFLICT OCCURS, A DROP PLATE WILL HAVE TO BE USED AND THE PLATE DRILLED OUT TO PROVIDE CLEARANCE FOR THE THRU BOLT HEAD. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-17 11/25/19 Hardware Group No. 04 For use on Door #(s): 102-1 222-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70 (LEVER PREP AS REQ'D) RHO 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 05 For use on Door #(s): 004-1 004-2 129-1 204-1 217-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53 (LEVER PREP AS REQ'D) RHO 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 06 For use on Door #(s): 222-2 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK ND53 (LEVER PREP AS REQ'D) RHO 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 07 For use on Door #(s): 000-1 000-2 200-2 200-3 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA CYLINDER MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA ELECTRONIC LOCK TRILOGY PDL6100 (LEVER PREP AS REQ'D) 626 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE DOOR HARDWARE 087100-18 11/25/19 Hardware Group No. 07.01 For use on Door #(s): 211-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA CYLINDER MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA ELECTRONIC LOCK TRILOGY PDL6100 (LEVER PREP AS REQ'D) 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 08 For use on Door #(s): 200-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 200-1: REUSE TRILOGY LOCK AND CYLINDER FROM DOOR S215. Hardware Group No. 09 For use on Door #(s): 221-1 215-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80 (LEVER PREP AS REQ'D) RHO 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 10 For use on Door #(s): 102-2 102-3 102-4 104-2 104-4 104-3 103-2 222-6 222-5 207-1 205-1 222-3 222-4 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE DOOR HARDWARE 087100-19 11/25/19 Hardware Group No. 11 For use on Door #(s): 106-1 105-1 214-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK ND40S RHO 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. EX-01 For use on Door #(s): 002-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK @ HEAD & JAMBS S-Bk ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER 1 EA 1/2" HIGH X 6" WIDE SADDLE THRESHOLD 656A-223 A ZER 1 RE-USE BALANCE OF DOOR, FRAME & HARDWARE AT EXISTING DOORS/FRAMES, GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND HARDWARE SUPPLIER TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS TO ENSURE THE COMPATIBILITY OF NEW HARDWARE WITH EXISTING PREPS PRIOR TO ORDER OF NEW MATERIALS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE NECESSARY FILLERS, REINFORCEMENTS AND FASTENERS, COMPATIBLE WITH EXISTING MATERIALS AS REQUIRED FOR MOUNTING NEW OPENING HARDWARE AND TO COVER EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME PREPARATIONS. Hardware Group No. EX-02 For use on Door #(s): 014-1 Provide each door(s) with the following: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 SET INTERIOR HINGE(S) 5BB1 SERIES (HW AS REQ'D) 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70 (LEVER PREP AS REQ'D) RHO 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA TBWMS 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE AT EXISTING DOORS/FRAMES, GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND HARDWARE SUPPLIER TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS TO ENSURE THE COMPATIBILITY OF NEW HARDWARE WITH EXISTING PREPS PRIOR TO ORDER OF NEW MATERIALS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE NECESSARY FILLERS, REINFORCEMENTS AND FASTENERS, COMPATIBLE WITH EXISTING MATERIALS AS REQUIRED FOR MOUNTING NEW OPENING HARDWARE AND TO COVER EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME PREPARATIONS. END OF SECTION Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 GLAZING 088000 - 1 SECTION 088000 - PART 1 - GENERAL GLAZING 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data. B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. D. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS, GENERAL A. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. Provide safety glazing labeling where safety glass is indicated. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3. C. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. D. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. 2.3 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear float glass [heat-strengthened float glass] [fully tempered float glass]. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. B. Glass Type GL-2: fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glass. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 GLAZING 088000 - 2 2.4 LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type GL-3: Clear laminated glass with two plies of clear float glass. 1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glass. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are contained in GANA's "Glazing Manual." B. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. C. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 088000 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 SECTION 092216 - PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Used) NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 2.2 METAL FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Steel Framing Members, General: ASTM C 754. 1. Steel Sheet Components: ASTM C 645. Thickness specified is minimum uncoated base-metal thickness. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 B. Framing Systems: zinc coating. 1. Studs and Runners: In depth indicated and 0.027 inch 2. Flat Strap and Backing: thick unless otherwise indicated. 0.027 inch 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: In depth indicated and thick. 0.033 inch 4. Resilient Furring Channels: thick. 1/2 inch 5. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: deep, with single- or double-leg configuration. 0.053 inch thick, 3/4 inch 6. Z-Furring: In depth required by insulation, deep. 1-1/4-inch face flange, 7/8-inch wall-attachment flange, and 0.018 inch 2.3 ACCESSORIES thick. A. General: Comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Asphalt felt or foam gasket. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754." 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 841. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 1063. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 844. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Isolate steel framing from building structure, except at floor, to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and wall. D. Install suspension systems level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet END OF SECTION 092216 . Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 SECTION 092900 - PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Used) GYPSUM BOARD PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Provide in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. B. Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. Regular type unless otherwise indicated. C. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated. Regular type unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047, formed from galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. 1. Provide cornerbead at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide LC-bead (J-bead) at exposed panel edges. 3. Provide control joints where indicated. B. Aluminum Accessories: Extruded-aluminum accessories indicated with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer. C. Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M. 1. Joint Tape: Paper unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. 2. Joint Compounds: Drying-type, ready-mixed, all-purpose compounds. D. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. 1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. E. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (unfaced). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 1. Isolate gypsum board assemblies from abutting structural and masonry work. Provide edge trim and acoustical sealant. 2. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten gypsum panels to supports with screws. 3. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layer separately to supports with screws. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements of listed assemblies. C. Finishing Gypsum Board: ASTM C 840. 1. At concealed areas, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide Level 1 finish: Embed tape at joints. 2. At substrates for tile, provide Level 2 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Level 4 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. END OF SECTION 092900 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100 - 1 SECTION 095100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and Samples. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Standard: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Armstrong, Fine Fissured, or a comparable product. B. Classification: As follows, per ASTM E 1264: 1. Type and Form: Type III, Form 2. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured). 3. Light Reflectance (LR) Coefficient: Not less than 0.85. 4. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.55. 5. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35. 6. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Class A. C. Color: White. D. Edge Detail: Reveal sized to fit exposed flange of suspension system. E. Thickness: 5/8 inch. F. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.3 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Ceiling Suspension System: Wide-face, direct-hung system; ASTM C 635, heavy-duty structural classification. 1. Face Design: Flat, flush. 2. Face Finish: Painted white. B. Attachment Devices: Sized for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Provide yield strength at least 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung), but not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100 - 2 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. END OF SECTION 095100 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 - 1 SECTION 096500 - PART 1 - GENERAL RESILIENT FLOORING 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and Samples. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Color and Pattern: Black. B. ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP (rubber, thermoplastic). C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid). D. Style: Cove (base with toe). E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch F. Height: . 4 inches G. Lengths: Cut lengths . 48 inches H. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. long or coils in manufacturer's standard lengths. I. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. J. Finish: As selected. 2.2 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES A. Color and Pattern: Gray. B. Treads: ASTM F 2169, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. Surface Design: a. Class 2, Pattern: Raised-rib design with abrasive strips. 2. Nosing Style: Square. 3. Nosing Height: 1-1/2 inches 4. Thickness: . 1/4 inch 5. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. and tapered to back edge. C. Risers: Smooth, flat, coved-toe risers, 7 inches 1. Thickness: high by length matching treads and of same manufacturer and material as treads. 0.125 inch D. Stringers: Of same thickness as risers, height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads and to cover stair stringers, and of same manufacturer and material as treads. . Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 - 2 2.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERING A. Basis of Design: Technoflor, UrbanScapes HPD. B. Color and Pattern: as selected from manufacturer’s standards. C. Sheet Floor Covering with Backing: ASTM F 1303, Type I, minimum binder content of 90 percent, Grade 1. 1. Overall Thickness: 0.09 inches. 2. Interlayer Material: PVC. 3. Backing Class: Class A (fibrous). D. Fire-Test Response: Critical radiant flux classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. E. Wearing Surface: Embossed. F. Sheet Width: 6 feet G. Seaming Method: Heat welded, as recommended by manufacturer. . 2.4 VINYL TILE A. Basis of Design: CoreTec, Plus Enhanced Tile. B. Color and Pattern: as selected from manufacturer’s line of product. 1. Matte Finish. C. Thickness: 8 mm. D. Size: 12 by 24 inches (nominal) E. Installation: Direct glue. . 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement- or blended hydraulic cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. D. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer. 1. Color: Match floor covering. E. Chemical-Bonding Compound: Manufacturer's product for chemically bonding seams. F. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. B. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. C. Maintain uniformity of resilient sheet flooring direction, and match edges for color shading at seams. D. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches E. Lay out tiles so tile widths at opposite edges of room are equal and are at least one-half of a tile. away from parallel joints in substrates. F. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. G. Adhesively install resilient wall base and accessories. H. Install wall base in maximum lengths possible. Apply to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. I. Install stair-tread-nose filler to nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. J. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. K. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coat(s). END OF SECTION 096500 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1 SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and Samples. B. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner carpet tiles equal to 5 percent of each type and color carpet tile installed, packaged with protective covering for storage. C. Unit Price: See Bid Form. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Products: 1. Basis of Design: a. Patcraft, Get Up and Go b. EF Contract, Artisan c. Philadelphia, Infuse B. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon. 1. No less than 90% solution-dyed. C. Face Construction: Patterned-loop or Level-loop pile. D. Average Density: 4000-9000. E. Pile Thickness: 0.08 to 0.11 inches for finished carpet tile. F. Surface Pile Weight: 12 to 20 oz./cu. yd. excluding weight of backings. G. Primary Backing: Vinyl. H. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material. I. Size: 24 by 24 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104. B. Installation Method: Glue down; releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive. END OF SECTION 096813 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 PAINTING 099100 - 1 SECTION 099100 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: 1. Product Data. B. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner remaining product of each color and type of finish coat paint used on Project, in containers, properly labeled and sealed. C. Unit Price: See Bid Form. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT A. Products: 1. Basis of Design: Sherwin Williams. 2. All substitution requests shall be received prior to submitting bid. B. MPI Standards: Provide materials that comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." C. Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with substrates. 1. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. D. Colors: As selected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items that are not to be painted. Mask items that cannot be removed. Reinstall items in each area after painting is complete. C. Clean and prepare surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area. Schedule painting so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Paint exposed surfaces, new and existing, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 PAINTING 099100 - 2 2. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint the back side of access panels. 4. Color-code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces. 5. Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and labels unless otherwise indicated. C. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use rollers for finish coat on interior walls and ceilings. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 1. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. E. Apply stains and transparent finishes to produce surface films without color irregularity, cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other imperfections. Use multiple coats to produce a smooth surface film of even luster. 3.3 INTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Dressed Lumber: Including architectural woodwork and trim. 1. Satin Polyurethane: Three coats over stain: MPI INT 6.3E. a. Basis of Design: Sherwin Williams, A67F00001 2. Satin Polyurethane: Three coats: MPI INT 6.3K. a. Basis of Design: Sherwin Williams, A67F00001 B. Gypsum Board: 1. Ceilings: a. Flat Latex: Two coats over primer/sealer: MPI INT 9.2A. b. Basis of Design: Sherwin Williams, B28W08000 (primer & sealer), B30W04651 ProMar 400. 2. Walls: a. Eggshell Latex: Two coats over primer/sealer: MPI INT 9.2A. b. Basis of Design: Sherwin Williams, B28W08000 (primer & sealer), B20W12651 ProMar 200. C. Concrete Floor: 1. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. END OF SECTION 099100 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 SIGNAGE 101400 - 1 SECTION 101400 - PART 1 - GENERAL SIGNAGE 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples. B. Unit Price: See Bid Form. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGNS, GENERAL A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1. 2.2 PANEL SIGNS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Match existing or provide a comparable product. B. Interior Panel Signs: Matte-finished opaque acrylic with adhesively applied vinyl film copy with beveled edges and rounded corners. 1. Finishes and Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch 3. Provide signs for the following rooms mounted on the wall beside the room door: above surface with contrasting colors. a. As directed by Owner. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). B. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure laminate engraving stock with face and core in contrasting colors. C. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils PART 3 - EXECUTION with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Salvage existing signs for re-use as possible. B. Locate signs where indicated or directed by Architect. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance. C. Wall-Mounted Signs: 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces, other than vinyl. END OF SECTION 101400 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 SECTION 102800 - PART 1 - GENERAL TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: B. Grab Bar: American Specialties, Inc. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model 3800. 2. Material: Stainless steel. 3. Mounting: Concealed. 4. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish. 5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches C. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: for heavy-duty applications. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model 6471. 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Door or Cover: Self-closing. 5. Receptacle: Removable. D. Mirror Unit: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model 0620. 2. Frame: Stainless-steel channel. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch B. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. E. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. , when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. END OF SECTION 102800 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1 SECTION 104413 - PART 1 - GENERAL FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data. B. Fire-Rated, Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Enameled-steel, semi-recessed cabinets for fire extinguisher. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 1. Trim Style: Flat trim. 2. Trim Material: Steel. D. Door Material: Steel. 1. Door Style: Fully glazed with frame. 2. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass. E. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets at 54 inches B. Fire-Rated Hose or Valve Cabinets: Install cabinet with not more than above finished floor to top of cabinet. 1/16-inch END OF SECTION 104413 tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS 123623 - 1 SECTION 123623 - PART 1 - GENERAL PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Samples showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of finish. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is completed, and HVAC system is operating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: AWI, AWMAC, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." B. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: Premium grade. 1. Laminate Grade: HGS for flat countertops, HGP for post-formed countertops. 2. Edge Treatment: Lumber edge for transparent finish matching wood species and cut on cabinet surfaces. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent. B. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. D. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 1. Basis of Design: Formica, Storm Solidz 3505-58. F. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch 2.3 FABRICATION OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. A. Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS 123623 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Install countertops to comply with referenced quality standard for grade specified. C. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches D. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. . E. Anchor countertops securely to base units. Seal space between backsplash and wall. END OF SECTION 123623 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211300 - 1 SECTION 211300 - AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work 1. The Automatic Sprinkler Control Contractor is responsible for the remodel work for the sprinkler system in the remodel areas of the building. This includes the complete design and installation of the sprinkler system in the building. 2. Original existing fire sprinkler system drawings have been located and are available upon request. Field verification of the existing piping will be required. 3. The second floor has existing concealed heads serving the concealed combustible areas above the ceiling. Maintain and add/relocate heads as needed to properly cover this space. 4. Conceal all piping. Exposed piping will not be allowed on this project except in mechanical rooms or storage rooms without ceilings. Coordinate with the architect and general contractor to provide that all piping is concealed. 5. The IT server room in the basement is covered with an existing FM-200 clean agent system. 6. Install sprinkler heads in the center of ceiling tiles. Any head not installed in the center of tile will be required to be removed, recentered and the ceiling tile replaced to match. B. Section Includes: 1. Automatic Sprinkler systems. 2. Requirements of NFPA 13 and local governing authorities. 3. Fire protection sprinkler piping work with feed and cross main piping, branch line piping test valves, test connections and sprinklers. Also include flow indicators, valves, gauges, alarms, and drain piping. C. Related Sections: 1. Applicable Division 22 and 23 Sections. Refer to other Divisions for coordination of work. 2. Refer to section 220000 for electronic file delivery requirements and fees. 1.2 GOVERNING AUTHORITIES A. Comply with applicable state and local codes. Meet the requirements of NFPA 13. Meet requirements of the Bozeman Fire department. Conform to classifications of occupancy, area coverage, rating of heads, and maximum number of heads served by each branch line and riser. B. Provide sprinkler products bearing approved labels. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211300 - 2 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings and details of the fire protection system to and receive approval from the governing authorities before six copies are forwarded to Consulting Design Solutions, Inc. 2. Submit a certificate upon completion of each fire protection sprinkler piping system stating that the work has been completed and tested in accordance with NFPA 13, that there are no defects in the system, and that it is operational. Sprinkler test procedures and certificate format will be as indicated in NFPA 13, unless otherwise directed by the governing authorities. 1.4 HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS AND CRITERIA A. Hydrant flow test data is as follows: Hydrant # Hydrant Location Flow (gpm) Pressure (psi) South Tracy and Olive – 2.5” nozzle Test performed on 10-23-2019 by city of Bozeman 0 128 static 1760 110 pitot 124 residual B. Design a wet-pipe sprinkler system to protect the remodel areas of the building. Extend branch piping where possible. Provide new branch piping from existing cross mains where needed. Provide design that is per NFPA 13. C. Hazard Classifications: 1. Office areas: Light Hazard. 2. Other rooms not listed: Per NFPA 13. D. Include required outside hose stream flows in the calculations. 1.5 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. The contractor for the automatic sprinkler installation is required to be a qualified fire protection contractor regularly engaged in the installation of automatic fire sprinkler systems and other fire equipment. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211300 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide materials complying with NFPA 13, "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems: Size drain piping as shown, or if not shown, as required to drain the sprinkler system piping properly. 2.2 FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING A. All interior piping is required to be in accordance with NFPA 13. Provide piping to match the existing and that is UL/FM approved. B. Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Smaller 1. Pipe: Schedule 40 ASTM A-120 black steel 2. Fittings: Class 150 malleable iron or Class 125 cast iron, or forged steel, threaded, ANSI B16.3 or B16.4 C. Pipe Sizes 2 1/2 Inches and Larger. 1. Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM A-120 black steel 2. Fittings: Class 150 malleable iron, Class 125 cast iron, or forged steel, threaded, ANSI B16.3 or B16.4 D. Fittings: UL and Factory Mutual approved; electric-resistance welded steel pipe, ASTM A135. E. Option: Schedule 10 pipe may be used on overhead sprinkler piping. Join pipe by UL Listed mechanical grooved couplings. Cut grooves are not permitted. Fit-fast installation technique couplings/fittings are not permitted on this project. F. Option: Allied XL piping may be used on overhead sprinkler piping provided the following conditions are met: 1. Minimum Pipe Size 1 inch; maximum pipe size 3 inches. 2. Threads: Shop cut according to applicable ANSI standards. 3. Pipe Fittings: Provide pipe fittings that are listed for use with this type of pipe. 2.3 PIPING PRODUCTS A. Provide factory-fabricated fire protection sprinkler piping products of the sizes and types indicated. Where not indicated, provide products to comply with installation requirements and with NFPA 13. Provide sizes and types to match piping and equipment connections. 2.4 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS A. Provide standard, soldered-link, automatic sprinklers with 165°F operating temperature; except provide sprinklers with operating temperatures as required by NFPA 13 for installation near heating equipment or lights, or as indicated in other Sections of Specifications. Heads will be as follows: 1. In exposed areas, heads will be brass upright or equal. 2. In all areas with ceilings, conceal all piping and utilize white recessed heads with white escutcheon. Size orifice according to hydraulic calculations. B. Maintenance Stock: For each style and temperature range required, furnish additional fire sprinklers of each type installed. Comply with NFPA 13. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211300 - 4 C. Emergency Head Storage Cabinet: Provide red, baked enamel, steel sprinkler cabinet to store the extra sprinklers and wrenches, as required by NFPA 13. D. Hangers and Supports: Provide hangers and supports as required by NFPA 13 and by governing authorities. Hangers will be listed by UL. 2.5 VALVES A. Provide valves as specified or required to comply with NFPA Standards and requirements of governing authorities. Provide backflow prevention devices and check valves, where required by state or local codes. Provide valves that are in accordance with the following detailed specifications: 1. Gate Valves 2 inches and smaller (for 175 PSI working pressure). a. Crane No. 459. b. Jenkins No. 275-U (for 175 PSI working pressure). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER DESIGN CRITERIA A. System Design: Design entire existing building and new addition per NFPA 13. This standard will be used for water supply and demand and sprinkler design density. Comply with all local codes. B. Provide a 10 pound cushion between the supply curve and the demand point, including the hose stream allowance. Include underground piping in the hydraulic calculation for sprinkler piping. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. During installation, comply with the requirements of NFPA 13. Install sprinkler piping products in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that fire protection sprinklers piping complies with governing requirements and services the intended purposes. B. Examine other work shown on the Drawings and conditions at the jobsite. Coordinate the routing of work with other construction trades to avoid interference with other installations. C. Locate pipe routing and sprinkler head locations as required to avoid equipment, plumbing piping, heating, and air conditioning piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical conduits and bus ducts and similar work. D. Provide pipe offsets as required to complete the installation. Modify shop prefabricated piping, pipe hangers, and other components as required to fit the jobsite conditions. E. Shop drill and weld weld-o-lets piping. F. Center all heads installed in lay-in ceiling in the lay-in panels. G. Contractor is responsible for a neat and clean installation. Confirm proposed location of all exposed piping with engineer prior to bid. Conceal all piping in finished areas. Install all heads level. Fully recess all recessed heads. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 211300 - 5 A. Apply signs to controls, and drain, test and alarm valves to identify their purposes and functions. Provide lettering sizes and styles from NFPA'S suggested styles. 3.4 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Prior to connecting sprinkler piping for flushing, underground contractor must flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed, and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system under pressure, as required to remove foreign substances as required by NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. 3.5 TESTING A. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically in accordance with NFPA 13, at not less than 200 PSIG, or at 50 PSIG in excess of normal operating pressure when normal operating pressure is in excess of 150 PSIG. Check system for leakage at joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested. B. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with NFPA Standards for "little or no leakage", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 211300 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEM 212200 - 1 SECTION 212200 – CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. An existing FM-200 system existing in the IT Server room. Modify the system for the renovated walls and ceilings. At the completion of the project, provide a functioning, code compliant system. B. The work described in this specification consists of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary and required to complete and test the automatic fire detection and extinguishing system. Provide and install any materials not specifically mentioned in this specification or not shown on drawings but required for proper performance and operation of the system. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Provide shop drawings as required in 220000. Show all nozzle locations, piping, valves, and details. Locate all equipment and piping to miss all lights, ducts, etc., and overlay the plans during shop drawing preparation to insure that all work is coordinated. Indicate the height above finished floor of all piping on the shop drawings. At the completion of the project, provide all system flow and volume calculations. Provide an as-built set of plans. 1.3 SYSTEM STANDARDS A. Provide installation in accordance with the drawings, specifications, and the latest adopted editions of the following: 1. NFPA 2001 2. NFPA #72 3. NFPA #70 4. International Fire Code 5. International Building Code 6. State and Local Code Requirements 7. Local City Standards B. Provide all work by a contractor licensed by the Montana State Fire Marshall, normally engaged in fire extinguishing system and installation C. Provide the system consisting of all components either listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., and Underwriters Laboratories of Canada or approved by the Factory Mutual System for use in automatic fire detection and FM-200 fire extinguishing systems. D. Provide all wiring for shielding certain conductors from others or routing in separate raceways as recommended by the manufacturer’s documentation. E. Provide the system installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of automatic fire detection and FM-200 fire extinguishing systems in strict accordance with NFPA Standards. CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEM 212200 - 2 F. The contractor shall be an authorized distributor of the fire alarm equipment bid. The contractor shall have a license from the Montana State Fire Marshall Bureau to install, test, and service fire alarm systems and special agent fire suppression systems. G. The contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in design, installation, and testing of fire detection and FM-200 fire extinguishing systems. H. The contractor shall have a minimum certification level of NICET IV in the Subfield of Special Hazards Systems Layout in the Field of Fire Protection Engineering Technology. A copy of the NICET certification shall be submitted with the bid. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits and inspections required. 1.5 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Confirm that the manufacturer or his authorized distributor has access within a 150 mile radius of the job site to an established agency which stocks a full complement of parts and offers twenty-four (24) hour recharge service and that the agency will supply parts and services for all systems and equipment to be furnished without delay and at a reasonable cost. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. The system is existing. Relocate system heads and controls as required for a functioning system. Provide any new components required for the remodel work. B. Furnish and install a complete automatic fire detection and total flooding FM-200 HFC- 227ea fire extinguishing system including charged FM-200 storage cylinders, piping, valves, nozzles, control panel, detectors, manual stations, alarm devices, wiring, components, appurtenances and accessories, and all wiring and connections to devices furnished by others. C. Provide the system and components supplied by one manufacturer of established reputation and experience that has produced similar apparatus for a period of at least three (3) years and is able to refer to similar installations rendering satisfactory service. D. All references to model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimal standards of performance, quality, and construction and is based upon equipment designed and manufactured by Kidde-Fenwal. Fike/Ansul shall be accepted as equal. E. Any equipment proposed as equal to that specified herein shall conform to the standards herein, and the manufacturer must supply proof of having produced similar equipment now giving satisfactory service. In addition, the contractor must follow prior approved requirements specified in Section 220000. F. Provide all new material and equipment or factory rebuilt equivalent to new in accordance with all standards herein. CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEM 212200 - 3 G. Provide all individual components and composite systems designed for continuous operation without undue heating or change in rated values and properly fused. H. Provide all new materials, equipment, accessories, devices, and other facilities and appurtenances covered by these specifications or noted on the contract drawings and on the contractor’s approved working drawings and installation specifications. Provide all components and materials conforming to applicable and recognized standards for their use. Provide equipment that is the standard cataloged products of a single manufacturer. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION A. Provide the system capable of signaling an alarm prior to the development of visible smoke or flame within the protected area. Provide the system with audible and visual annunciation at its central panel upon detection of a fire condition, visually identifying the space associated with each of its individual detection devices. Upon verification of a progressing fire condition by operation of a second detection device, activate the automatic suppression system sequence. The suppression system will be a total flood system designed to provide a 7% concentration by volume, at a design temperature of 70 degrees Fahrenheit of FM-200 which shall be capable of extinguishing class A, B, and C fires within the protected volume. B. Provide the automatic fire detection and total flooding fire extinguishing system consisting of main control panel, remote annunciator, detection devices, manual stations, charged agent storage cylinders, valves, nozzles, and alarm devices all wired and piped in accordance with the specifications and shall function as specified herein. C. Provide the system electrically supervised against open, short, and ground wire faults in the initiating device circuits, alarm indicating device circuits and FM-200 releasing circuits. Wiring faults occurring in these circuits shall cause both an audible and visual indication at the control panel. External circuit supervision shall not require additional wiring other than the pair used for detection, FM-200 release or alarm indicators. These two wires shall provide both supervision and control signals. D. Provide the complete detection/suppression system with 24 hour battery backup capability. Provide system capable of FM-200 System discharge as well as sounding all audible devices for five (5) minutes at the end of the 24 hour standby period. E. The system shall function as follows when any area or duct detector, manual station, or water flow switch operates: 1. Sound required audible devices. 2. Indicate zone or area initiating the alarm. 3. Light an indicating lamp on the detector initiating the alarm. 4. Shut down the HVAC system. F. In areas protected with the FM-200 Fire Suppression System, design the detection system for the automation release of the suppression system. ON activation of the second detector within the protected area, release the suppression system for the area, sound a system operated local evacuation horn, and illuminate the extinguishing system activated light. Provide with manual release pull stations in all areas with automatic suppression systems for manual release of the extinguishing agent. CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEM 212200 - 4 G. Provide the system with a time delay of 30 seconds to delay the release of the extinguishing agent after the operation of the second detector. H. Provide an “abort” switch of the dead man type. The abort switch while depressed shall prevent discharge of the extinguishing agent. The pre-discharge time delay shall begin upon release of the abort switch. Discharge of the extinguishing agent shall occur at the expiration of the specified discharge time delay. 2.6 NOZZLES A. Provide discharge nozzles to disperse the FM-200. Provide nozzles that are brass and available in 1” through 2” sizes. Each size shall come in two styles: 180 Degree and 360 Degree dispersion patterns. Provide the nozzle used with pipe threads that correspond to the nozzle size. Provide nozzle design so that deflector plates shall not be necessary to protect ceiling tiles. Provide F.M. approved and U.L. listed nozzle. 2.7 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Provide ferrous piping, either black or galvanized, conforming to ASTM A-53 or A-106, or other materials conforming to these strength requirements. Provide the thickness of the pipe wall conforming to ANSI B-31.1, Power Piping Code. Provide fittings that are 300 pound or 600 pound class in accordance with NFPA Standard 2001. B. Ream pipe ends thoroughly after cutting and remove all oil and chips. Blow dry air or nitrogen through the piping to remove chips or other debris prior to installation of the nozzles. C. Securely fasten all piping with particular attention being given to fastening near nozzles to prevent pipe movement due to the reaction force during discharge. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate with pipe, ducts, lights, and equipment to insure adequate space for heads and piping placement. B. Review plans, specifications, and shop drawings of other trades to coordinate work. 3.2 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty for all equipment and systems by the contractor for a period of one year following acceptance. Provide warranty including parts, labor, prompt field service, pick-up, and delivery. B. Provide one year testing and maintenance, consisting of: 1. Regularly and systematically examining all detectors, manual stations, panels, relays, pressure switches, and accessories pertaining to the system. 2. Tests and written reports which certify that all initiating devices have been tested and which indicate the result of the inspection test as required by the authority having jurisdiction. CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEM 212200 - 5 C. The system supplier shall offer a test and maintenance agreement providing the same service as described above to commence after expiration of test and maintenance included in this contract. 3.3 TESTS AND REPORTS A. Perform all electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment manufacturer. Measure and adjust each of the ionization detectors to the maximum stable sensitivity setting. Perform testing with the detector at its operational location and under normal operational environmental conditions in the area. Bench settings are not acceptable. Include all test and report costs in the contract price. Prepare a checkout report by the installation technicians and submit in triplicate, one copy of which will be registered with the equipment manufacturer. Include in the report, but not be limited to: 1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired. 2. Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms with these specifications. 3. Tests of individual zones as applicable. 4. Serial numbers, locations by zone and model number for each installed detector. 5. Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization and photoelectric detector as measured in place with the HVAC system operating. 6. Response time on thermostats and flame detectors (if used). 7. Technician’s name, certificate number, and date. B. After completion of all the tests and adjustments listed above, submit the following information to the architect: 1. “As-built” conduit layout diagrams including wire color code and/or tag number. 2. Complete “as-built” wiring diagrams. 3. Detailed catalog data on all installed system components. 4. Copy of the test report described in Par. 7.03.1 C. Conduct final tests and inspection in the presence of architect’s representatives and to their satisfaction. Supply personnel and required auxiliary equipment for this test without additional cost. D. Test the completed smoke detection system to insure that it is operating properly. This test will consist of exposing the installed units to a performance test as recommended by the manufacturer. Failure of the devices to pass this test is considered a failure of the system. In the event of a failure, readjust, replace, or relocate detectors in that system as required. As required by the architect, recheck the detectors using the fire test after each readjustment or replacement of detectors. E. Provide FM-200 system acceptance inspection and tests as described in NFPA Standard 2001. F. Before final acceptance of work, deliver a composite “Operating and Shop Maintenance Manual.” Provide each manual with, but not be limited to: 1. A statement of guarantee including date of termination and name and phone number of the person to be called in the event of equipment failure. 2. Individual factory issued manuals containing all technical information on each piece of equipment installed. In the even such manuals are not obtainable from the CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEM 212200 - 6 factory, compile and include them. Advertising brochures or operational instructions are not to be used in lieu of the required technical manuals. END OF SECTION 211300 BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 1 SECTION 220000 – BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL SUPPLEMENTARY AND OTHER CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. The general, supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract and the General Requirements (Division 1) are hereby made a part of this section. 1.2 INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The plans and specifications contemplate the complete installation of the system described so that at the conclusion of the construction, the systems will be turned over to the owner complete and ready for safe, efficient operation. The plans and specifications cannot deal individually with the many minute items which may be required by the nature of the systems. Furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type, which while not mentioned directly herein, are obviously essential to the installation and operation of the system and which are normally furnished on quality installations of this type. B. In receiving bids, it will be assumed that each bidder has made a thorough inspection of the conditions and is familiar with all conditions affecting the extent or cost of this work. Claims for extra payments as a result of failure to examine the conditions prior to submitting the bid will not be allowed. C. The drawings are partly diagramatic and do not necessarily show the exact locations of plumbing and piping runs unless specifically dimensioned. Install piping to avoid other trades and install in a compact and neat manner to maximize the available space. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND PERMITS A. Comply with all state and local codes and ordinances applying to the work specified herein. Attention is directed in particular to the UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE, INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE, INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE, INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE AND/OR ANY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, and local regulations concerning the specified plumbing, heating and cooling equipment. B. Make application for, obtain and pay for all required permits and certificates of inspection for the work. C. In the event of conflict between this specification and a governing code or ordinance, provide work to meet the higher standard. Provide all work to meet any local codes that affect work on the project. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes required by local regulations. 1.4 INSPECTION A. Request regular inspections of duly authorized inspectors as required by codes and ordinances. 1.5 SUBSTITUTING BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 2 A. Provide all equipment, fixtures, materials and products exactly as listed in the project plans, schedues and specifications. The Manufacturer listed in the project equipment schedules, drawings and specifications is the basis of design for the project. “Approved Equal” manufacturers listed in the drawings and specifications are allowed to bid only if the manufacturer can provide exactly equal equipment, fixtures, materials and products as listed in the basis of design schedules, drawings and specifications, regardless of any prior approval listing. Any variation in the performance, appearance, color, shape, size, weight, electrical characteristics, etc. is subject to rejection during shop drawing review. The product supplier and installing contractor are responsible for any and all changes to the project and associated costs for any equipment, fixtures, materials and products provided that do not meet the project design requirements. B. Submit proposals to contractor for substitution of material and equipment listed on the drawings and/or these specifications after the architect/engineer's approval has been obtained. For such proposals, provide materials and equipment that conform in type, function, quality of material and assembly and meet the requirements indicated in drawings and specifications. SUBMIT REQUESTS FOR APPROVAL TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AT LEAST 10 DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID DATE. Include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other information needed for an evaluation. Include a statement setting forth any changes in any other equipment or other work that incorporation of the substitute would require. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the proposer. If these proposed substitutions are considered as acceptable equals for quotations and use, approval will be issued in an addendum. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prior to the placing of orders for any equipment, submit to the engineer for approval a complete schedule of mechanical equipment and fixtures to be installed. PDF versions are required for review. Include in the schedule catalogs, cuts, diagrams, shop drawings, performance curves or any other descriptive material necessary to fully describe the equipment proposed and its operating characteristics. In the schedules, list the operating conditions of the equipment at the conditions listed on the schedules. B. Submit all shop drawings and sign, "approve" and initial prior to submittal to the engineer. The engineer will check the shop drawings to aid in interpreting the plans and specifications, and in so doing will assume that the shop drawings conform to all specified requirements set forth in this specification. The approval of the shop drawings by the engineer does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of complying with all elements of the specification. C. Make the determination of quantities of material and equipment required based on the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specification are completed as an aid to the contractor, but where discrepancies arise, provide the proper number to complete this work. 1.7 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS A. Coordinate all work with the asbestos abatement contractor for this project. Prior to the start of work review all asbestos reports or sample analysis, that the Owner has had completed. Do not cut into or in any other way disturb existing materials which contain asbestos. Asbestos abatement is not within the scope of Division 22 work. If a material BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 3 that has not been tested for asbestos must be disturbed, make a request in writing to the Owner that the material be tested for asbestos prior to the start of work. B. Provide materials and equipment which do not contain asbestos. At the completion of the project, certify in writing that the materials and equipment installed do not contain asbestos. 1.8 LEAD FREE DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS A. Provide a lead-free domestic water system including all equipment. piping, valves, fittings, joint materials and all other components in contact with domestic water. Lead- free is determined by the current codes and standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS. A. Provide 3M CP25 caulk for fire barrier caulking system. Provide fire barrier caulk that is UL classified and Factory Mutual System approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK A. Examine all the drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of this work. General and electrical wiring contract drawings will be made available to this Contractor. SHOULD DISCREPANCIES AFFECTING THE WORK BE FOUND, IMMEDIATELY REPORT SAME TO THE ENGINEER FOR INSTRUCTIONS. Provide for and cover the expense of subsequent changes made necessary by neglecting to discover and report such discrepancies, under the direction of the Engineer. B. “Furnish”, “Provide”, and/or “Install” are all considered as a requirement to both furnish the equipment and install it unless specific reference is made to the furnishing or installing of the equipment by others. C. Confer and cooperate with other Contractors on the job in the installation of the work so all work will be installed in proper relationship to the surrounding location and shape of any part to avoid conflicts. Provide for the correct size and location of any changes, slots, and openings required and do any cutting or patching made necessary by failure to make proper arrangements in this respect with no cost to the owner. D. Locate pipes essentially as shown on the drawings, but in exact locations as laid out on the job to suit actual conditions. Arrange exposed pipes as closely as practical to wall or ceiling surfaces. Indicated connections to equipment are necessarily based on equipment of a given manufacturer. If the use of "approved equal" equipment is proposed, then assume the responsibility for proper location in a manner approved by the Engineer. Make changes that are necessary for this reason without additional cost to the Owner. E. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the installation and connection of all equipment and materials furnished under this contract. In the event of conflict or discrepancy between manufacturer's instructions and the contract documents, notify the Engineer before proceeding. Do not make any equipment installation in a manner that voids the manufacturer's warranty of the equipment. BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 4 3.2 CLEANING A. Refer to section 232116 for cleaning of the heating and chilled water piping systems. B. Remove labels, stickers, etc., and leave the entire installation in a clean, usable condition. C. Thoroughly clean heating and cooling equipment, tanks, heat exchangers, pumps, traps, ducts, etc., and install new filters or filter media. 3.3 PAINTING A. Protect the finishes of all mechanical equipment during storage, installation and until final acceptance. “Touch up” any damage or imperfections or if extensive, repaint the entire unit as directed by the Engineer. 3.4 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATIONS A. Seal all cracks, voids, or holes for the passing of mechanical and electrical items through floors and fire rated walls, or ceilings with fire rating of 1 hour or more with a fire barrier caulk. B. Provide 3M CP 25 caulk for fire barrier caulking system. C. Install fire barrier caulking system in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maintain a fire rating of 3 hours minimum. 3.5 SLEEVES A. The Mechanical Contractor will set and maintain all sleeves. Provide sleeve for any pipe passing through building construction including walls, floors, roofs or masonry partitions in accordance with the following. B. Provide all pipe sleeves through slabs, floors, masonry walls and partitions that are 1/2 inch greater in inside diameter than the external diameter of pipe passing through. Provide sleeves for insulated piping that are large enough to accommodate the insulation without harming the insulation or vapor barrier. Provide all sleeves that are fabricated from new material cut square and reamed. C. Provide sleeves in all masonry partition walls and floors. Provide sleeves that are Schedule 40 steel pipe. Provide wall sleeves that are flush with the wall surface. Extend the top of floor sleeves 1" above the floor, and the bottom of the sleeve is required to be flush with the floor. D. Protect the space between the pipe and the sleeves, through fire rated walls and floors as designated below. E. Furnish and install chrome-plated wall, floor and ceiling plates on all exposed pipes where they pass through walls, floors, or ceilings in finished areas. Provide the wall plates with set screws or spring locks for clamping to the pipe. F. Provide watertight seal at all sleeves through floors. 3.6 OPENINGS BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 5 A. Provide all openings required for the passage of ductwork and mechanical equipment in the construction. Determine the correct location for all openings. B. Provide the inside dimensions of all openings that are 1/2 inch greater than the size of the ductwork or equipment passing through the opening. Provide openings for insulated ductwork are large enough to accommodate the insulation without harming the insulation or vapor barrier. C. Protect all openings through fire rated walls and floors as described above. D. Patch and seal all openings through all non-fire rated construction around piping or ductwork. Seal openings to match construction material or provide fire rated caulking as described in “Fire Barrier Penetrations” above. E. Seal all openings around piping and ductwork in return air plenums to prevent non- plenum rated materials from being exposed in the plenums. 3.7 EXISTING SERVICES A. Verify the exact location of all existing building services extended and/or relocated for this project. Also verify the exact location and take proper precautions to protect all services which may be encountered during construction. B. Protect, brace, and support all active services which are encountered where required for proper execution of the work and without interruption of service if possible. C. Protect all inactive services which are encountered or remove as directed by the Owner, Utility Company, or Municipal Agency having jurisdiction. D. When active services must be temporarily interrupted, make arrangements to work continuously including overtime if required, to assure that services will be interrupted only as long as actually required to complete necessary work. 3.8 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT A. Provide access to all motors, valves, dampers, controls, specialties, etc., for maintenance purposes. Provide all access doors, access panels, removable sections, etc., required for access. The General Contractor will provide access panels and doors required in the building construction where shown on the plans. Coordinate the location of the access openings relative to the mechanical equipment to assure proper access to the equipment. B. Provide all access openings required for manual motorized, fire and smoke dampers and other devices requiring access in the ductwork, plenums, housings, tanks, etc., under this portion of the contract. 3.9 PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Protect all sheaves, belts, drives, couplings, and moving parts by approved permanent guards, shields, or railings, which will be in place whenever the equipment is in operation and will be in accordance with applicable safety standards. 3.10 TESTS BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 6 A. Perform tests on the systems Specified herein. B. Conduct all tests in the presence of the engineer and/or owner. Prior to conducting any tests or balancing of the systems, obtain and file a letter with the engineer's office if the tests are to be witnessed by the owner. Where required, perform such tests in the presence of local or state building inspection officials. Maintain reports of all tests as they are performed. Include the following information in the reports: 1. Project 2. Contractor 3. Date 4. Test performed and portion of system tested. 5. Test results 6. Name and signature of person performing test. 7. Name and signature of witness of the test. C. Upon completion of the project, submit the test reports with the operation and maintenance manuals for review by the Engineer. D. Test soil, waste, and vent and storm drainage piping in accordance with applicable state and local codes. The minimum test will be as follows: Apply the water test to the drainage and vent systems either in its entirety or in sections. If applied to the entire system, tightly close all openings in the piping, except the highest opening, and fill the system with water to point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, tightly plug each opening except the highest opening of the section under test, and fill each section with water, but do not test any section with less than ten (10) foot head of water. In testing successive sections, test at least the upper ten (10) feet of the next preceding section, so that no joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost ten (10) feet of the system) is submitted to a test of less than a ten (10) foot head of water. Keep the water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least fifteen (15) minutes before inspection starts. The system is then tight at all points. E. Test domestic water piping and prove it watertight under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psig. The piping system is required to maintain the test pressure without loss for 2 hours. Determine loss by a drop in gauge pressure or visual leakage. Read the test pressure from a gauge location at the low elevation of the system or portion being tested. 3.11 STERILIZATION OF THE WATER SUPPLY A. Chlorinate all domestic hot and cold water lines to comply with local and State health regulations. B. This work is required to be witnessed by the Architect, Engineer or Building Inspector. C. Apply the chlorinating agent at the start of a new line and inject it through a corporation cock or similar device, to ensure complete chlorination of all pipe. D. Use calcium hypochlorite where applicable and use commercial products such as H.T.H., Perchloron, or Mexochloron. First mix the calcium hypochlorite mix to a homogeneous paste. The paste must contain approximately five (5) percent available chlorine by weight. Then, thin the paste to a slurry and mix with water to obtain a resultant consistency of 100 parts per million. Feed this mixture into the pipeline and retain for a one-hour contact period. Then open all valves in groups of three and run BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 7 water of 100 parts per million calcium chlorite concentration through for a ten minute interval for each group of valves. E. After chlorination, open all valves and run water through to waste for a ten minute period or until the waste water indicates a residual of not over 0.5 parts per million. F. Provide potable water system testing by an approved independent testing agency and certify that the potable water system meets the requirements of local health authorities before using for domestic service upon completion of the system. The testing agency will obtain a representative sample at random outlets on the Project. If test sample does not prove to be potable, sterilize the entire Project's potable water system at no additional cost to the Owner. Furnish a copy of the test to the engineer and the local utility. 3.12 ALL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER DIVISION 220000: A. At a time set by the contractor and agreed to by the owner, arrange to place equipment in operation and have available at that time, if required, representatives of the manufacturer of equipment to assist in starting equipment, to make necessary adjustments to equipment, and to prove satisfactory operation prior to turning facility over to the owner. B. Repair or replace any irregularities, faulty equipment, etc., as required prior to acceptance. C. Run operating test for 30 hour periods and submit data for approval. D. Charge all equipment with clean media and completely finish installation prior to acceptance. E. Properly balance all pumped water systems. F. Properly balance all air systems. Balance the CFM of all diffusers to within 10% of the CFM listed on the schedule. 3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare two portfolios with two complete sets of shop drawings of the equipment used in the erection of the mechanical systems and equipment testings, cleaning and maintenance instructions, operation and maintenance manuals, list of materials for the maintenance, parts list, wiring diagrams, and name and address of authorized service organization. B. Fold information only if necessary, and bind in an 8-1/2" x 11" hard cover indexed, looseleaf binder. Use multiple binders if required to contain material. Properly identify all material with job name, date, and the names and addresses of the contractor, architect, and engineer. C. Submit the portfolios to the engineer for review of material and completeness prior to final inspection, and when approved by the engineer, turn the portfolios over to the owner at the time of the final inspection. D. Where indicated in the specification, provide the services of a factory trained representative to instruct the owner's authorized personnel in the operation, control, and BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 8 maintenance of equipment. Instruct owner's personnel in the operation of all other equipment and systems. E. Include the following close-out documents in the manuals: 1. Final Test and Balance reports. 2. Valve tag chart. 3. Asbestos letter. 4. Warranty letter. 5. Equipment start-up and functional test reports. 3.14 PROJECT CLOSE OUT A. The Mechanical Contractor will arrange for an inspection of all items installed in the ceiling before the ceiling or ceiling tile is installed. Inform the engineer at least one week before the planned installation of the ceiling to arrange the inspection. If the ceiling tile is installed before the inspection, the mechanical contractor will remove all the ceiling tiles prior to the inspection. B. General: Refer to Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Maintain a daily log of operational data on mechanical equipment and systems throughout the closeout period; record hours of operation, assigned personnel, fuel consumption and similar information; submit copy to engineer. C. Record Drawings: Give special attention to the complete and accurate recording of underground conduit, piping and concealed and non-accessible work, branching arrangement and valve location of all piping systems, location of dampers and coils in duct systems, locations of control system sensors and other control devices, and work of change orders where not shown on contract documents. D. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of the project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment with the owner's operating personnel present to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as needed for proper operation. Clean and lubricate each system, and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable parts of the system. E. Operating Instructions: Conduct at least a full day walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel to be involved in the operation and maintenance of the mechanical equipment and systems. If more time is needed, continue instruction until the owner's personnel are familiar with the operation of the system. Explain the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the system. F. Turn-Over of Operation: At the time of substantial completion, turn over the prime responsibility for the operation of the system to the owner's personnel. However until the time of final acceptance, provide at least one full-time operating engineer, who is completely familiar with the work, to consult with and continue training the owner's personnel. G. Final Completion: The following special requirements will be provided in addition to those specified elsewhere: BUILDING MECHANICAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 9 1. Do not call for final completion check until the mechanical systems and equipment have been installed, adjusted, balanced, and are in full and complete satisfactory operation and the following certifications of inspection from equipment suppliers have been completed and submitted with the architect/engineer. Certifications of inspection are required for the following items of equipment: a. Plumbing fixtures and equipment. (Local Rep.) 2. Provide certifications consisting of letters signed by Factory Trained and Authorized service engineers stating the following: a. They have inspected all their equipment on the project. b. They approve the condition of their equipment and its installation. c. They have fully checked its operation and certify that it is operating properly. d. They will note any problems, conditions or objections that could lead to future operating problems. e. Provide log sheets on start-up of all Condensing Units, AHU's and Terminal Units. 3. Exceptions may be permitted upon written request from the contractor listing any minor items that are uncompleted and beyond his reasonable control. Provide a full guarantee that they be completed at a named later date and the guarantee will be extended as required to provide a full warranty. H. Final Payment will not be made until the contractor has satisfactorily completed all final inspection items. I. Guarantee: Fully guarantee all equipment and work, parts and labor for one year from the date of substantial completion, unless noted otherwise. Guarantee all equipment and work and assume full responsibility to repair any equipment with no additional expense to the Owner which the manufacturer refuses to guarantee. The Owner has the right to order repairs to any equipment or work provided hereon and to charge the contractor for the same if repairs are not made during a reasonable period of time not to exceed 24 hours during an emergency or 72 hours on a non-critical item. END OF SECTION 220000 DEMOLITION 220010 - 1 SECTION 220010 - DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 The extent of demolition is shown on the drawings. 1.2 Owner will retain ownership of plumbing fixtures and mechanical equipment. 1.3 Remove all items which the owner does not wish to retain and dispose of off site. 1.4 SUBMIT PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF WORK TO ARCHITECT AND OWNER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO START WORK. INCLUDE IN SCHEDULE COORDINATION FOR SHUT-OFF CAPPING AND CONTINUATION OF UTILITIES. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Demolish in an orderly and careful manner as required to accommodate new work. Protect existing supporting structural members. 3.2 Field verify exact locations of existing services and construction prior to demolition work. Take all necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing utilities or structure. 3.3 Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required at no cost to the owner. 3.4 Cap all pipes below floor or above ceiling. Remove all excess pipes and ducts. 3.5 Carefully remove all items to be retained by owner and store as directed by the owner. 3.6 Remove from site all debris, rubbish, and all other items which the owner does not retain and dispose of off site. END OF SECTION 220010 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1 SECTION 220523 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with Installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. SIZES: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. C. OPERATORS: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 6" and smaller. D. Refer to section 220553 for valve tag and valve chart requirements. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with section 220000. B. Indicate pressure and temperature classifications and joining methods for all types of valves used in the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The following valve manufacturers are approved: Nibco, Apollo, Red White, Watts or approved equal. Approved flow control valves are Autoflow, Nexus, Griswold or approved equal. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. Provide NIBCO No. T-580 threaded, S-580 solder, 125 PSI steam, 400 PSI WOG for Bronze Ball Valves. Provide valves conforming to federal specification WW-V-35 CLASS A, Type II. Furnish with extended lever handle. 2.3 MANUAL BALANCING VALVES A. Provide Armstrong, Victaulic TA, Bell and Gossett or Taco circuit setter valves. 1. Provide all valves constructed of bronze body-brass ball type with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. 2. Provide with differential pressure read-out ports across valve seat area. Provide read-out ports fitted with internal EPT inserts and check valves. Provide 1/4" NPT tapped drain/purge port. 3. Provide with memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance position. 4. Provide with calibrated name plates to assure specific valve settings. 5. Provide valves designed for positive shut-off. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. B. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose-end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane. C. Install extended-stem valves, where insulation is indicated, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation. 3.2 SELECTION B. Select and install valves with the following ends or types of pipe-tube connections: 1. Tube Size 2" and Smaller: Soldered joint valves. 2. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Threaded valves. END OF SECTION 220523 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1 SECTION 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide pipe hangers that adequately support the piping system. Install near or at changes in piping direction and at concentrated loads. Install to provide vertical adjustment to maintain pitch required for proper drainage. Install to allow for expansion and contraction of the piping. B. Construct and install duct hangers in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. C. Do not attach duct, piping or equipment hangers to wood sub-flooring, pan decks or wood roof decking. Attach hangers to the concrete floor structure or structural steel construction with joist or beam clamps. 1.2 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide and install duct, piping and equipment supports to meet all seismic requirements as required in the International Building Code and American Society of Civil Engineer (ASCE), ASCE-7, latest editions. B. Each manufacturer of seismic system components will submit a certificate of compliance for review and acceptance by the engineer and/or the authority having jurisdiction. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 220000. B. Indicate pipe hangers to be used for each size and type of pipe. C. Indicate seismic supports to be used for each type of pipe, duct or equipment on the project. 1.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Provide (in coordination with the General Contractor) all concrete bases required for equipment (boilers, air handling units, tanks, pumps, furnaces, water heaters, etc.) inside the building and condensing units outside the building. After the bases are poured, allow them to set at least five (5) days before mounting equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SESIMIC SUPPORTS A. Provide seismic supports for piping, ductwork and equipment as manufactured by Amber Booth, Mason Industries, or approved equal. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING EQUIPMENT 220529 - 2 A. Provide hangers that are constructed of malleable or wrought iron, and hangers supporting copper pipe that are copper plated. Hangers for pipe 3 inches and smaller must be adjustable split ring, ELCEN FIG. 89, Galv. and ELCEN FIG. 389 copper plated. For piping above 3 inches, hangers must be adjustable, Clevis type, ELCEN FIG. 12. B. Support rod loading: Provide total hanger rod load (including piping, insulation, and medium) that does not exceed following limits: C. Nominal Rod Diameter Max. Load 3/8 IN 600 LB 1/2 IN 1100 LB 5/8 IN 1800 LB 3/4 IN 2700 LB 7/8 IN 3700 LB 1 IN 4900 LB 2.3 ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. Provide roof curbs as specified in the equipment sections for roof top units, roof mounted fans and other similar equipment. Anchor the curbs to the roof and anchor the equipment to the curbs. 2.4 SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT A. Provide threaded rod supports at each corner and additional support points. Provide vibration isolation as specified for each piece of equipment. Provide seismic support cables at each corner hanger and attach to the structure. Provide rod stiffeners for rods longer that 12”. 2.5 CONCRETE ANCHORS A. Provide Hilti (or approved equal) concrete inserts installed per the manufacturers recommendations. Coordinate locations of pipe support anchors. 2.6 CONCRETE PAD CONSTRUCTION A. Provide four inch thick indoor equipment bases with re-bar twelve inches on centers both ways. Provide six inch thick outdoor bases with re-bar twelve inches on centers both ways. B. Provide wedge anchors to attach the indoor pads to the concrete floors. Provide anchors in the pads to match the equipment support requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Where groups of three or more pipes occur, they may be supported with trapeze hangers using two hangers as specified with a capped pipe cross member. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING EQUIPMENT 220529 - 3 B. Do not attach pipe hangers to the roof deck. Attach hangers to the steel construction with beam clamps, beam attachment and brackets bolted to joists and beams. Hang near joist panel joints wherever possible. C. Provide pipe hangers for insulated piping that are large enough to encompass the insulation, using a metal shield so the vapor barrier jacket will not be broken. See Section 220719, Mechanical Insulation. D. Hanging from one pipe to another is prohibited. E. Install pipe hangers with the following spacing: 1. HORIZONTAL STEEL PIPE: Pipe Size Maximum Spacing Up to 1-1/4" 8 feet 1-1/2" to 3" 10 feet 4" to 6" 12 feet 2. HORIZONTAL COPPER PIPE/TUBE: Pipe Size Maximum Spacing 1/2" to 3/4" 5 feet 1" 6 feet 1-1/4" 7 feet 1-1/2" to 2" 8 feet 3. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe at five foot intervals except where 10 ft. lengths of pipe are used, 10 ft. intervals may be used. 4. Support horizontal and vertical plastic pipe 4'-0" on center. 5. Support vertical piping except plastic at each floor. END OF SECTION 220529 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1 SECTION 220553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide identification for all piping and mechanical equipment as specified in this section. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 220000. Provide shop drawings indicating the materials used, colors and lettering for all piping and equipment labels. Furnish a complete list of equipment labels to be furnished for the project. 1.3 STANDARDS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field and viewing angles of identification devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Approved manufacturers are Allen Systems, W. H. Bradley, Industrial Safety Supply or Seaton Name Plate. 2.2 PIPE MARKERS A. PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS; Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre- printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color coded pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. B. PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS; Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6"(including insulation), provide full band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location fastened by one of the following methods. 1. Snap on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 4. Taped to pipe or insulation with color coded plastic adhesive tape at least 2" wide with a full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 4". D. Large Pipes: For pipe diameters 6" and larger (including insulation), provide either full- band or strip type pipe markers, no narrower than 3 times letter height, and of required length fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 2. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 2" wide with a full circle at both ends of pipe marker. The tape must be lapped 4" at both ends. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 2 3. Strapped-to-pipe or insulation application of semi-rigid type with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. E. Provide lettering of the manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes the piping system in each instance, or as selected by the engineer in cases of variance with names as shown or specified. F. Provide with arrows on each pipe marker indicating direction of flow, either integrally with the piping system service lettering or as a separate unit of plastic. G. Provide plastic tape of the manufacturer's standard color coded pressure sensitive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick. Provide tape for pipe with outside diameters (including insulation) less than 6", 1-1/2" wide. Provide tape for larger pipes, 2-1/2" wide. 2.3 VALVE TAGS A. Provide brass valve tags that are 18 gauge with stamp engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high. Tags will be 1-1/2" high. Fill the tag engraving with black enamel. Provide valve tag fasteners that are solid brass chain or solid brass S-hooks manufactured specifically for the connection of tags. Furnish flow control valves with brass tags listing equipment tag and rating. 2.4 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Provide engraved plastic laminate signs that are constructed of engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with Fed. Spec. L-P-3387 in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with the engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. Provide engraving that exposes a contrasting inner layer. The thickness will be 1/16" for units up to 8" max. dimension 1/8" for larger units. Fasteners will be self tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. B. Provide plastic equipment markers that are manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. Conform to the following color code. 1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Yellow/Green: Common heating and cooling equipment components. 4. Blue: Equipment which does not meet any of the above criteria. 5. For hazardous equipment use colors and designs recommended by ANSI 13.1. C. Provide nomenclature matching the terminology on the schedules as closely as possible and includes the following: 1. Name and plan number. 2. Equipment service. 3. Design capacity. 4. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, rpm etc. D. Provide markers that are approximately 2-1/2" x 4" for control devices, dampers and valves; and 4-1/2" by 6" for equipment. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 3 E. Provide Lettering and Graphics that coordinates names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. Where multiple systems of the same generic name are shown and specified, provide individual system number as well as service. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces requiring insulation, painting or other covering, install the identification after completion of the painting and insulating. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install pipe markers on each system including arrows to indicate the direction of flow. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces, plenums and exterior locations. 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units. 3. Where pipes pass through walls floors or ceilings. 4. Near major items and other points of origination and termination. 5. Spaced intermediately along pipe runs at a maximum distance of 50', reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. 6. On piping above lay-in ceilings. B. Provide valve tags on all valves, cocks and control devices in each piping system; exclude plumbing fixture valves and shut off valves at plumbing equipment. C. Valve Chart: Provide a valve chart in the operation and maintenance manual indicating the following: 1. Valve tag number. 2. Valve type: ball valve, butterfly valve, gate valve, etc. 3. System service: plumbing hot water, heating supply, chilled water supply, etc. 4. Use: isolation, balancing, shut-off, drain, etc. 5. Manufacturer. D. Provide ductwork labels at the following locations. 1. At each piece of equipment connected by ductwork. 2. Provide at 10 foot intervals in mechanical rooms. 3. Provide at 50 foot intervals above accessible ceilings and at changes in direction. E. Provide mechanical equipment identification on or near each major item of mechanical equipment as herein specified. Provide signs that are engraved plastic laminate. Provide signs for the following general categories: 1. Main control and operating valves including safety devices and gas outlets. END OF SECTION 220553 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1 SECTION 220719 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Insulate all new plumbing piping on the project as specified in this section. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 220000. Include shop drawings for each type of insulation to be used on the project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide all covering and insulation materials used on this project that have the manufacturer's name on the container. All materials must be dry and in good condition. B. Provide all materials with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedures ASTM 84, NFPA 255 and U.L. 723 not to exceed 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Accepted insulation materials are Certainteed or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide fiberglass pipe insulation that is Certainteed 500° fiberglass pipe insulation with factory applied all-service jacket. Provide insulation rated for use between -20°F and 500°F. Furnish the all service jacket with self sealing lap. Provice thermal conductivity at or below 0.22 BTU-in/hr,SF,°F at 100°F mean temperature. Seal all end joints with 3" wide butt strips of materials identical to pipe covering jackets. B. Insulate ADA lavatory and sink P-trap drain and exposed supply pipes with fully molded, Truebro, Handi, Lav-Guard Insulation kit, light gray color. Provide insulation that is self extinguishing. Furnish nylon type fasteners with kit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulation Thickness: 1. Insulate the following systems with the following thickness of fiberglass insulation: 1/2" to 1" 1-1/2 to 3" 4" and Larger a. Domestic Hot Water 1" 1" 1" (including tempered hot water and recirculated hot water) b. Domestic Cold Water 1/2" 1/2" 1" c. Storm Drain Pipe 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 2 B. Installation 1. Insulate plumbing vents within six lineal feet of the roof outlet with 1" thick fiberglass insulation. 2. Install all pipe insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Seal all longitudinal joints with factory applied self-sealing laps. Seal all end joints with 3" wide butt strips of materials identical to pipe covering jackets, using adhesive such as Benjamin Foster 30-35 or self-sealing jacket. No stapling are permitted on any vapor barrier jackets. Do not perform any vapor barrier work or self-sealing laps or lap work when temperatures are below 40°F. 3. Insulate all fittings, valves, flanges and strainers with mitered segments of pipe insulation wired in place. Coat each fitting with two 1/8" coats of an approved vapor barrier mastic such as Benjamin Foster 30-35. Reinforce each fitting by wrapping with glass fabric cloth extending 2" onto adjacent pipes and finish with an additional coating of mastic worked into mesh of cloth to provide a smooth finish. Cover with 6 ounce canvas cover in all exposed areas. At the contractors option, premolded plastic fitting covers may be used if taped and sealed. A continuous vapor barrier must be maintained on all cold piping systems. Use corner beads on all square corners. 4. Maintain a continuous vapor barrier on all domestic cold water, chilled water and rain water piping systems. Install all pipe hangers on these systems outside the insulation with insulation shields installed to protect the insulation. Repair any damage to the vapor barrier with an approved vapor barrier mastic. 5. Additionally cover all fiberglass insulation exposed to outdoor weather conditions with a 20 mil PVC jacket sealed water tight. 6. Install insulation shields between insulation and pipe hangers. Provide shields that are of sufficient size to prevent damage to the insulation. 7. Insulate the exposed water pipes and exposed drain on all lavatories. END OF SECTION 220719 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 221010 - 1 SECTION 221010 – PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings and required to connect fixtures and equipment, pipe and fittings of type and material for the various services as noted below. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 220000. B. Indicate ASTM or ANSI ratings, pipe and fitting weights, pressure and temperature classifications and joining methods for all types of piping used in the project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit certification that each welder has passed A.W.S. qualification tests for the welding process involved and that certification is current. Provide all welding that is in compliance with the ASME “Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code”, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications”. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series “Code for Pressure Piping”. B. Provide a lead-free domestic water system including all equipment. piping, valves, fittings, joint materials and all other components in contact with domestic water. Lead- free is determined by the current codes and standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Provide Type L, ASTM B88, hard drawn copper tubing for domestic cold and hot water in building above grade. Provide wrought copper solder type fittings, ANSI B16.22. Provide joints for pipe and fittings that are made with non-corrosive flux and 95-5 solder. Provide the maximum lead content of the flux and solder of 0.2% by volume. B. Provide Type K, ASTM B88, soft drawn copper tubing for domestic cold water and hot water in building below grade. Provide fittings that are McDonald copper flare fittings or equal. C. Provide is Type K, ASTM B88, soft drawn copper tubing for domestic cold water from the city main to the water meter. Provide fittings that are McDonald copper flare fittings or equal. D. At contractor option, Pro-press mechanical fittings are acceptable in place of solder fittings. 2.2 SANITARY SEWER, STORM SEWER AND VENT PIPE A. For sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and vent piping in building below floor to 5’ outside building, provide schedule 40 PVC plastic Type DWV pipe and fittings. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Schedule 40 will conform to ASTM D 1785 & 2665. Provide joints that are primer & solvent hub type. PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 221010 - 2 B. For sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and vent piping in building above floor, provide schedule 40 PVC plastic Type DWV pipe and fittings. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Schedule 40 will conform to ASTM D 1785 & 2665. Provide primer & solvent hub type joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide all pipes are round and straight, of required size. Do cutting with proper tools and ream pipes to full size after cutting. B. Properly enclose, support, guide, anchor, sway brace, connect, test, clean and flush out piping and properly insulate and protect where required. C. Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are nominal pipe internal sizes and not outside diameters unless noted otherwise. D. Run pipes substantially as indicated on the drawings. However, the architect/engineer reserves the right to require this Contractor to make minor changes in pipe locations where conflicts occur with other trades. Provide for such changes without extra cost to the Owner. E. Install piping with ample provisions for expansion and contraction to prevent injury to the same and to the building construction. Make such provision by means of piping offsets, changes in direction, expansion loops and/or suitable expansion joints. Provide suitable anchors and guides to permit proper deflection and compression of offset loops and expansion joints. Do not use expansion joints in lieu of offsets, changes in direction or loops, except where specified and/or indicated on the drawings or where otherwise obviously necessary. F. Run all pipes with proper grade to provide for easy draining and in group runs where applicable and in a neat and orderly manner, to the satisfaction of architect/engineer. Install lines required to be enclosed in ceiling, chaseways or spaces to permit such enclosure as intended. Carefully lay out all pipe runs and schedule to avoid unnecessary interferences with other work. G. Provide minimum grade for horizontal drainage piping is 1/4 inch per foot for 3 inch diameter piping or less, 1/8 inch per foot for 4 inch and larger piping. Install all roof drain piping at 1/8 inch per foot. H. Install dielectric unions at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous piping and joints between dissimilar metals. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated, which effectively isolate piping (electric conductance), prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. I. At all fixture connections where nipples are necessary between copper tubing and fixtures, provide such nipples that are standard weight full iron size chrome plated brass pipe nipples with suitable brass or copper adapters. Steel or iron nipples will not be permitted in any location in copper lines where connections are made to brass fixtures valves or trim. J. Do not use Weld-O-Let Fittings. PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 221010 - 3 K. Install underground gas piping a minimum of 30” below grade. Provide tracer wire with all below grade gas piping. L. Paint exposed portions of exterior gas piping between the meter and the building with one coat of primer and two coats of exterior grade paint. 3.2 JOINTS A. Threaded Joints: Cut piping straight and square, ream, thread and work into place without springing. Use prepared pipe thread lubricant on outside threads only. B. Flanged Joints: When bolting flanged joints, take care to insure that there is no restraint on opposite end of pipe or fittings which would prevent uniform gasket compression or cause unnecessary stress in flanges. Keep one flange free to move in any direction while flange bolts are being tightened. Tighten bolts gradually and at a uniform rate, so that gasket compression is uniform over entire area of gasket. C. Welded Joints: Make welds by electric arc welding process in accord with ANSI B31.1. Mill or machine bevel pipe, except that in field limited amount of pipe may be flame beveled. Pipe with a wall thickness of 3/16 IN or less need not be beveled but may be welded by melting down into, and building up over abutting ends. Separate abutting ends of joints before welding to permit complete fusion to bottom without overlapping. Tack in two or more points to maintain alignment, and fusion weld. Weld continuously around pipe. Make all welds of sound weld metal, thoroughly fused into ends of pipe, and to bottom of “V”. Build in excess of pipe wall to give reinforcement of one fourth pipe wall thickness. Weld metal will present a gradual increase in thickness from surface of pipe to center of weld. Provide minimum weld width of two and one half times thickness of pipe wall. Use welding elbows at all turns in welded lines except where pipe bends are indicated or are required for flexibility. Mitered ells will not be permitted. Make all welded fittings of same material with same pressure and temperature rating as pipe with which they are used. Make flanged connections to control valves, pump suction, and specialties with ANSI standard welding neck flanges. All other flange connections may be made with slip-on flanges provided they are seal welded on inside. Fuse all fillet welds for flanges or fittings into pipe and plate for minimum distance of 1-1/2 times pipe wall thickness and depth of weld of 1-1/4 times pipe wall thickness. Provide eccentric reducers with flat side on top of pipe to prevent entrapment of air in the piping system. D. Weld-o-lets and thread-o-lets: Scribe and cut openings in main pipes for welded branches accurately taking care to remove all of plug and cuttings from main pipe. Full weld fillet welds for full depth of fillet, with additional beads to form well rounded connection as recommended by weld-o-let manufacturer. Partially filled fillets not acceptable. Cut all openings into pipe for welded connections accurately to give carefully matched intersections. E. High temperature soldered joints: Take care to avoid annealing of pipe material. Copper potable water piping will have soldered or brazed joints. Clean jointing surfaces thoroughly by hand. Apply flux immediately after cleaning. Do not rely on flux for actual cleaning. Fill all voids with solder as flux leaves to insure a strong joint. Select flux compatible with type joint being made. Provide all joints that comply with local codes and ordinances and are installed per the Copper Development Association recommendations. F. PVC Pipe: Provide solvent welded joints in all plastic piping according to instructions furnished by the pipe manufacturer. Do not install plastic pipe if it is not completely dry, PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 221010 - 4 if the ambient temperature is below 40°F or under direct exposure to the sun in temperatures above 90°F. Do not test plastic pipe with air or other compressible gases which could rupture the pipe and cause an injury. Cut pipe evenly, completely deburr and bevel. Clean pipe joint area, prime, cure, cement, and allow 48 hours of drying time before applying any appreciable internal or external pressure. 3.3 TESTS A. Test piping as outlined in Section 220000. END OF SECTION 221010 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 224200 - 1 SECTION 224200 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General, Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract and the General Requirements (Division 1) are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Section 220000, General Requirements in its entirety, including references to the General Construction Specifications, are hereby adopted and made part of these Specifications. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all materials, fixtures and equipment necessary to install complete sanitary sewer systems and potable hot and cold water systems, as described herein and/or shown on the drawings. This includes all piping, wiring and materials obviously necessary for complete systems though not specifically mentioned or shown. 1.3 MANUFACTURERS AND SELECTION A. Provide models, sizes and capacities as listed on the plumbing schedule on the plans. Pre-approved manufacturers are listed below. Provide all other plumbing fixtures as listed in the schedule or approved equal via the prior approval process. FIXTURE APPROVED MANUFACTURER Water Closets, Urinals, Lavatories: Kohler American Standard Eljer Stainless Steel Sinks: Just Elkay Kohler Faucets: Delta Moen Chicago Faucet T&S Brass Flush Valves: Sloan Zurn Drainage Specialties: Wade JR Smith Watts Drainage Mi Fab Wall Hydrants/Hose Bibbs: Woodford Zurn PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 224200 - 2 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings on all plumbing fixtures and equipment. Clearly label each item as designated on the plans. Include unit dimensions and construction specifications on the drawings. Clearly designate all features specified on the shop drawings. 1.5 STANDARDS A. Provide all fixtures and faucets designated "ADA" in compliance with ANSI standard 117.1 and the Americans with Disibilities Act (ADA), buildings and facilities providing accessibility and usability for physically handicapped people. B. Provide all fixtures and accessories to meet the latest requriedments of the latest adopted edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code. C. Provide lavatory and shower valves with temperature limit stops. 1.6 LEAD FREE DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS A. Provide a lead-free domestic water system including all equipment. piping, valves, fittings, joint materials and all other components in contact with domestic water. Lead- free is determined by the current codes and standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. DOMESTIC EXPANSION TANKS 1. Provide bladder type with model, size and mounting as listed in the schedule. Provide NSF rated tanks and rated for domestic water use. Provide tanks ASME rated at 150 psig. Provide tanks manufactured by Amtrol, Taco, Armstrong or Bell and Gosset. B. VENTS THROUGH ROOF (VTR) 1. Extend vent stacks from sewer, soil, waste and drain pipes at least 12 inches above the roof. The minimum size of any vent passing through roof must be 4 inches. C. CLEANOUTS (CO) 1. Furnish and intall full size brass screw cleanout plugs at the bottom of all soil, waste and storm sewer stacks and at all points where shown on drawings, and where necessary to permit the entire drainage system to be rodded out easily. Provide cleanouts adjacent to the drains for floor drains located in branch lines on grade. 2. Provide JR SMITH 4020 series cast iron universal floor cleanout with inside caulk ferrule, brass plug, adjustable housing and round nickel brass secured frame and scoriated tractor cover. Provide the cover to accept the floor covering in the location being installed, i.e., synthetic covering, composition tile, terrazzo, etc. Provide carpet markers where needed. Provide all cleanouts installed in floors PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 224200 - 3 with waterproof membranes with clamping devices. Install cleanouts installed above finished grade with a seepage pan of 4 lb. sheet lead at least 3 feet square. 3. Provide JR SMITH 4420 wall cleanouts with brass plug and round stainless steel secured access cover. D. FLOOR DRAINS (FD) 1. Furnish and install floor drains where shown on the drawings and as specified. Provide all floor drains installed in floors with waterproof membranes with flashing clamps. Provide all floor drains installed above the finished grade with a seepage pan of 4 lb. sheet lead at least 3 feet square. 2. Provide floor drains with a 5" diameter polished nickel bronze strainer having a minimum of six square inches free area and flashing clamps. Furnish and install a deep seal trap. E. FLOOR SINKS (FS) 1. Furnish and install floor sinks where shown on the drawings and as specified. 2. Provide cast iron body with grate, dome strainer, white acid resiting porcelain enamel interior and top. F. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER (EWC - 1) 1. Provide electric water cooler as listed in the schedule. Provide two-in-one unit with one basin at standard height and one at wheelchair height. Provide with bottle filler. Water system must be lead free with front push bars. Provide unit with recessed refrigeration system which serves both units, removable front grille and steel mounting box. Provide front panel and basins of stainless steel construction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM OF PLUMBING A. Install the continuous waste and vent method of plumbing. Install hot, tempered and cold water lines where shown. Conceal all water piping in finished areas in joist spaces, above ceilings, and in walls. B. Place pipes run overhead as close to the ceiling as possible, to maintain proper headroom and to present a neat appearance, all consistent with the pitching of pipes for drainage of the systems. C. Install the plumbing work in strict accordance with the best plumbing practice, and in accordance with all applicable local, state and national plumbing regulations. 3.2 WASTE, VENT AND WATER CONNECTIONS A. Provide chrome-plated brass pipe for all exposed flush, waste and supply pipes at the fixtures, iron pipe size. No steel `nipples will be allowed. Provide heavy cast brass chromium plated components for faucets, stop valves, pop-up wastes, traps, flush valves etc. Water lines to all individual fixtures, where exposed, must be equipped with high grade, loose key chromium plated brass stop valves model B-1315 T&S BRASS or PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 224200 - 4 equal. Install all chrome plate over a nickel plated base. Provide backing at wall to support fixtures. Provide all water closets with all bolt caps with retainer clips. Match groups of fixtures. Furnish all fixtures which do not have integral traps with 17 gauge chromium plated brass p-traps with cleanouts. B. Provide waste, vent and water supply piping to plumbing fixtures which is not shown on the drawings and size in accordance with the plumbing schedule on the plans. Vent all plumbing fixtures, wastes, and drains in accordance with all applicable Local, State and National Plumbing Regulations. C. SHOCK ABSORBERS: Install piping with proper safeguards to prevent water hammer. This will be done by providing air cushions in the piping at each plumbing fixture. Air cushion must be same size as piping on which installed, 16" long, with removable cap wherever accessible. D. Mount controls for flush valves on the wide side of toilet areas on all handicapped water closets. E. Provide all floor sinks and floor drains with trap primer taps and JR Smith 2699, Watts A200 or PPP P1-500 trap primer valves. Connect valve to nearest water supply or supply stop. Install valve in an accessible location. 3.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Install all fixtures, faucets and equipment solid and anchored to building structures. Tighten and fasten all loose components. B. Provide caulk sealant at all plumbing fixtures. Caulk between wall and fixtures and between floor and fixtures. C. Provide escutcheons at all plumbing penetrations. This includes below fixtures, in cabinets, etc. END OF SECTION 224200 BUILDING MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 1 SECTION 230000 - BUILDING MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL SUPPLEMENTARY AND OTHER CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. The general, supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract and the General Requirements (Division 1) are hereby made a part of this section. 1.2 INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The plans and specifications contemplate the complete installation of the system described so that at the conclusion of the construction, the systems will be turned over to the owner complete and ready for safe, efficient operation. The plans and specifications cannot deal individually with the many minute items which may be required by the nature of the systems. Furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type, which while not mentioned directly herein, are obviously essential to the installation and operation of the system and which are normally furnished on quality installations of this type. B. In receiving bids, it will be assumed that each bidder has made a thorough inspection of the conditions and is familiar with all conditions affecting the extent or cost of this work. Claims for extra payments as a result of failure to examine the conditions prior to submitting the bid will not be allowed. C. The drawings are partly diagramatic and do not necessarily show the exact locations of plumbing and piping runs unless specifically dimensioned. Install piping to avoid other trades and install in a compact and neat manner to maximize the available space. 1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND PERMITS A. Comply with all state and local codes and ordinances applying to the work specified herein. Attention is directed in particular to the UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE, INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE, INTERNATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE, INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE AND/OR ANY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, and local regulations concerning the specified plumbing, heating and cooling equipment. B. Make application for, obtain and pay for all required permits and certificates of inspection for the work. C. In the event of conflict between this specification and a governing code or ordinance, provide work to meet the higher standard. Provide all work to meet any local codes that affect work on the project. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes required by local regulations. 1.4 INSPECTION A. Request regular inspections of duly authorized inspectors as required by codes and ordinances. 1.5 SUBSTITUTING BUILDING MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 2 A. Provide all equipment, fixtures, materials and products exactly as listed in the project plans, schedues and specifications. The Manufacturer listed in the project equipment schedules, drawings and specifications is the basis of design for the project. “Approved Equal” manufacturers listed in the drawings and specifications are allowed to bid only if the manufacturer can provide exactly equal equipment, fixtures, materials and products as listed in the basis of design schedules, drawings and specifications, regardless of any prior approval listing. Any variation in the performance, appearance, color, shape, size, weight, electrical characteristics, etc. is subject to rejection during shop drawing review. The product supplier and installing contractor are responsible for any and all changes to the project and associated costs for any equipment, fixtures, materials and products provided that do not meet the project design requirements. B. Submit proposals to contractor for substitution of material and equipment listed on the drawings and/or these specifications after the architect/engineer's approval has been obtained. For such proposals, provide materials and equipment that conform in type, function, quality of material and assembly and meet the requirements indicated in drawings and specifications. SUBMIT REQUESTS FOR APPROVAL TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AT LEAST 10 DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID DATE. Include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other information needed for an evaluation. Include a statement setting forth any changes in any other equipment or other work that incorporation of the substitute would require. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the proposer. If these proposed substitutions are considered as acceptable equals for quotations and use, approval will be issued in an addendum. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prior to the placing of orders for any equipment, submit to the engineer for approval a complete schedule of mechanical equipment and fixtures to be installed. PDF versions are required for review. Include in the schedule catalogs, cuts, diagrams, shop drawings, performance curves or any other descriptive material necessary to fully describe the equipment proposed and its operating characteristics. In the schedules, list the operating conditions of the equipment at the conditions listed on the schedules. B. Submit all shop drawings and sign, "approve" and initial prior to submittal to the engineer. The engineer will check the shop drawings to aid in interpreting the plans and specifications, and in so doing will assume that the shop drawings conform to all specified requirements set forth in this specification. The approval of the shop drawings by the engineer does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of complying with all elements of the specification. C. Make the determination of quantities of material and equipment required based on the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specification are completed as an aid to the contractor, but where discrepancies arise, provide the proper number to complete this work. 1.7 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS A. Coordinate all work with the asbestos abatement contractor for this project. Prior to the start of work review all asbestos reports or sample analysis, that the Owner has had completed. Do not cut into or in any other way disturb existing materials which contain asbestos. Asbestos abatement is not within the scope of Division 23 work. If a material BUILDING MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 3 that has not been tested for asbestos must be disturbed, make a request in writing to the Owner that the material be tested for asbestos prior to the start of work. B. Provide materials and equipment which do not contain asbestos. At the completion of the project, certify in writing that the materials and equipment installed do not contain asbestos. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS. A. Provide 3M CP25 caulk for fire barrier caulking system. Provide fire barrier caulk that is UL classified and Factory Mutual System approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK A. Examine all the drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of his work. General and electrical wiring contract drawings will be made available to this Contractor. SHOULD DISCREPANCIES AFFECTING THE WORK BE FOUND, IMMEDIATELY REPORT SAME TO THE ENGINEER FOR INSTRUCTIONS. Provide for and cover the expense of subsequent changes made necessary by neglecting to discover and report such discrepancies, under the direction of the Engineer. B. “Furnish”, “Provide”, and/or “Install” are all considered as a requirement to both furnish the equipment and install it unless specific reference is made to the furnishing or installing of the equipment by others. C. Confer and cooperate with other Contractors on the job in the installation of the work so all work will be installed in proper relationship to the surrounding location and shape of any part to avoid conflicts. Provide for the correct size and location of any changes, slots, and openings required and do any cutting or patching made necessary by failure to make proper arrangements in this respect with no cost to the owner. D. Locate pipes essentially as shown on the drawings, but in exact locations as laid out on the job to suit actual conditions. Arrange exposed pipes as closely as practical to wall or ceiling surfaces. Indicated connections to equipment are necessarily based on equipment of a given manufacturer. If the use of "approved equal" equipment is proposed, then assume the responsibility for proper location in a manner approved by the Engineer. Make changes that are necessary for this reason without additional cost to the Owner. E. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the installation and connection of all equipment and materials furnished under this contract. In the event of conflict or discrepancy between manufacturer's instructions and the contract documents, notify the Engineer before proceeding. Do not make any equipment installation in a manner that voids the manufacturer's warranty of the equipment. 3.2 CLEANING A. Refer to section 232116 for cleaning of the heating and chilled water piping systems. BUILDING MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 4 B. Remove labels, stickers, etc., and leave the entire installation in a clean, usable condition. C. Thoroughly clean heating and cooling equipment, tanks, heat exchangers, pumps, traps, ducts, etc., and install new filters or filter media. 3.3 PAINTING A. Protect the finishes of all mechanical equipment during storage, installation and until final acceptance. “Touch up” any damage or imperfections or if extensive, repaint the entire unit as directed by the Engineer. 3.4 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATIONS A. Seal all cracks, voids, or holes for the passing of mechanical and electrical items through floors and fire rated walls, or ceilings with fire rating of 1 hour or more with a fire barrier caulk. B. Provide 3M CP 25 caulk for fire barrier caulking system. C. Install fire barrier caulking system in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maintain a fire rating of 3 hours minimum. 3.5 SLEEVES A. The Mechanical Contractor will set and maintain all sleeves. Provide sleever for any pipe passing through building construction including walls, floors, roofs or masonry partitions in accordance with the following. B. Provide all pipe sleeves through slabs, floors, masonry walls and partitions that are 1/2 inch greater in inside diameter than the external diameter of pipe passing through. Provide sleeves for insulated piping that are large enough to accommodate the insulation without harming the insulation or vapor barrier. Provide all sleeves that are fabricated from new material cut square and reamed. C. Provide sleeves in all masonry partition walls and floors. Provide sleeves that are Schedule 40 steel pipe. Provide wall sleeves that are flush with the wall surface. Extend the top of floor sleeves 1" above the floor, and the bottom of the sleeve is required to be flush with the floor. D. Protect the space between the pipe and the sleeves, through fire rated walls and floors as designated below. E. Furnish and install chrome-plated wall, floor and ceiling plates on all exposed pipes where they pass through walls, floors, or ceilings in finished areas. Provide the wall plates with set screws or spring locks for clamping to the pipe. F. Provide watertight seal at all sleeves through floors. 3.6 OPENINGS A. Provide all openings required for the passage of ductwork and mechanical equipment in the construction. Determine the correct location for all openings. BUILDING MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 5 B. Provide the inside dimensions of all openings that are 1/2 inch greater than the size of the ductwork or equipment passing through the opening. Provide openings for insulated ductwork are large enough to accommodate the insulation without harming the insulation or vapor barrier. C. Protect all openings through fire rated walls and floors as described above. D. Patch and seal all openings through all non-fire rated construction around piping or ductwork. Seal openings to match construction material or provide fire rated caulking as described in “Fire Barrier Penetrations” above. E. Seal all openings around piping and ductwork in return air plenums to prevent non- plenum rated materials from being exposed in the plenums. 3.7 EXISTING SERVICES A. Verify the exact location of all existing building services extended and/or relocated for this project. Also verify the exact location and take proper precautions to protect all services which may be encountered during construction. B. Protect, brace, and support all active services which are encountered where required for proper execution of the work and without interruption of service if possible. C. Protect all inactive services which are encountered or remove as directed by the Owner, Utility Company, or Municipal Agency having jurisdiction. D. When active services must be temporarily interrupted, make arrangements to work continuously including overtime if required, to assure that services will be interrupted only as long as actually required to complete necessary work. 3.8 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT A. Provide access to all motors, valves, dampers, controls, specialties, etc., for maintenance purposes. Provide all access doors, access panels, removable sections, etc., required for access. The General Contractor will provide access panels and doors required in the building construction where shown on the plans. Coordinate the location of the access openings relative to the mechanical equipment to assure proper access to the equipment. B. Provide all access openings required for manual motorized, fire and smoke dampers and other devices requiring access in the ductwork, plenums, housings, tanks, etc., under this portion of the contract. 3.9 PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Protect all sheaves, belts, drives, couplings, and moving parts by approved permanent guards, shields, or railings, which will be in place whenever the equipment is in operation and will be in accordance with applicable safety standards. 3.10 TESTS A. Perform tests on the systems Specified herein. BUILDING MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 6 B. Conduct all tests in the presence of the engineer and/or owner. Prior to conducting any tests or balancing of the systems, obtain and file a letter with the engineer's office if the tests are to be witnessed by the owner. Where required, perform such tests in the presence of local or state building inspection officials. Maintain reports of all tests as they are performed. Include the following information in the reports: 1. Project 2. Contractor 3. Date 4. Test performed and portion of system tested. 5. Test results 6. Name and signature of person performing test. 7. Name and signature of witness of the test. C. Upon completion of the project, submit the test reports with the operation and maintenance manuals for review by the Engineer. D. Test hot water heating and chilled water piping and prove it watertight under a hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig. The piping system is required to maintain the test pressure without loss for 2 hours. Determine loss by a drop in gauge pressure or visual leakage. Read the test pressure from a gauge location at the low elevation of the system or portion being tested. 1. Provide the same pressure test for radiant tubing and snowmelt tubing as described above for heating piping. Prior to concrete placement, fill piping with 30% propylene glycol and pressurize to 100 psi. Maintain pressure during concrete placement. E. Provide antifreeze testing by an independent testing agency for hot water systems. Provide systems with 40% by volume propylene glycol. Refill system with glycol mixture to match existing system. 3.11 ALL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER DIVISION 230000: A. At a time set by the contractor and agreed to by the owner, arrange to place equipment in operation and have available at that time, if required, representatives of the manufacturer of equipment to assist in starting equipment, to make necessary adjustments to equipment, and to prove satisfactory operation prior to turning facility over to the owner. B. Repair or replace any irregularities, faulty equipment, etc., as required prior to acceptance. C. Run operating test for 30 hour periods and submit data for approval. D. Charge all equipment with clean media and completely finish installation prior to acceptance. E. Properly balance all pumped water systems. F. Properly balance all air systems. Balance the CFM of all diffusers to within 10% of the CFM listed on the schedule. BUILDING MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 7 3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare two portfolios with two complete sets of shop drawings of the equipment used in the erection of the mechanical systems and equipment testings, cleaning and maintenance instructions, operation and maintenance manuals, list of materials for the maintenance, parts list, wiring diagrams, and name and address of authorized service organization. B. Fold information only if necessary, and bind in an 8-1/2" x 11" hard cover indexed, looseleaf binder. Use multiple binders if required to contain material. Properly identify all material with job name, date, and the names and addresses of the contractor, architect, and engineer. C. Submit the portfolios to the engineer for review of material and completeness prior to final inspection, and when approved by the engineer, turn the portfolios over to the owner at the time of the final inspection. D. Where indicated in the specification, provide the services of a factory trained representative to instruct the owner's authorized personnel in the operation, control, and maintenance of equipment. Instruct owner's personnel in the operation of all other equipment and systems. E. Include the following close-out documents in the manuals: 1. Final Test and Balance reports. 2. Valve tag chart. 3. Asbestos letter. 4. Warranty letter. 5. Equipment start-up and functional test reports. 3.13 PROJECT CLOSE OUT A. The Mechanical Contractor will arrange for an inspection of all items installed in the ceiling before the ceiling or ceiling tile is installed. Inform the engineer at least one week before the planned installation of the ceiling to arrange the inspection. If the ceiling tile is installed before the inspection, the mechanical contractor will remove all the ceiling tiles prior to the inspection. B. General: Refer to Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Maintain a daily log of operational data on mechanical equipment and systems throughout the closeout period; record hours of operation, assigned personnel, fuel consumption and similar information; submit copy to engineer. C. Record Drawings: Give special attention to the complete and accurate recording of underground conduit, piping and concealed and non-accessible work, branching arrangement and valve location of all piping systems, location of dampers and coils in duct systems, locations of control system sensors and other control devices, and work of change orders where not shown on contract documents. D. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of the project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment with the owner's operating personnel present to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as needed for proper operation. Clean and lubricate each system, and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable parts of the system. BUILDING MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 8 E. Operating Instructions: Conduct at least a full day walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel to be involved in the operation and maintenance of the mechanical equipment and systems. If more time is needed, continue instruction until the owner's personnel are familiar with the operation of the system. Explain the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the system. F. Turn-Over of Operation: At the time of substantial completion, turn over the prime responsibility for the operation of the system to the owner's personnel. However until the time of final acceptance, provide at least one full-time operating engineer, who is completely familiar with the work, to consult with and continue training the owner's personnel. G. Final Completion: The following special requirements will be provided in addition to those specified elsewhere: 1. Do not call for final completion check until the mechanical systems and equipment have been installed, adjusted, balanced, and are in full and complete satisfactory operation and the following certifications of inspection from equipment suppliers have been completed and submitted with the architect/engineer. Certifications of inspection are required for the following items of equipment: a. Cabinet Unit Heaters, Unit Heaters (Factory Rep.) 2. The certifications will consist of letters signed by Factory Trained and Authorized service engineers stating the following: a. They have inspected all their equipment on the project. b. They approve the condition of their equipment and its installation. c. They have fully checked its operation and certify that it is operating properly. d. They will note any problems, conditions or objections that could lead to future operating problems. e. Log sheets will be provided on start-up of all Condensing Units, AHU's and Terminal Units. 3. Exceptions may be permitted upon written request from the contractor listing any minor items that are uncompleted and beyond his reasonable control. Provide a full guarantee that they be completed at a named later date and the guarantee will be extended as required to provide a full warranty. H. Final Payment will not be made until the contractor has satisfactorily completed all final inspection items. I. Guarantee: Fully guarantee all equipment and work, parts and labor for one year from the date of substantial completion, unless noted otherwise. Guarantee all equipment and work and assume full responsibility to repair any equipment with no additional expense to the Owner which the manufacturer refuses to guarantee. The Owner has the right to order repairs to any equipment or work provided hereon and to charge the contractor for the same if repairs are not made during a reasonable period of time not to exceed 24 hours during an emergency or 72 hours on a non-critical item. END OF SECTION 230000 DEMOLITION 230010 - 1 SECTION 230010 - DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 The extent of demolition is shown on the drawings. 1.2 Owner will retain ownership of plumbing fixtures and mechanical equipment. 1.3 Remove all items which the owner does not wish to retain and dispose of off site. 1.4 SUBMIT PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF WORK TO ARCHITECT AND OWNER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO START WORK. INCLUDE IN SCHEDULE COORDINATION FOR SHUT-OFF CAPPING AND CONTINUATION OF UTILITIES. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Demolish in an orderly and careful manner as required to accommodate new work. Protect existing supporting structural members. 3.2 Field verify exact locations of existing services and construction prior to demolition work. Take all necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing utilities or structure. 3.3 Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required at no cost to the owner. 3.4 Cap all pipes below floor or above ceiling. Remove all excess pipes and ducts. 3.5 Carefully remove all items to be retained by owner and store as directed by the owner. 3.6 Remove from site all debris, rubbish, and all other items which the owner does not retain and dispose of off site. END OF SECTION 230010 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 1 SECTION 230523 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with Installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. SIZES: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. C. OPERATORS: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves, 6" and smaller. D. Refer to section 230553 for valve tag and valve chart requirements. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with section 230000. B. Indicate pressure and temperature classifications and joining methods for all types of valves used in the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The following valve manufacturers are approved: Nibco, Apollo, Red White, Watts or approved equal. Approved flow control valves are Autoflow, Nexus, Griswold or approved equal. 2.2 BALL VALVES A. Provide NIBCO No. T-580 threaded, S-580 solder, 125 PSI steam, 400 PSI WOG for Bronze Ball Valves. Provide valves conforming to federal specification WW-V-35 CLASS A, Type II. Furnish with extended lever handle. 2.3 FLOW CONTROL VALVES A. Provide Flow Design Incorporated combination flow control-ball valve with temperature/pressure test port for Flow Control Valves. Butterfly valve may be used with 3" and larger control valves. Control valves will provide rated flow for a pressure differential from 2 PSI to 32 PSI. The control valve will control flow within 5% of the factory setting. Provide Hanging Metal I.D. Tag with model, flow setting and location. Furnish with extended valve handles and extended pete's plugs to accommodate up to 2" insulation. Nexus and Griswold are approved equal. 2.1 MANUAL BALANCING VALVES A. Provide Armstrong, Victaulic TA, Bell and Gossett or Taco circuit setter valves. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 2 1. Provide all valves constructed of bronze body-brass ball type with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. 2. Provide with differential pressure read-out ports across valve seat area. Provide read-out ports fitted with internal EPT inserts and check valves. Provide 1/4" NPT tapped drain/purge port. 3. Provide with memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance position. 4. Provide with calibrated name plates to assure specific valve settings. 5. Provide valves designed for positive shut-off. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. B. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install valve drains with hose-end adapter for each valve that must be installed with stem below horizontal plane. C. Install extended-stem valves, where insulation is indicated, arranged in proper manner to receive insulation. 3.2 SELECTION B. Select and install valves with the following ends or types of pipe-tube connections: 1. Tube Size 2" and Smaller: Soldered joint valves. 2. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: Threaded valves. END OF SECTION 230523 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1 SECTION 230529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide pipe hangers that adequately support the piping system. Install near or at changes in piping direction and at concentrated loads. Install to provide vertical adjustment to maintain pitch required for proper drainage. Install to allow for expansion and contraction of the piping. B. Construct and install duct hangers in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. C. Do not attach duct, piping or equipment hangers to wood sub-flooring, pan decks or wood roof decking. Attach hangers to the concrete floor structure or structural steel construction with joist or beam clamps. 1.2 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS A. Provide and install duct, piping and equipment supports to meet all seismic requirements as required in the International Building Code and American Society of Civil Engineer (ASCE), ASCE-7, latest editions. B. Each manufacturer of seismic system components will submit a certificate of compliance for review and acceptance by the engineer and/or the authority having jurisdiction. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 230000. B. Indicate pipe hangers to be used for each size and type of pipe. C. Indicate seismic supports to be used for each type of pipe, duct or equipment on the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEISMIC SUPPORTS A. Provide seismic supports for piping, ductwork and equipment as manufactured by Amber Booth, Mason Industries, or approved equal. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS A. Provide hangers that are constructed of malleable or wrought iron, and hangers supporting copper pipe that are copper plated. Hangers for pipe 3 inches and smaller must be adjustable split ring, ELCEN FIG. 89, Galv. and ELCEN FIG. 389 copper plated. For piping above 3 inches, hangers must be adjustable, Clevis type, ELCEN FIG. 12. B. Support rod loading: Provide total hanger rod load (including piping, insulation, and medium) that does not exceed following limits: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 2 C. Nominal Rod Diameter Max. Load 3/8 IN 600 LB 1/2 IN 1100 LB 5/8 IN 1800 LB 3/4 IN 2700 LB 7/8 IN 3700 LB 1 IN 4900 LB 2.3 ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. Provide roof curbs as specified in the equipment sections for roof top units, roof mounted fans and other similar equipment. Anchor the curbs to the roof and anchor the equipment to the curbs. 2.4 SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT A. Provide threaded rod supports at each corner and additional support points. Provide vibration isolation as specified for each piece of equipment. Provide seismic support cables at each corner hanger and attach to the structure. Provide rod stiffeners for rods longer that 12”. 2.5 CONCRETE ANCHORS A. Provide Hilti (or approved equal) concrete inserts installed per the manufacturers recommendations. Coordinate locations of pipe support anchors. 2.6 CONCRETE PAD CONSTRUCTION A. Provide four inch thick indoor equipment bases with re-bar twelve inches on centers both ways. Provide six inch thick outdoor bases with re-bar twelve inches on centers both ways. B. Provide wedge anchors to attach the indoor pads to the concrete floors. Provide anchors in the pads to match the equipment support requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Where groups of three or more pipes occur, they may be supported with trapeze hangers using two hangers as specified with a capped pipe cross member. B. Do not attach pipe hangers to the roof deck. Attach hangers to the steel construction with beam clamps, beam attachment and brackets bolted to joists and beams. Hang near joist panel joints wherever possible. C. Provide pipe hangers for insulated piping that are large enough to encompass the insulation, using a metal shield so the vapor barrier jacket will not be broken. See Section 230713, Duct Insulation. D. Hanging from one pipe to another is prohibited. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 3 E. Install pipe hangers with the following spacing: 1. HORIZONTAL STEEL PIPE: Pipe Size Maximum Spacing Up to 1-1/4" 8 feet 1-1/2" to 3" 10 feet 4" to 6" 12 feet 2. HORIZONTAL COPPER PIPE/TUBE: Pipe Size Maximum Spacing 1/2" to 3/4" 5 feet 1" 6 feet 1-1/4" 7 feet 1-1/2" to 2" 8 feet 3. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe at five foot intervals except where 10 ft. lengths of pipe are used, 10 ft. intervals may be used. 4. Support horizontal and vertical plastic pipe 4'-0" on center. 5. Support vertical piping except plastic at each floor. END OF SECTION 230529 ANTIFREEZE 230540 - 1 SECTION 230540 - ANTIFREEZE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. After the new sections of hydronic system has been purged and cleaned, add antifreeze to the system. Antifreeze to match the existing system. B. Include in the maintenance manuals the quantity of propylene glycol that was added to each system to bring the systems to the specified percentages. C. Refer to section 232116 for hydronic piping testing and cleaning. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 230000. B. Indicate freeze point, pH and reserve alkalinity of the glycol. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Match the existing glycol. A minimum basis of design is as follows. Provide PROPYLENE GLYCOL that is DOW DOWFROST or approved equal. Provide product that is designed for use where there is a possibility of contact with potable water supplies. Provide glycol with all ingredients thatare recognized as safe and are listed on the U.S. Federal Register. Provide propylene glycol that is inhibited to protect against corrosion. B. If the boiler heat exchanger or other internal boiler components provided for the project are constructed of aluminum, provide glycol that is certified compatible for use in aluminum heat exchangers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ANTIFREEZE INSTALLATION A. HOT WATER LOOP: Stop hot water circulating pump and close the pump isolation valves. Connect a handpump to the antifreeze fill valve, open the antifreeze fill valve, open the drain valve and pump 40 percent by volume of propylene glycol into the heating system. 3.2 TESTING A. Hire an independent, certified testing agency to test the propylene glycol concentration and the pH of the solution in the hot and chilled water systems. The testing agency will furnish a certified report showing the solutions have the proper concentration of propylene glycol and the proper pH. END OF SECTION 230540 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1 SECTION 230553 – IDENIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide identification for all piping, ductwork and mechanical equipment as specified in this section. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 230000. Provide shop drawings indicating the materials used, colors and lettering for all piping and equipment labels. Furnish a complete list of equipment labels to be furnished for the project. 1.3 STANDARDS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field and viewing angles of identification devices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Approved manufacturers are Allen Systems, W. H. Bradley, Industrial Safety Supply or Seaton Name Plate. 2.2 PIPE MARKERS A. PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS; Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre- printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, color coded pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. B. PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS; Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6"(including insulation), provide full band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location fastened by one of the following methods. 1. Snap on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 4. Taped to pipe or insulation with color coded plastic adhesive tape at least 2" wide with a full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 4". D. Large Pipes: For pipe diameters 6" and larger (including insulation), provide either full- band or strip type pipe markers, no narrower than 3 times letter height, and of required length fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 2. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 2" wide with a full circle at both ends of pipe marker. The tape must be lapped 4" at both ends. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 2 3. Strapped-to-pipe or insulation application of semi-rigid type with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. E. Provide lettering of the manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes the piping system in each instance, or as selected by the engineer in cases of variance with names as shown or specified. F. Provide with arrows on each pipe marker indicating direction of flow, either integrally with the piping system service lettering or as a separate unit of plastic. G. Provide plastic tape of the manufacturer's standard color coded pressure sensitive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick. Provide tape for pipe with outside diameters (including insulation) less than 6", 1-1/2" wide. Provide tape for larger pipes, 2-1/2" wide. 2.3 VALVE TAGS A. Provide brass valve tags that are 18 gauge with stamp engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high. Tags will be 1-1/2" high. Fill the tag engraving with black enamel. Provide valve tag fasteners that are solid brass chain or solid brass S-hooks manufactured specifically for the connection of tags. Furnish flow control valves with brass tags listing equipment tag and rating. 2.4 DUCTWORK LABELS A. Provide ductwork labels for all ductwork exposed in mechanical rooms. In addition provide labels on trunk ductwork located above accessible ceilings. Provide painted stencils or pressure sensitive vinyl tape, not less that 3 mils thick, 1-1/2” wide. Provide airflow direction labels at each label indicating the direction of airflow at that point in the duct system. 2.5 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Provide engraved plastic laminate signs that are constructed of engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with Fed. Spec. L-P-3387 in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with the engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. Provide engraving that exposes a contrasting inner layer. The thickness will be 1/16" for units up to 8" max. dimension 1/8" for larger units. Fasteners will be self tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. B. Provide plastic equipment markers that are manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. Conform to the following color code. 1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Yellow/Green: Common heating and cooling equipment components. 4. Blue: Equipment which does not meet any of the above criteria. 5. For hazardous equipment use colors and designs recommended by ANSI 13.1. C. Provide nomenclature matching the terminology on the schedules as closely as possible and includes the following: 1. Name and plan number. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 3 2. Equipment service. 3. Design capacity. 4. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, rpm etc. D. Provide markers that are approximately 2-1/2" x 4" for control devices, dampers and valves; and 4-1/2" by 6" for equipment. E. Lettering and Graphics will coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment. Where multiple systems of the same generic name are shown and specified, provide individual system number as well as service. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces requiring insulation, painting or other covering, install the identification after completion of the painting and insulating. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install pipe markers on each system including arrows to indicate the direction of flow. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces, plenums and exterior locations. 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units. 3. Where pipes pass through walls floors or ceilings. 4. Near major items and other points of origination and termination. 5. Spaced intermediately along pipe runs at a maximum distance of 50', reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. 6. On piping above lay-in ceilings. B. Provide valve tags on all valves, cocks and control devices in each piping system; exclude plumbing fixture valves and shut off valves at plumbing equipment. C. Valve Chart: Provide a valve chart in the operation and maintenance manual indicating the following: 1. Valve tag number. 2. Valve type: ball valve, butterfly valve, gate valve, etc. 3. System service: plumbing hot water, heating supply, chilled water supply, etc. 4. Use: isolation, balancing, shut-off, drain, etc. 5. Manufacturer. D. Provide ductwork labels at the following locations. 1. At each piece of equipment connected by ductwork. 2. Provide at 10 foot intervals in mechanical rooms. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 4 3. Provide at 50 foot intervals above accessible ceilings and at changes in direction. E. Provide mechanical equipment identification on or near each major item of mechanical equipment as herein specified. Provide signs that are engraved plastic laminate. Provide signs for the following general categories: 1. Cabinet Unit Heaters (Locate Inside Cabinet) 2. Reheat Coils 3. Exhaust, Supply and Return Fans 4. Filter Banks END OF SECTION 230553 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 1 SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The mechanical contractor will procure the services of an independent air balance and testing agency, approved by the engineer, which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems, to balance, adjust, and test air moving equipment and air distribution or exhausting systems as herein specified. All instruments used by this agency must be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. If requested, conduct the tests in the presence of the mechanical engineer responsible for the project and/or his representative. 1.2 AGENCY QUALIFICATIONS A. The testing agency is required to meet the following qualification requirements. 1. Specialize in the balancing and testing of HVAC systems. 2. Certified by NEBB or AABC. 3. An office within 300 miles of the site. 4. Provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and scope. B. Provide within fifteen days after receipt of contract, the name and qualifications of the test and balance agency for approval by the engineer. 1.3 WORK SEQUENCE A. Provide balance and testing work only after the HVAC system has been completed and is in full working order. Do not perform any water system or pump tests until the piping system has been cleaned and the correct amount of propylene glycol has been added to the system. B. The mechanical contractor will put all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment into operation and continue operation of the same during each working day of testing and balancing. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide anextended warranty of 90 days, after completion of the test and balance work, during which time the Engineer at his discretion may request a recheck, or resetting of any outlet, supply air fan, or exhaust fan as listed in test report. The agency will provide technicians to assist the engineer in making any tests he may require during this period of time. 1.5 REPORTS A. After completing the testing and balancing, compile the test data, and submit four (4) copies of the complete test data to the contractor for forwarding to the owner, architect and engineer for evaluation and approval. B. Insert all information on a sheet listing all items required herein and be included in complete test and balance report. Neatly type all sheets. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING PROCEDURES A. Testing Procedure - Phase One 1. Perform the following tests and balance air systems in accordance with the following requirements: a. Test and adjust fan RPM to design requirements. b. Test and record motor full load amperes. c. Make Pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at fans. d. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. e. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air. f. Test and record entering air temperatures. g. Test and record leaving air temperatures. h. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design CFM. i. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM, supply and return. j. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design requirements. k. Identify each grille, diffuser, and register as to location and area. l. Identify and list size, type, and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers and all tested equipment. Use manufacturer's ratings on all equipment to make required calculations. m. Include in readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers required FPM velocity and test resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustments. n. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated, and/or noted. Testing agency will check all controls for proper calibrations and list all controls requiring adjustment by control installers. o. Adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts in all areas. p. Test and adjust each fume hood to within 10% of the design CFM. Record velocity and CFM for each fume hood. Perform tests at four representative sash positions from fully open to fully closed. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 3 q. As a part of the work of this contract, the mechanical contractor will make any changes in the pulley, belts, and dampers and will install additional dampers required for correct balance as recommended by air balance agency, at no additional cost to the owner. B. Testing Procedure - Phase Two 1. Prepare the water systems for balancing in the following manner: a. Open all valves to full open position. Set coil valve to full coil flow. b. Have contractor remove and clean all strainers. c. Examine water in system and determine if system has been flushed. d. Check pump rotation. e. Check expansion tanks to determine they are not air bound and the system is completely full of water. f. Check all air vents at high points of water systems and determine all are installed and operating freely. g. Set all temperature controls so all coils are calling for full heating. h. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers or chiller to design requirements. i. Complete air balance must have been accomplished before actual water balance begins. j. Do not begin water system balancing until the proper amount of propylene glycol has been put in the system. k. Repeat above procedure on chilled water systems. l. Set hot water pumps to proper gallons per minute delivery. m. Check water temperatures at inlet and outlet of heat exchanger. Reset to correct design temperature. n. Proceed to balance each hot water coil. o. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coils, mark all settings and record data. p. Repeat above procedure on chilled water system. C. Test and Balance Procedure - Phase Three 1. Upon completion of Phase 1 and 2, proceed with Phase 3 as follows: 2. When performing the tests described in this section on the reheat coils, set the entering air temperatures at design temperatures, set the hot water supply at TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 4 design temperature of 180° and set the CFM at the design Heating CFM. Open valves to full flow through the coil when performing tests described in this section. 3. After adjustments to coils are made, recheck settings at the pumps boilers and heat exchangers and readjust if required. 4. Set the boiler and chiller to design operating temperatures before testing the coil performance as indicated below. 5. Record and check the following items at each heating and cooling coil: a. CFM b. Inlet water temperatures. c. Leaving water temperatures. d. GPM e. Inlet air temperature. f. Leaving air temperature. g. Pump operating suction and discharge pressure and final TDH. h. List all mechanical specifications of pumps. i. Rated and actual running amperage of pump motor. j. Water metering device readings. k. Test glycol systems for proper freeze protection. END OF SECTION 230593 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1 SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Insulate all new rectangular supply, transfer and return duct with 1" thick duct liner. Insulate exhaust duct with 1-1/2" thick external insulation. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 230000. Include shop drawings for each type of insulation to be used on the project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide all covering and insulation materials used on this project that have the manufacturer's name on the container. All materials must be dry and in good condition. B. Provide all materials that have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedures ASTM 84, NFPA 255 and U.L. 723 not to exceed 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Accepted insulation materials are Certainteed or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Internal duct insulation is specified in Section 233100. B. Apply exterior duct wrap insulation of the type noted below where described herein. 1. Type 75 fiberglass duct wrap, 1-1/2" thick, with foil reinforced kraft jacket, minimum insulation value, R – 5. Provide 2” thick, R-8 for all attic areas. 2. Provide for all exhaust ductwork. Ductwork exposed in occupied spaces does not require insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXTERNAL FLEXIBLE DUCT INSULATION A. Wrap duct wrap insulation tightly on the ductwork with all lateral joints butted tight and longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 3". Adhere insulation with insulation adhesive. Additionally secure insulation to the bottom of rectangular ducts over 24" wide with suitable mechanical fasteners at not more than 18" O.C. On lateral joints, staple the flange on the facing on 6" centers and tape with foil-reinforced Kraft tape. On longitudinal joints, staple the overlap on 6" centers and tape with foil-reinforced Kraft tape. Also tape all pin penetrations or punctures in facing. END OF SECTION 230713 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 1 SECTION 230719 – HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Insulate all new HVAC piping on the project as specified in this section. Refer to 220719 for plumbing piping insulation and 230713 for ductwork insulation. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 230000. Include shop drawings for each type of insulation to be used on the project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide all covering and insulation materials used on this project that have the manufacturer's name on the container. All materials must be dry and in good condition. B. Provide all materials with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedures ASTM 84, NFPA 255 and U.L. 723 not to exceed 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Accepted insulation materials are Certainteed or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide fiberglass pipe insulation that is Certainteed 500° fiberglass pipe insulation with factory applied all-service jacket. Provide insulation rated for use between -20°F and 500°F. Furnish the all service jacket with self sealing lap. Provice thermal conductivity at or below 0.22 BTU-in/hr,SF,°F at 100°F mean temperature. Seal all end joints with 3" wide butt strips of materials identical to pipe covering jackets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulation Thickness: 1. Insulate the following systems with the following thickness of insulation: 1/2" to 1-1/4" 1-1/2 to 3" 4" and Larger a. Heating Hot Water 1-1/2" 2" 2" B. Installation 1. Insulate all valves, fittings, and all other hydronic specialties in the piping with Ever Green Cut ‘n Wrap insulation or approved equal. HVAC PIPING INSULATION 230719 - 2 2. Install all pipe insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Seal all longitudinal joints with factory applied self-sealing laps. Seal all end joints with 3" wide butt strips of materials identical to pipe covering jackets, using adhesive such as Benjamin Foster 30-35 or self-sealing jacket. No stapling are permitted on any vapor barrier jackets. Do not perform any vapor barrier work or self-sealing laps or lap work when temperatures are below 40°F. 3. Insulate all fittings, valves, flanges and strainers with mitered segments of pipe insulation wired in place. Coat each fitting with two 1/8" coats of an approved vapor barrier mastic such as Benjamin Foster 30-35. Reinforce each fitting by wrapping with glass fabric cloth extending 2" onto adjacent pipes and finish with an additional coating of mastic worked into mesh of cloth to provide a smooth finish. Cover with 6 ounce canvas cover in all exposed areas. At the contractors option, premolded plastic fitting covers may be used if taped and sealed. A continuous vapor barrier must be maintained on all cold piping systems. Use corner beads on all square corners. 4. Install insulation shields between insulation and pipe hangers. Provide shields that are of sufficient size to prevent damage to the insulation. END OF SECTION 230719 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 1 SECTION 230900 - TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (AUTOMATIC) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all material and equipment necessary to install controls in the existing Direct Digital Control (DDC) system. B. Provide new and relocated DDC controls consisting of all necessary Stand Alone Controllers, Application Specific Controllers, Personal Computer Interface, Room Sensors, Air Stream Sensors, Relays, Valves, Damper Operators and other accessory equipment. Provide a complete system of electrical wiring and pneumatic piping to fill the intent of the Specifications. Competent mechanics regularly employed by the supplier of the temperature control equipment will install this system. C. Connect to existing Facility Management System (FMS). The FMS must be capable of integration of the facility HVAC systems with user access to all system data either locally over a secure Intranet within the building or by remote access by a standard Web Browser over the Internet. This includes HVAC control, energy management, alarm monitoring and all trending, reporting and maintenance management functions related to normal building operations all as indicated on the drawings or elsewhere in this specification. The FMS must be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating on an open protocol communication network communicating via the internet to a host computer. The FMS will communicate to third party systems such as chillers, boilers, air handling systems, energy metering systems, other energy management systems and other building management related devices with open, interoperable communication capabilities. D. Section 230000, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including reference to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specification. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 230000. B. Include in shop drawings Bill of Materials, Schematic Diagrams, Control Instruments, Valves, Sequences of Operation, Schedules and Wiring Diagrams. C. Also include in submittal a trunk cable schematic diagram depicting the personal computer interface, control panel locations and a description of the communication type, media and protocol. D. Also include in submittal a complete point list of all connected points to the DDC system. E. Include complete performance data and manufacturer's descriptive literature for all products used on the project. F. Submit complete approved shop drawings and as-built documentation for inclusion in the mechanical contractors operation and maintenance manuals. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 2 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. The temperature control contractor is required to be a factory approved representative of an approved temperature control manufacturer. Competent mechanics regularly employed by the temperature control contractor are required to install the system. B. Pre approved companies include: 1. Core Control C. ATC contractors are required to be independent of the testing and balancing contract for this project. D. The Installer is not allowed to subcontract out the installation to another entity that is not an authorized representative of the Manufacturer and/or has not completed the Manufacturer’s certified training. E. At the time of bid, the Installer is required to have a fully staffed support office located within a 150-mile radius of the project site and must directly employ service technicians. Installer is required to be able to provide the owner with 24/7 emergency service within a reasonable time frame. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Refer to section 230000 for applicable code requirements. B. Install wiring per the latest adopted edition of the National Electric Code and per division 16000. 1.5 GUARANTEE A. Provide a one year warranty for all components, parts and assemblies against defects in material and workmanship after approved system demonstration. Expressed warranties are conditionally based on the requirement that the items covered within the guarantee are used and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Guarantee commences at time of acceptance and continues for the previously indicated duration. Individual or aggregate beneficial use means the Owner's operators are able to use the system and receive reliable information from inputs and outputs completed by the ATC Contractor. B. The following procedures will govern the guarantee period. Within thirty days after the Owner is receiving beneficial use or approved operation, ATC Contractor will initiate the guarantee period by formally transmitting to the Owner commencement notification of the period for the system(s), subsystem(s), and devices previously accepted. Guarantee notification will be formally transmitted in like manner for subsequent phases of portions thereof which remain incomplete at the time of initial notification. C. All products used in this installation must be new, currently under manufacture, and must be applied in standard off the shelf products. Spare parts must be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Extend existing DDC system that is comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, a personal computer, graphical user interface software, portable operator terminals, printers, network devices and other devices as specified herein. B. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system. Controllers that utilize proprietary or manufacturer specific communication protocols are not acceptable. C. Provide all components and controllers supplied under this contract with “peer-to-peer” communicating devices. D. Temperature Control Panels: Furnish temperature control panels of code gauge steel with locking doors for mounting all devices as shown. All electrical devices within a control panel must be factory wired. Connect all external wiring to terminal strips mounted within the panel. Provide engraved phenolic nameplates identifying all devices mounted on the face of control panels. E. Provide complete Web-based graphic interface. Update graphics at the completion of the system. 2.2 COMMUNICATION A. All control products provided for this project must comprise a BACnet internetwork. Provide communication to all control components (i.e., all types of controllers and Operator Workstations) conforms to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001, BACnet. B. Operate each BACnet device on the BACnet Data Link/Physical layer protocol specified for that device as defined in this section. C. Provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, bridges, hubs, switches, and routers necessary for the internetwork. D. Provide all controllers with a communication port for connections with the Operator Workstations using the BACnet Data Link/ Physical layer protocol. E. Provide a device on the internetwork with a 56k-baud modem connection that will allow for a remote Operator Workstation using the BACnet PTP Data Link/ Physical layer protocol. Remote Operator Workstation via this modem will allow for communication with any and all controllers on this network as described in Paragraph F below. F. Communication services over the internetwork will result in operator interface and value passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows: 1. Connection of an Operator Workstation device to any one controller on the internetwork will allow the operator to interface with all other controllers as if that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for all controllers must be available for viewing and editing from any one controller on the internetwork. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 4 2. All database values (e.g., objects, software variables, custom program variables) of any one controller must be readable by any other controller on the internetwork. A controller will automatically perform this value passing when a reference to an object name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An operator/installer is not required to set up any communication services to perform internetwork value passing. G. Automaticaly synchronize the time clocks in all controllers daily. Automatically broadcast an operator change to the time clock in any controller to all controllers on the network. H. Provide the network with the following minimum capacity for future expansion: 1. Provide each Building Controller with routing capacity for 99 controllers. 2. Provide the Building Controller network with capacity for 1000 Building Controllers. 3. Provide the system with an overall capacity for 12,500 Building Controller, Advanced Application Controller, and Application Specific Controller input/output objects. 2.3 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software applications must reside and operate in the system controllers. Edit applications at the operator workstation B. System Security 1. Secure user access using individual security passwords and user names. 2. Passwords will restrict the user to the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager. 3. User Log On/Log Off attempts will be recorded. C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each schedule must consist of the following: 1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each of these schedules should include the capability for start, stop and optimal start. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to adjust the start and stop times for each member. 2. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator will define the length of each holiday period. D. Alarm Reporting. The operator will determine the action to be taken in the event of an alarm. Route alarms to the appropriate workstations based on time and other conditions. E. Remote Communication. Provide the system with the ability to dial out in the event of an alarm using BACnet Point-To-Point at a minimum of 56K baud. Provide receivers that are BACnet workstations. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 5 F. Maintenance Management. The system will monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages based upon user-designated run-time, starts, and/or calendar date limits. G. Sequencing. Provide application software to properly sequence the start and stop of chillers, boilers, and pumps to minimize energy usage in the facility. H. PID Control. Supply a PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action and anti-windup. The algorithm will calculate a time-varying analog value that is used to position an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, setpoint, and PID gains must be user-selectable. I. Staggered Start. This application prevents all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after a power outage. J. Energy Calculations. Provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g., kW) or flow rates (e.g., L/s [GPM]) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data. Provide an algorithm that calculates a sliding-window kW demand value. K. Anti-Short Cycling. Protect all binary output objects from short cycling. This feature will allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected. L. On/Off Control with Differential. Provide an algorithm that allows a binary output to be cycled based on a controlled variable and setpoint. The algorithm will be direct-acting or reverse-acting, and incorporate an adjustable differential. M. Run-time Totalization. Provide software to totalize run-times for all binary input objects. If required, the operator will assign a high run-time alarm. 2.4 ADVANCED APPLICATION CONTROLLERS A. General. Provide an adequate number of Advanced Application Controllers to achieve the performance specified in the Part 1 Article on “System Performance.” Each of these panels must meet the following requirements. 1. Provide the Advanced Application Controller with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 2. Advanced Application Controllers must be fully peer to peer. 3. The operating system of the Controller will manage the input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information, and allow central monitoring and alarms. 4. All equipment that requires scheduling willl be scheduled in that equipments controller. 5. Both firmware and controller database must be loadable over the network. B. Communication. 1. Each Advanced Application Controller will reside on a BACnet network using the MS/TP or Ethernet Data Link/ Physical layer protocol. 2. The controller will provide a service communication port using BACnet Data Link/ Physical layer protocol for connection to portable operator’s workstation and allow access to the entire network. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 6 C. Controller hardware must be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Mount controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions within waterproof enclosures, and they are required to be rated for operation at 0°C to 40°C [32°F to 100°F]. 2. Mount controllers used in conditioned space in dust-proof enclosures, and they are required to be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C [32°F to 120°F]. D. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. Make all wiring connections to field-removable, modular terminal strips — or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. E. Memory. The Advanced Application Controller must be non-volatile FLASH memory. F. Immunity to power and noise. Controller must be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and will perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Protect operation against electrical noise of 5 to120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m [3 ft]. 2.5 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS A. General. Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers which through hardware or firmware design are able to control a wide variety of equipment. They are fully user-programmable, and are not restricted to any one type of equipment. 1. Each ASC must be capable of standalone operation and will continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network. 2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system. 3. Both firmware and controller database must be loadable over the network 4. Application Specific Controllers must be fully peer to peer 5. ASC’s will come with an integrated housing to allow for easy mounting and protection of the circuit board. Only wiring terminals may be exposed. B. Communication 1. The controller will reside on a BACnet network using the MS/TP Data Link/ Physical layer protocol. 2. Provide each controller with a BACnet Data Link/ Physical layer compatible connection for a laptop computer or a portable operator's tool. Extend this connection to a space temperature sensor port where shown and allow access to the entire network. 3. Provide each controller with a secondary sub network for communicating sensors or I/O expansion modules C. The hardware must be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Mount controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions within waterproof enclosures, and they are required to be rated for operation at -40°C to 65°C [-40°F to 150°F] and/or suitably installed in a heated or fan cooled enclosure 2. Mount controllers used in conditioned space in dust-proof enclosures, and they are required to be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C [32°F to 120°F]. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 7 D. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. Make all wiring connections to field-removable, modular terminal strips. E. Memory. The Application Specific Controller will use non-volatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss. F. Immunity to power and noise. ASC must be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and will perform an orderly shutdown below 80%. Protect operation against electrical noise of 5-120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m [3 ft]. G. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption, and must be fused or current limiting type. H. Input/Output. ASC must support as a minimum, directly connected, a combination of analog outputs and binary outputs and universal software selectable analog or digital inputs. ASC inputs must support 0-5 VDC-voltage, 4-20mA-current, thermistor- resistance and dry contacts. ASC outputs must support 0-10 VDC-voltage, digital triac rated at 0.5 amps at 24 VAC I. System Object Capacity. The system size will be expandable to at least twice the number of input/output objects required for this project. Additional controllers (along with associated devices and wiring) will be all that is necessary to achieve this capacity requirement. The Operator Workstations installed for this project will not require any hardware additions or software revisions in order to expand the system. 2.6 NETWORKS A. The Local Area Network (LAN) must be either a 10 or 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and CORBA IIOP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Network Area Controllers (NACs) and user workstations B. Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements: 1. Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3 2. Cable; 10 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5 3. Minimum throughput; 10 Mbps, with ability to increase to 100 Mbps 2.7 NETWORK ACCESS A. Remote Access. 1. For Local Area Network installations, provide access to the LAN from a remote location, via the Internet. 2.8 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE (GUI) A. The FMS contractor will create a comprehensive set of user-friendly graphic screens. Provide graphics for all mechanical systems and floor plans of the building. Graphic screens will include individual diagrammatic depictions of each system and sub-system (chilled water system, hot water system, chiller, boiler, air handler, and all terminal equipment). The user will be able to move between screens using hyperlinks or jump- tags. Point/object information on the graphic displays will dynamically update. Show on each graphic all input and output points/objects for the system. Also show relevant TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 8 calculated points/objects such as set points. Canned, text-based, graphic screens or summary pages listing all terminal equipment on a single screen are NOT acceptable. B. The GUI will employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It must include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars will employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected object identification. C. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points will be accomplished in a graphical manner. D. At a minimum, the GUI will permit the operator to perform the following tasks, with proper password access: a. Create, delete or modify control strategies. b. Add/delete objects to the system. c. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters. d. Enable or disable control strategies. e. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer. f. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state. g. Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of values automatically. E. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) will provide the ability to perform system programming and graphic display engineering as part of a complete software package. Access to the programming functions and features of the GUI will be through password access as assigned by the system administrator. F. Provide a library of control, application, and graphic objects to enable the creation of all applications and user interface screens. G. Include a standard library of objects for development and setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks. H. The objects in this library must be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s database and must be organized according to their function. In addition, the user will have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user-defined library. 2.9 WEB BROWSER INTERFACE A. The system must be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, or manufacture-specific browsers are not acceptable. B. The Web browser software will run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the FMS, are not acceptable. C. The Web browser will provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 9 provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, are not permitted. 2.10 MATERIALS A. ELECTRICAL WIRING 1. Provide all electrical wiring in connection with the temperature control system under this section of the specifications in accordance with Division 16 of the Specifications. 2. Provide all power wiring as required for a complete operational temperature control system. Provide all power wiring not indicated in the electrical plans and documents for all temperature control devices and panels. Hire the project electrical contractor to install line voltage wiring and conduits and temperature control conduits. Include all conduit and wiring costs in the bid. 3. Provide battery back-up and/or UPS units at all control equipment. B. CONTROL INSTRUMENTS 1. Dead Band Room Thermostats: Thermostats in spaces where separate heating and cooling actuators are employed must be single combination heating and cooling, modulating type. Provide each thermostat with two separate control outputs. One output will control the cooling and the other control the heating. The cooling set point will be independent of the heating set point in such a manner that the temperature differential established between the heating and cooling set points develops a "NO ENERGY BAND". When the space temperature is within a "NO ENERGY BAND" neither heating nor cooling energy is added to the space. Both the heating and cooling set points must be independently adjustable. The heating and cooling set point scales must be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 90- 75. Provide each set point with an independent adjustable sensitivity. Provide set point dial stops. Provide all thermostats with covers with visible thermometers. Provide thermostats with concealed set points under the covers. Locate thermostats and room sensor 48" above finished floor. Meet all ADA requirements and coordinate with electrical lighting controls. 2. Furnish thermostats in vestibules, corridors and other unsupervised areas with plastic thermostat guards. 3. Low-limit thermostats: Must be vapor pressure type with an element 6 m [20 ft] minimum length. Element must respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any 30 cm [1 ft] section. The low-limit thermostat will be manual reset only and be supplied as DPST. 4. Duct Mounted Temperature Sensors: Use averaging sensors where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft. (1 sq. m). Averaging sensors must incorporate a 2x4 electrical conduit box housing, and utilize a sensing element incorporated in a copper capillary with a minimum length of 20 feet. Install the sensor according to manufacture recommendation and loop and fasten at a minimum of every 36 inches. Use single point sensors where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m). Point sensors must incorporate a 2x4 electrical conduit box housing. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 10 5. Immersion Temperature Sensors: Provide immersion sensors with a separable well. The well must be stainless steel or brass as required for the application. Pressure rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is installed. 6. Outside Air Temperature Sensors: Provide sunshields for outside air sensors. 7. Pressure Transducers: Transducer must be temperature compensated and must vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. Sensing range must be suitable for the application with linearity of 1.5% of full scale and offset of 1% of full scale or better. Provide transducer with linear output signal. Zero and span must be field-adjustable. Transducer sensing elements must withstand continuous operating conditions of positive or negative pressure 50% greater than calibrated span without damage. Provide water differential pressure transducer with stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (differential pressure) and maximum static pressure must be 300 psi. Complete transducer with 1 – 5vdc or 4 to 20 mA output, required mounting brackets, and five-valve manifold. C. SWITCHES AND RELAYS. 1. Pressure Switches: Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) must be UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure, with scale range and differential suitable for intended application, or as specified. 2. Current Switches: Solid state, split core current switch that operates when the current level (sensed by the internal current transformer) exceeds the adjustable trip point. Current switch to include an integral LED for indication of trip condition and a current level below trip set point. 3. Relays: Furnish all electric relays and coordinate with the supplier of magnetic starters for auxiliary contact requirements. Provide all electric control devices of a type to meet current, voltage, and switching requirement of their particular application. Relays must be provided with 24 VAC coils and contacts must be rated at 10 amps minimum. D. VALVES: 1. Equip all valves with throttling plugs and removable composition discs. The Control Contractor will size all valves, and they will be guaranteed to be of sufficient size to meet the heating or cooling requirements. 2. All coil valves must be of the molded rubber diaphragm type. Valves 2" and smaller must be screwed and valves 2½" and larger must be flanged. 3. All 3-way control valves must be 3-way modulating valves. Provide these valves with removable composition discs, must be screwed below 2½" sizes and 2½" sizes and larger must be flanged. 4. Select all control valves for a maximum pressure drop of 3 psig. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 11 E. DAMPERS: 1. Equipment manufacturers will provide all dampers. F. ACTUATORS: 1. Valve and damper actuators must be oil immerse gear train, spring return type with close off ratings for the service in which they are being used. 2. Select damper actuators and springs to compensate for size of damper and the torque required. Minimum torque msut be rated for 5 in-lb/ft2 plus a 1.8 safety factor (minimum or higher as recommended by actuator manufacturer). 3. Provide end switches on all damper actuators in fan systems. Wire end switches so that the damper is open before the fan operates. G. RELAY AND MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES: 1. Furnish and install necessary relays of the positive and gradual acting type as required for the successful operation of the system. Install all such devices in local temperature control panels or equipment enclosures. H. CONTROL LABELS: 1. Provide all temperature control devices, whether or not located on temperature control panels, with plastic nameplates indicating their purpose in the Sequence of Operation. Attach permanent labels to all temperature control devices except room thermostats. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: A. FINNED TUBE RADIATION (FTR1-1, FTR1-2) 1. Provide a new two-way two position valve for each finned tube heater. Provide DDC zone thermostat. Upon a call for heating, open the valve to provide heat to the space. B. EXISTING FINNED TUBE RADIATION 1. Existing finned tube heaters provide reheat for each zone. Each is equipped with a pneumatic control valve. Constant volume cooling air is supplied into the supply sill plenum. Upon a call for heat, the valve opens to temper and heat the suppy air. 2. For each existing finned tube heater noted on the drawings, remove existing pneumatic valve and wireless thermostat. 3. Provide a new three-way modulating valve for each finned tube heater. Provide DDC zone thermostat. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 12 4. Provide a discharge temperature sensor in the plenum. Provide discharge temperature control for each plenum. 5. Upon a call for heating, modulate the valve to provide flow through the coil and heat to the space. 6. Upon a call for cooling in the space, the zone valve shall be closed to flow through the coil and supply air will provide cooling through the plenum. 7. When the zone is satisfied, modulate the zone valve to maintain plenum temperature at 70°F C. REHEAT COILS (RH0-1, RH0-2) 1. For each new reheat coil, provide a new three-way modulating valve for each finned tube heater. Provide DDC zone thermostat. 2. Provide a discharge temperature sensor in the supply ductwork. Provide discharge temperature control for each new zone. 3. Upon a call for heating, modulate the valve to provide flow through the coil and heat to the space. 4. Upon a call for cooling in the space, the zone valve shall be closed to flow through the coil and supply air will provide cooling through the supply ductwork. 5. When the zone is satisfied, modulate the zone valve to maintain discharge temperature at 70°F D. EXISTING REHEAT COILS (BASEMENT AND FIRST LEVELS) 1. Provide this work for (4) existing coils in the basement as shown on the drawings and (2) existing coils on the first level. 2. Existing reheat coils provide reheating for each zone. Each coil is equipped with a pneumatic control valve. Constant volume cooling air is supplied in the supply ductwork. Upon a call for heat, the valve opens to temper and heat the suppy air. 3. For each existing reheat noted on the drawings, remove existing pneumatic valve and wireless thermostat. 4. Provide a new three-way modulating valve for each reheat coil. Provide DDC zone thermostat. 5. Provide a discharge temperature sensor in the supply ductwork. Provide discharge temperature control for each zone. 6. Upon a call for heating, modulate the valve to provide flow through the coil and heat to the space. 7. Upon a call for cooling in the space, the zone valve shall be closed to flow through the coil and supply air will provide cooling through the plenum. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS - AUTOMATIC 230900 - 13 8. When the zone is satisfied, modulate the zone valve to maintain supply duct temperature at 70°F. 3.2 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION: A. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the ATC system hardware and software has been established, the ATC Contractor will provide the on-site operator instruction to the Owner's operating personnel. A competent ATC Contractor Representative familiar with the Control System's software, hardware and accessories will perform operator instruction during normal working hours. B. At a time mutually agreed upon during System commissioning as stated above, the ATC Contractor will give eight (8) hours of instruction to the Owner's designated personnel on the operation of all equipment within the Building Automation Center and describe its intended use with respect to the programmed functions specified. Operation orientation of the automation system includes, but is not be limited to, the overall operational program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system), commands, system generation, advisories and operation. An Owner's Manual prepared for this project by the ATC Contractor must be used in addition to the instruction. Provide two (2) copies of the Owner's Manual. END OF SECTION 230900 HVAC PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS 232113 - 1 SECTION 232113 – HVAC PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings and required to connect fixtures and equipment, pipe and fittings of type and material for the various services as noted below. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 230000. B. Indicate ASTM or ANSI ratings, pipe and fitting weights, pressure and temperature classifications and joining methods for all types of piping used in the project. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit certification that each welder has passed A.W.S. qualification tests for the welding process involved and that certification is current. Provide all welding that is in compliance with the ASME “Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code”, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications”. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series “Code for Pressure Piping”. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HVAC PIPING A. Provide Sch. 40 black steel pipe, ANSI A53 for HOT WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN. Provide pipe 2" and smaller with screwed cast iron fittings, ANSI B16.4. Provide pipe 2- 1/2" and larger with wrought steel weld fittings, ANSI B16.9 or flanged cast iron fittings ANSI B16.5 (class 125/150 or class 250) with bolt patterns to match valves or equipment as required and as shown on the drawings. Select flanged fitting gaskets to match the service of the installed piping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide all pipes, round and straight, of required size. Do cutting with proper tools and ream pipes to full size after cutting. B. Properly enclose, support, guide, anchor, sway brace, connect, test, clean and flush out piping and properly insulate and protect where required. C. Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are nominal pipe internal sizes and not outside diameters unless noted otherwise. D. Run pipes substantially as indicated on the drawings. However, the architect/engineer reserves the right to require this Contractor to make minor changes in pipe locations where conflicts occur with other trades. Provide for such changes without extra cost to the Owner. HVAC PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS 232113 - 2 E. Install piping with ample provisions for expansion and contraction to prevent injury to the same and to the building construction. Make such provision by means of piping offsets, changes in direction, expansion loops and/or suitable expansion joints. Provide suitable anchors and guides to permit proper deflection and compression of offset loops and expansion joints. Do not use expansion joints in lieu of offsets, changes in direction or loops, except where specified and/or indicated on the drawings or where otherwise obviously necessary. F. Run all pipes with proper grade to provide for easy draining and in group runs where applicable and in a neat and orderly manner, to the satisfaction of architect/engineer. Install lines required to be enclosed in ceiling, chaseways or spaces to permit such enclosure as intended. Carefully lay out all pipe runs and schedule to avoid unnecessary interferences with other work. G. Install dielectric unions at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous piping and joints between dissimilar metals. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated, which effectively isolate piping (electric conductance), prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 3.2 JOINTS A. Threaded Joints: Cut piping straight and square, ream, thread and work into place without springing. Use prepared pipe thread lubricant on outside threads only. B. Flanged Joints: When bolting flanged joints, take care to insure that there is no restraint on opposite end of pipe or fittings which would prevent uniform gasket compression or cause unnecessary stress in flanges. Keep one flange free to move in any direction while flange bolts are being tightened. Tighten bolts gradually and at a uniform rate, so that gasket compression is uniform over entire area of gasket. C. Welded Joints: Make welds by electric arc welding process in accord with ANSI B31.1. Mill or machine bevel pipe, except that in field limited amount of pipe may be flame beveled. Pipe with a wall thickness of 3/16 IN or less need not be beveled but may be welded by melting down into, and building up over abutting ends. Separate abutting ends of joints before welding to permit complete fusion to bottom without overlapping. Tack in two or more points to maintain alignment, and fusion weld. Weld continuously around pipe. Make all welds of sound weld metal, thoroughly fused into ends of pipe, and to bottom of “V”. Build in excess of pipe wall to give reinforcement of one fourth pipe wall thickness. Weld metal will present a gradual increase in thickness from surface of pipe to center of weld. Provide minimum weld width of two and one half times thickness of pipe wall. Use welding elbows at all turns in welded lines except where pipe bends are indicated or are required for flexibility. Mitered ells will not be permitted. Make all welded fittings of same material with same pressure and temperature rating as pipe with which they are used. Make flanged connections to control valves, pump suction, and specialties with ANSI standard welding neck flanges. All other flange connections may be made with slip-on flanges provided they are seal welded on inside. Fuse all fillet welds for flanges or fittings into pipe and plate for minimum distance of 1-1/2 times pipe wall thickness and depth of weld of 1-1/4 times pipe wall thickness. Provide eccentric reducers with flat side on top of pipe to prevent entrapment of air in the piping system. D. Weld-o-lets and thread-o-lets: Scribe and cut openings in main pipes for welded branches accurately taking care to remove all of plug and cuttings from main pipe. Full weld fillet welds for full depth of fillet, with additional beads to form well rounded HVAC PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS 232113 - 3 connection as recommended by weld-o-let manufacturer. Partially filled fillets not acceptable. Cut all openings into pipe for welded connections accurately to give carefully matched intersections. 3.3 TESTS A. Test piping as outlined in Section 230000. END OF SECTION 232113 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 232116 - 1 SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install all specialties as shown on the plans and specified in this section. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings on all hydronic and steam specialties as listed in Section 230000. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A. Manual Air Vents - Install as shown on the plans, on high points in the piping and where required to vent the system. Provide manual air vents that are coin operated and rated for 125 psig working pressure. B. Pressure Gauges – Provide WEISS No. UG1N for pressure gauges. Provide gauges with Phosphor Bronze Bourdon tube with brass movement, 0-60 psig pressure with 4- 1/2 inch diameter dial. Furnish pressure gauges used in steam service with a No. SY- 14S coil syphon, to prevent steam from reaching the bourdon tube. Accuracy must be within 1% over entire scale range. Provide each gauge complete with pressure snubbers, and "T" handle cock. Terice and U.S. Gauge will be accepted as equal. C. Thermometers – Provide WEISS No. A9VS35 for thermometers. Provide thermometers with 9 inch scale, separable, adjustable socket, red reading mercury with thermometer wells. Scale range must be 30-200 degrees F. Terice and U.S. Gauge will be accepted as equal. D. Provide WATTS model 288A for vacuum breakers – Provide maximum temperature rating of 210°F at 125 psi working pressure. Vacuum breaker must meet the following standards: ASSE Std. 1001, ANSI A 112.1.1, and FCCCHR of use section 10. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 HYDRONIC SYSTEM FILL AND TREATMENT A. At completion of project, fill system with clean water and add cleaning compound, tri-sodium phosphate. Circulate at room temperature for eight hours. Coordinate with control contractor to open all system valves. B. Make temporary connection to the building water system. C. Without stopping circulation, introduce water into system and open drain valve. Continue flushing until clear water is visible from drain connection. Clean all strainers after flushing the system. D. The mechanical contractor is to hire a chemical treatment company to analyze the heating and cooling system and snowmelt system water. Provide type of treatment and chemical dosages in accord with water analysis as recommended by chemical treatment company. HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 232116 - 2 E. Mount chemical feeder across pump of heating system header piping with shutoff valves. Install with same type of piping used in the heating system. F. On completion of heating water system treatment, provide one year supply of chemicals. After 6 months of system operation, the chemical company is to return to the site, retest the system water and adjust the chemical treatments. G. Refer to section 230540 for propylene glycol installation. END OF SECTION 232116 DUCTWORK 233100 - 1 SECTION 233100 - DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Rigid and Flexible duct. B. Internal Duct Liner. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 230713 Duct Insulation. B. Section 233300 Ductwork Accessories. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 230000. B. Submit shop drawings on all manufactured spiral duct and flexible fiberglass duct. C. Indicate on drawings duct construction, type and construction of fittings and metal gauges. Indicate velocity ratings, pressure ratings and UL listing for flexible duct. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and install all duct in accordance with the HVAC Duct Construction Standards, published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. Provide all duct materials and construction that meet the requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 90A, and the latest edition of the International Mechanical Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCT (Static pressure ≤ 1" WG positive or negative) A. Provide low pressure duct for all duct. B. Provide low pressure rectangular duct that is galvanized iron fabricated and erected in a workmanlike manner. Fabricate plenums, goosenecks and special fittings, as shown on the drawings, or as required. Where space permits, construct duct elbows with an inside radius equal to or greater than the duct width. Where space does not permit duct turns as described above, use duct turn vanes. C. Properly brace and reinforce duct with transverse joints and bracing. Cross break ducts 18" in width and larger. DUCTWORK 233100 - 2 The minimum metal gauges for above floor low pressure duct are as follows: Max. Dimension of Rect. Galvanized Sheet Ducts or Dia. of Round Steel Gauge Ducts Number Up to 12" 26 Over 13" to 30" 24 Over 31" to 54" 22 Over 55" to 84" 20 Over 85" 18 D. Provide spiral round ductwork. Provide spiral duct manufactured by UNITED MCGILL, AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS CO., SPIRAL-TECH, NORLOCK, NORPACK, ACCU- DUCT, METCO, LEWIS AND LAMBERT or approved equal. Construct ELBOWS with a center line radius equal to 1.5 times the diameter. 90 degree elbows will be 5 piece, 65 degrees and 45 degree elbows will be 3 piece and 30 degree elbows will be 2 piece. Where space does not permit the use of elbows as described above, use mitered 90 degrees elbows with turning vanes. Provide BRANCH TAKE-OFFS that are 90 degree straight tees, tangential tees or straight 45 degree lateral wyes. Do not use any bullnose tees. Use Y-45-90 tees. Provide duct fittings constructed by the duct manufacturer. Provide the ductwork manufactured from galvanized steel meeting ASTM A-527-57 in gauges specified above. 2.2 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCTS A. Provide flexible air ducts from the main ducts grilles and diffusers that are Certainteed Certaflex 25 duct with 1" insulation and fiberglass mylar jacket. Provide the duct rated for 8" WG positive, 3/4" WG negative pressure and 4000 fpm at 250°F. Make connections with stainless steel bands. Hart & Cooley, Flexmaster, JP Lamborn are approved as equal. B. Provide factory fabricated duct, complying with NFPA 90A for connectors up to 8 feet maximum length and not passing through the floors of buildings. Provide approximate lengths as indicated on the drawings. C. Provide flexible ducts that are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. complying with UL 181. Ducts must be class 1. 2.3 HIGH EFFICIENCY TAKE-OFF’S A. Provide high efficiency take-off’s as manufactured by Sheet Metal Connectors, Flexmaster, Columbia HVAC Products, or approved equal. Provide at all round duct runouts. Provide without volume damper. See specification 233300 for separate volume damper. 2.4 DUCT LINER A. Provide supply, return and transfer internal duct insulation that is Certainteed fiberglass duct liner 1-1/2 pound density, having a thermal conductivity of 0.26 at 75°F mean temperature. Coat the surface with a black fire-resistant neoprene coating meeting NFPA 90A Standards and provide it that has no air erosion of the fibers with air velocities up to 6,000 fpm. Adhere liner with coated side towards air stream, to all interim sides of DUCTWORK 233100 - 3 duct with 100 percent coverage of fire resistant insulation bonding adhesive such as BENJAMIN FOSTER No. 81-20. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify the exact location of ductwork to avoid interference with the work of other trades. Take special care to avoid interference with piping, conduit, light fixtures etc. Install concealed duct to allow the installation of the ceilings at the height shown on the plans. B. Duct sizes shown on the plan are net interior dimensions. Increase the overall duct size to accommodate internal insulation. C. Install flexible connections between suction and discharge openings in fan units where shown on plans, to prevent transmission of vibration noises. Provide material that is watertight and fire retardant glass fabric approved by Underwriter's Laboratory. Furnish the flexible material with all necessary angles, bolts, clips or other fasteners D. Construct all medium pressure ductwork in accordance with the HVAC Duct Construction Standards, as published by SMACNA, for 3" WG static pressure positive or negative. Seal medium pressure duct in accordance with Seal Class A as defined in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, latest edition. E. Construct all low pressure duct in accordance with the HVAC Duct Construction Standards, as published by SMACNA, for 1" W.G. static pressure positive or negative. Seal low pressure duct in accordance with Seal Class C as defined in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, latest edition. F. Paint all ductwork visible through the face of the register or grille with a flat black paint. G. Seal water tight the bottom 1" of all exhaust and fresh air duct to prevent the leakage of any condensated water from the duct. H. During construction, cover all openings in the duct work which would allow debris to enter the duct. Clean the entire ductwork system of all dust and debris at the conclusion of the construction. I. Construct and install all duct hangers in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Do not attach duct hangers to the floor or roof decks. Attach hangers to the structural steel construction with joist or beam clamps. 3.2 DUCT LINER A. Insulate all rectangular ductwork with 1" of internal insulation. B. Duct sizes are net interior dimensions. Increase overall duct sizes to accommodate the insulation. C. Install liner as specified in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard. Install liner with the coated side towards the air stream. Adhere liner to all sides of the duct with 100 percent coverage of an approved fire resistant insulation bonding adhesive. When the duct height or width exceeds 8", mechanically attach liner to duct as specified in the DUCTWORK 233100 - 4 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard. Install metal nosings as required in the SMACNA Standards based on the velocity present in the duct. END OF SECTION 233100 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1 SECTION 233300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Manual Dampers B. Access Panels C. Fire Dampers 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 230000. B. Submit shop drawings for manual dampers, access panels, fire dampers, smoke dampers, control dampers, filters and filter gauges. C. Include in shop drawings manufacturer's descriptive literature and performance data at actual design conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTUERS A. Approved duct accessories manufacturer’s are Ruskin, Nailor, Air Balance, Greenheck, Pottorff or approved equal. 2.2 MANUAL DAMPERS A. Furnish and install splitter dampers and balancing dampers in the ductwork where shown and wherever required to accurately balance the system. Provide dampers constructed of a minimum of 18 gauge, rigid to prevent vibration and held securely in place at any setting with a heavy lock quadrant. The engineer must approve damper construction. Provide volume damper construction that meets the SMACNA HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. 2.3 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish and install large access panels in the duct work adjacent to all dampers and equipment which may require servicing or cleaning. Furnish access panels adjacent to all control dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, louvers and coils. Provide tight fitting panels and locate panels so as to make them easily accessible. Provide all panels installed in insulated ductwork that are double wall, insulated type. B. Provide access panels installed in low pressure duct manufactured by Ruskin or approved equal. Provide panels that are Model ADH-22 with 1", 1-1/2 pound fiberglass insulation. 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS A. Provide fire dampers in low pressure duct that are dynamic type RUSKIN Model DIBD2 Style B or approved equal. Furnish and install where shown on the plans fire dampers DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2 constructed and tested in accordance with UL Safety Standard 555. Provide each fire damper with a 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating, 165°F fusible link, and includes UL label in accordance with established UL labeling procedures. Damper manufacturer's literature submitted for approval prior to installation must include comprehensive performance data developed from testing in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 and must illustrate pressure drops for all sizes of dampers required at all anticipated flow rates. Provide dampers with a nominal free area of 100%. Furnish each fire damper with factory sleeve and mounting angles for satisfactory installation. Provide fire dampers for vertical or horizontal installation as required by location shown. Provide spring loaded horizontal dampers. Install fire dampers in wall and floor openings utilizing steel sleeves, angles, other materials and practices required to provide installation equivalent to that utilized by the manufacturer when tested by U.L. Installation must be in accordance with damper manufacturer's instructions and the SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all duct accessories in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Install access panels adjacent to all coils, fire dampers, smoke dampers and control dampers. Install access panels in an accessible location. C. Install all fire and smoke dampers as recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with their UL listing. END OF SECTION 233300 EXHAUST FANS 233401 - 1 SECTION 233401 - EXHAUST FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install as shown on the plans and listed in the schedules, exhaust fans. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 230000. Include in shop drawings all performance data as listed on the schedule and complete unit specifications. Clearly designate all accessories to be provided. 1.3 STANDARDS A. Provide unit that is UL approved and AMCA certified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide units manufactured by Loren Cook with Penn, Twin City Fan, Areovent, Acme, Carnes, Trane or Greenheck accepted as equal. 2.2 CEILING CABINET FANS A. Fan wheels shall be true centrifugal type. Integral backdraft damper shall be chatterproof. Terminals shall be provided with cord, plug and receptacle inside the housing. Furnish exhaust fans with white finished grille. B. Each fan shall be provided with a roof cap. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install the exhaust fans as shown on the plans and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Verify that the unit is operating properly after installation. END OF SECTION 233401 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1 SECTION 233713 – DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the plan and listed on the schedule. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 230000. B. Include in shop drawings all performance data listed in schedule. Include a schedule which lists the model, size, CFM, throw, NC and air pressure drop for each register, grille and diffuser. C. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature for each grille, register and diffuser. Clearly label each model description with the equipment tag from the plan. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Model numbers listed on the schedule are Krueger. Equivalent models from Titus, Metal- Aire, Price, Nailor and Carnes will be accepted as equal. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION A. Provide registers, grilles and diffusers with size, capacity, construction, materials and mounting similar to those listed in the schedule. Provide units constructed in a neat and workmanlike manner of heavy gauge metal. Provide finish as listed on the schedule. B. Furnish special requirements such as frames, dampers, blank-off baffles, etc as listed on the schedule or designated on the plans. C. Furnish dampers where listed on the schedule. Provide dampers that are opposed or radial blade and of heavy duty construction to prevent vibration. Butterfly dampers are not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the plan and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Locate grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Reflected Ceiling Plans. END OF SECTION 233713 HOT WATER COILS 238216 - 1 SECTION 238216 – HOT WATER COILS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install as shown on the plans and listed on the schedule, coils. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 230000. Include in shop drawings all performance data as listed on the schedule and complete unit specifications. Clearly designate all accessories to be provided. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide coils unit manufactured by Trane, Daikin, York, JCI or approved equal. 2.2 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION A. Coils - General: ARI Standard 410-81.Each coil to bear the ARI certification label. B. Provide continuous or spiral fin type as scheduled, for 200 PSI operating pressure. C. Provide headers that are copper or brass and fins that are aluminum. Provide copper tubes and arrange for counter-flow of air and water. Provide coils in which the water velocity does not exceed 8 fps maximum with head loss not greater than indicated. Provide 16 gauge galvanized steel frames for attaching coils to ductwork. Provide vent and drain connection at high and low point, respectively, of each coil. Provide all coils guaranteed to drain. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install as shown on plans and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 238216 FINNED TUBE RADIATION HEATERS 238236 - 1 SECTION 238236- FINNED TUBE RADIATION HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install finned tube radiation as listed in the schedule and as specified herein. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings as indicated in Section 230000. Include in shop drawings all performance data shown on the schedule and complete unit specifications. List performance data at design operating conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide finned tube radiation manufactured by Signa, Vulcan or approved equal. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION A. Construct the unit of finned heating section, enclosure, top and bottom support strips, tamper resistant fasteners and all enclosure accessories. B. Provide heating element of copper tubing with aluminum fins bonded to the tubing. See plans for tubing and fin sizes. C. Provide enclosure as listed in the schedule. D. Provide 14 gauge supports that are continuous on the top and bottom. Anchor to existing brick wall and provide tamper proof fasteners to connect enclosure to supports. E. Provide an 8x8 tamper resistant access panel in each panel. F. Provide joint trim, end trim, end enclosures, inside corners and outside corners as needed for complete wall to wall installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install bottom of each unit 4” above finished floor. B. Anchor unit to the existing walls. END OF SECTION 238236 ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 1 SECTION 260500 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL SUPPLEMENTARY AND OTHER CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. The general, supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract and the General Requirements (Division 1) are hereby made a part of this section. 1.2 INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICIATIONS A. The plans and specifications contemplate the complete installation of the system described so that at the conclusion of the construction, the systems will be turned over to the owner complete and ready for safe, efficient operation. The plans and specifications cannot deal individually with the many minute items which may be required by the nature of the systems. The contractor shall be obliged to furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type, which while not mentioned directly herein, are obviously essential to the installation and operation of the system and which are normally furnished on quality installations of this type. B. The drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not necessarily show exact location of conduit unless specifically dimensioned. Riser and other diagrams are schematic and do not necessarily show the physical arrangement of the equipment. They shall not be used for obtaining quantities or lineal runs of conduit. C. In receiving bids, it will be assumed that each bidder has made a thorough inspection of the conditions and is familiar with all conditions affecting the extent or cost of this work. Claims for extra payments as a result of failure to examine the conditions prior to submitting the bid will not be allowed. 1.3 ELECTRONIC COPIES OF DOCUMENTS A. Electronic drawing files are available for construction coordination upon written request to the architect or engineer for a cost of $100 per drawing. A written release waver will be required to be signed by the entity requesting the drawing(s). Upon receipt of signed waver and payment of drawing fee, electronic files will be delivered. Regardless of files delivered, it is the responsiblilty of the recipient to field verify all conditions prior to the fabrication or installation of any work. 1.4 CODES, ORDINANCES, PERMITS, AND FEES A. Comply with all state and local codes and ordinances applying to the work specified herein. Attention is directed in particular to the NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NEC), NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA), AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI), NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS INSTITUTE (NEMA), INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS (IEEE), INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC), UNIFORM FEDERAL ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS (UFAS), INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE (IECC), MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS AND/OR ANY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, and local regulations concerning the specified electrical, lighting and special systems equipment. B. Make application for, obtain and pay for all required permits and certificates of inspection for the work. ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 2 C. In the event of conflict between this specification and a governing code or ordinance, the higher standard shall govern. Bidders shall familiarize themselves with local regulations which affect their work in any way. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes required by local regulations. 1.5 RESPONSIBILITY A. Be responsible for the installation of a satisfactory and complete system in accordance with the intent of the drawing and specifications. Provide, at no extra cost, all incidental items required for completion of the work even though they are not specifically mentioned or indicated on the drawings or in the specifications. B. The drawings do not attempt to show complete details of the building construction which affect the electrical installation; and reference is therefore required to the Architectural, Structural, Landscape and Mechanical drawings and specifications and to shop drawings of all trades for additional details which affect the installation of the work covered under this Division of the Contract. C. Location of electrical system components shall be checked for conflicts with openings, structural members and components of other systems having fixed locations. In the event of any conflicts, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted and his decision shall govern. Necessary changes shall be made at no additional expense to the Architect/Engineer or Owner. D. Determine, and be responsible for, the proper location and character of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves and other openings in the construction required for the work, and obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress so work will not be delayed. Roughing-in fixtures, etc., must be laid out accurately. Connections to equipment of the same class shall be equal heights, plumb, and at right angles to the wall, unless otherwise directed. E. Final location of inserts, hangers, etc., required for each installation, must be coordinated with facilities required for other installations to prevent interference. F. Take extreme caution not to install work that connects to equipment until such time as complete Shop Drawings of such equipment have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. Any work installed by the Contractor, prior to approval of Shop Drawings, will be at the Contractor's risk. G. At all times during the performance of this Contract, properly protect work from damage and protect the Owner's property from injury of loss. Make good any damage, injury or loss, except such as may be directly due to errors in the Bidding Documents or caused by Agents or Employees of the Owner. Adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law and the Bidding Documents. Provide and maintain passageways, guard fences, lights and other facilities for protection required by Public Authority or Local conditions. H. Circuiting and switching shall be exactly as shown on drawings. Combining of home runs is acceptable. Contractor shall refer to NEC Article 310.8 and adjust accordingly. Combining of wiring of various systems in conduit runs is not acceptable unless otherwise specified herein or noted on drawings. ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 3 1.6 INSPECTION A. Regular inspections shall be requested of duly authorized inspectors as required by codes and ordinances. 1.7 SUBSTITUTING A. Proposals to contractor for substitution of material and equipment listed on the drawings and/or these specifications shall be submitted after the architect/engineer's approval has been obtained. For such proposals, materials and equipment will have to conform in type, function, quality of material and assembly and meet the requirements indicated in drawings and specifications. REQUESTS FOR APPROVAL SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AT LEAST 10 DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID DATE. Each request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts, photometric IES files, performance and test data and any other information needed for an evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in any other equipment or other work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the proposer. If these proposed substitutions are considered as acceptable equals for quotations and use, approval will be issued in an addendum. 1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The contractor shall submit to the engineer for approval, prior to the placing of orders for any equipment, a complete schedule of electrical equipment and light fixtures to be installed. The schedule shall consist of at least six (6) sets each of catalogs, cuts, diagrams, shop drawings, photometric data or any other descriptive material necessary to fully describe the equipment proposed and its operating characteristics. The schedules shall list the operating conditions of the equipment at the conditions listed on the schedules. Provide shop drawings for the following equipment: 1. Power Distribution, Lighting, and Receptacle Panels. 2. Disconnect and Safety Switches. 3. Wiring Devices. 4. Lighting Fixtures. 5. Lighting Control Systems, Dimmer Systems and Switches. 6. Timers and Time Switches. 7. Fire Alarm Systems. 8. Raceway and Fittings. 9. Cables, Wires and Terminations. 10. Grounding Connections. B. All shop drawings shall be submitted by the contractor and shall have been signed, "approved" and initialed by the contractor prior to submittal to the engineer. The engineer will check the shop drawings to aid in interpreting the plans and specifications, and in so doing will assume that the shop drawings conform to all specified requirements set forth in this specification. The approval of the shop drawings by the engineer does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of complying with all elements of the specification. C. The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by the contractor from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the specification ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 4 are completed as an aid to the contractor, but where discrepancies arise, it shall not release the contractor from providing the proper number to complete this work. 1.9 ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS A. Coordinate all work with the asbestos abatement contractor for this project. Prior to the start of work the Contractor shall review all asbestos reports or sample analysis, that the Owner has had completed. The Contractor shall not cut into or in any other way disturb existing materials which contain asbestos. Asbestos abatement is not within the scope of Division 16 work. If the Contractor must disturb a material that has not been tested for asbestos, request in writing shall be made to the Owner that the material be tested for asbestos prior to the start of work. B. The Contractor shall provide materials and equipment which do not contain asbestos. At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall certify in writing that the materials and equipment installed do not contain asbestos. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Fire barrier caulking system shall be 3M CP25 caulk. Fire barrier caulk shall be UL classified and Factory Mutual System approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK A. The Contractor shall examine all the drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of his work. General, mechanical, and plumbing contract drawings will be made available to this Contractor. SHOULD DISCREPANCIES AFFECTING THE WORK BE FOUND, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL IMMEDIATELY REPORT SAME TO THE ENGINEER FOR INSTRUCTIONS. Subsequent changes made necessary by the neglect of any Contractor to discover and report such discrepancies shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor, under the direction of the Engineer. B. Furnish, provide, and/or install shall be considered as requiring the Contractor to both furnish the equipment and install it unless specific reference is made to the furnishing or installing of the equipment by others. C. The Contractor shall confer and cooperate with other Contractors on the job in the installation of his work so all work will be installed in proper relationship to the surrounding location and shape of any part to avoid conflicts. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct size and location of any changes, slots, and openings required by him and shall be required to do, at his expense, any cutting or patching made necessary by his failure to make proper arrangements in this respect. D. The Contractor shall follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the installation and connection of all equipment and materials furnished under this contract. In the event of conflict or discrepancy between manufacturer's instructions and the contract documents, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer before proceeding. No equipment installation shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturer's warranty of the equipment. ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 5 3.2 SUPPLEMENTARY FRAMING AND HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Provide the design, fabrication, and erection of supplementary structural framing required for the attachment of hangers or other devces supporting electrical equipment. B. Provide framing members of standard rolled steel shapes, A-36 steel, designed for their actual loads, with allowable stresses specified by AISC, without excessive deflection and with consideration for rigidity under vibration, in accordance with standard structural practices. C. When suspending transformers or similar vibrating equipment, provide vibration isolators to isolate vibration from structural members. D. Provide housekeeping pads where shown on plans. Size as noted or shown. Electrical contractor shall hire general contractor to install pads. This also includes the pad for the main pad mounted transformer. 3.3 CLEANING A. Labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed and the entire installation left in a clean, usable condition. 3.4 PAINTING A. Finishes of all electrical equipment shall be protected during storage, installation and until final acceptance. Any damage or imperfections shall be "touched up" or if extensive, the entire unit shall be repainted as directed by the Engineer. 3.5 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATIONS A. All cracks, voids, or holes for the passing of mechanical and electrical items through floors and fire rated walls, or ceilings with fire rating of 1 hour or more shall be sealed with a fire barrier caulk. B. Fire barrier caulking system shall be 3M CP 25 caulk. C. Fire barrier caulking system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maintain a fire rating of 3 hours minimum. 3.6 PLENUM PENETRATIONS A. Seal all cracks, voids, or holes for the passing of mechanical and electrical items through plenum construction with material to match surrounding construction or with fire barrier caulk. 3.7 SLEEVES A. The Electrical Contractor shall set and maintain all sleeves. Any conduit passing through building construction including walls, floors, roofs or masonry partitions shall be encompassed with sleeves in accordance with the following. B. All conduit sleeves through slabs, floors, masonry walls and partitions shall be 1/2 inch greater in inside diameter than the external diameter of pipe passing through. All sleeves shall be fabricated from new material cut square and reamed. ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 6 C. Sleeves shall be provided in all masonry partition walls and floors. Sleeves shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe. Wall sleeves shall be flush with the wall surface. The top of floor sleeves shall extend 1" above the floor, the bottom of the sleeve shall be flush with the floor. D. The space between the pipe and the sleeves, through fire rated walls and floors shall be protected as designated below. E. Furnish and install chrome-plated wall, floor and ceiling plates on all exposed pipes where they pass through walls, floors, or ceilings in finished areas. The wall plates shall have set screws or spring locks for clamping to the pipe. F. All sleeves through floors shall be sealed watertight. 3.8 OPENINGS A. All openings required for the passage of multiple conduits and electrical equipment in the construction shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for determining the correct location for all openings. B. The inside dimensions of all openings shall be 1/2 inch greater than the size of the ductwork or equipment passing through the opening. Openings for insulated ductwork shall be large enough to accommodate the insulation without harming the insulation or vapor barrier. C. All openings through fire rated walls and floors shall be protected as described above. 3.9 EXISTING SERVICES A. The Contractor shall verify the exact location of all existing building services extended and/or relocated for this project. The Contractor shall also verify the exact location and take proper precautions to protect all services which may be encountered during construction. B. All active services which are encountered shall be protected, braced and supported where required for proper execution of the work and without interruption of service if possible. C. All inactive services which are encountered shall be protected, or removed as directed by the Owner, Utility Company, or Municipal Agency having jurisdiction. D. When active services must be temporarily interrupted, arrangements shall be made to work continuously including overtime if required, to assure that services will be interrupted only as long as actually required to complete necessary work. 3.10 REMODELING WORK A. Wherever existing electrical wire, conduit, controls, circuits, etc., are cut into, removed, interrupted, as a result of the remodeling, all such items that serve areas or equipoment that remain shall be re-routed, extended, relocated, etc., as necessary to maintain operation of equipment and services. ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 7 B. Downtime shall be held to a minimum. Outages shall be scheduled at a time acceptable to and approved by the owner. Consult with the owner in sufficient time for him to make necessary preparatins for the outage. 3.11 TEMPORARY SERVICES A. Description of System 1. Service required – The contractor shall provide and connect two (2) movable temporary panels to the customer’s electrical system. The temporary panels shall be located as directed by the general contractor. Each panel shall have provisions for 100A, 3 phase, 4 wire service at voltage available. 2. Provide temporary electric power for items listed, throughout the construction period, so that power can be secured at any desired point from temporary service panel within building proper. a. Power centers for miscellaneous tools and equipment used in the construction period, so that power can be secured at any desired point from temporary service panel within building proper. b. Lighting for safe and adequate working conditions throughout the buildings, starways, and crawl spaces. Provide at least 1/2 watt of incandescent lighting per square foot of floor area. Maintain a socket voltage of at least 10 volts. Use a minimum of 100 watt bulbs. c. Power for construction site offices and for other temporary storage and construction buildings. d. Power to maintain continuous construction during changeover of electrical equipment. e. Power for testing and checking equipment. 3.12 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT A. Access shall be provided to all motors, junction boxes, relays, controls, specialties, etc., for maintenance purposes. All access doors, access panels, removable sections, etc., required for access shall be provided. The General Contractor will provide access panels and doors required in the building construction where shown on the plans. The location of the access openings relative to the electrical equipment shall be coordinated to assure proper access to the equipment. 3.13 PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. All sheaves, belts, drives, couplings, and moving parts shall be protected by approved permanent guards, shields, or railings, which shall be in place whenever the equipment is in operation and shall be in accordance with applicable safety standards. 3.14 TESTS A. Test all wiring and connections for shorts between conductors, shorts to ground, and for continuity prior to installation of fixtures and equipment. B. Perform insulation resistance test on all feeder conductors installed under this contract, including neutrals, using a megohmeter. Minimum value shall be 100 megohm at 60 degrees F. ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 8 C. Correct and retest any defects and submit data to engineer. D. Test all low-voltage cabling, installed within the contract, per industry standards and submit test results to engineer. 3.15 ALL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER DIVISIONs 26000, 27000, and 28000: A. At a time set by the contractor and agreed to by the owner, arrange to place equipment in operation and have available at that time, if required, representatives of the manufacturer of equipment to assist in starting equipment, to make necessary adjustments to equipment, and to prove satisfactory operation prior to turning facility over to the owner. B. Any irregularities, faulty equipment, etc., shall be repaired or replaced as required prior to acceptance. 3.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare two portfolios with two complete sets of shop drawings of the equipment used in the erection of the electrical systems and equipment testings, cleaning and maintenance instructions, operation and maintenance manuals, list of materials for the maintenance, parts list, wiring diagrams, and name and address of authorized service organization. B. Information shall be folded only if necessary, and bound in an 8-1/2" x 11" hard cover indexed, looseleaf binder. Multiple binders shall be used if required to contain material. All material shall be properly identified with job name, date, and the names and addresses of the contractor, architect, and engineer. C. The portfolios shall be submitted to the engineer for review of material and completeness prior to final inspection, and when approved by the engineer, the portfolios will be turned over to the owner at the time of the final inspection. D. Where indicated in the specification, provide the services of a factory trained representative to instruct the owner's authorized personnel in the operation, control, programming, and maintenance of equipment. Contractor shall instruct owner's personnel in the operation of all other equipment and systems. E. Include the following close-out documents in the manuals: 1. Warranty letter. 2. Low-voltage cabling test reports. 3. Fire Alarm test reports. 3.17 PROJECT CLOSE OUT A. The electrical contractor shall arrange for an inspection of all items installed in the ceiling before the ceiling or ceiling tile is installed. The engineer shall be informed at least one week before the planned installation of the ceiling to arrange the inspection. If the ceiling tile is installed before the inspection, the electrical contractor shall remove all the ceiling tiles prior to the inspection. B. General: Refer to Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 9 C. Record Drawings: Give special attention to the complete and accurate recording of underground conduit and concealed and non-accessible work, and junction box location(s) of all conduit systems, location of lighting controls and remote ballasts in lighting systems, and work of change orders where not shown on contract documents. D. Operating Instructions: Conduct at least a full day walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personal to be involved in the operation and maintenance of the electrical equipment and systems. If more time is needed the contractor shall continue instruction until the owner's personal are familiar with the operation of the system. Explain the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the system. E. Turn-Over of Operation: At the time of substantial completion, turn over the prime responsibility for the operation of the system to the owner's personal. However until the time of final acceptance, provide at least one full-time operating engineer, who is completely familiar with the work, to consult with and continue training the owner's personal. F. Final Completion: The following special requirements shall be provided in addition to those specified elsewhere: 1. The contractor shall not call for final completion check until the electrical systems and equipment have been installed, adjusted, programmed, and are in full and complete satisfactory operation and the following certifications of inspection from equipment suppliers have been completed and submitted with the architect/engineer. Certifications of inspection are required for the following items of equipment: a. Fire Alarm System (Local Rep.) 2. The certifications shall consist of letters signed by Factory Trained and Authorized service engineers stating the following: a. They have inspected all their equipment on the project. b. They approve the condition of their equipment and its installation. c. They have fully checked its operation and certify that it is operating properly. d. They will note any problems, conditions or objections that could lead to future operating problems. 3. Exceptions may be permitted upon written request from the contractor listing any minor items that are uncompleted and beyond his reasonable control. Provide a full guarantee that they be completed at a named later date and the guarantee shall be extended as required to provide a full warranty. G. Final Payment will not be made until the contractor has satisfactorily completed all final inspection items. H. Guarantee: All equipment and work shall be fully guaranteed, parts and labor for one year from the date of substantial completion, unless noted otherwise. The contractor has the full responsibility to guarantee all equipment and work and shall assume full responsibility to repair any equipment at his cost which the manufacturer refuses to guarantee. The Owner has the right to order repairs to any equipment or work ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 10 provided hereon and to charge the contractor for the same if repairs are not made during a reasonable period of time not to exceed 24 hours during an emergency or 72 hours on a non-critical item. END OF SECTION 260500 MEDIUM, LOW AND CONTROL VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 1 SECTION 260513 - MEDIUM, LOW AND CONTROL VOLTAGE CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Standard General and Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and other applicable Specification Sections including the Related Sections listed below, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 2. Section 260533 - Electrical Materials and Methods PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CABLE AND WIRE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) A. Secondary distribution and power cable shall be single conductor stranded copper, No. 12 AWG minimum; with NEC Type THHN insulation rated 90 degrees C, 600 volts. Alan Wire, American Insulated Wire, General, Cerro Wire, Encore, Republic Wire, Rockbestos, Service Wire, or United Copper Industries. B. Lighting wire for above ground use shall be single conductor stranded copper, No. 12 AWG minimum, with NEC Type THHN insulation rated 90 degrees C, 600 volts. Alan Wire, American Insulated Wire, General, Cerro Wire, Encore, Republic Wire, Rockbestos, Service Wire, or United Copper Industries. C. Lighting wire for underground use in conduit shall be single conductor stranded copper, No. 12 AWG minimum, with NEC Type XHHW insulation rated 90 degrees C in dry locations and 75 degrees C in wet locations, 600 volts. American Insulated Wire, General, Cerro Wire, Encore, Republic Wire, Rockbestos, Service Wire, or United Copper Industries. D. Control cable shall be single conductor stranded copper No. 14 AWG minimum; with NEC Type THHN insulation rated 90 degrees C, 600 volts. E. Instrumentation and special systems wire shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations, but shall not be less than 20 AWG. F. Type MC cable shall be made up of individual conductors as noted above, be color coded, include a separate ground conductor, and shall have a corrugated metal armor over its entire length. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS MEDIUM, LOW AND CONTROL VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 2 A. Install all cables and wires (including telecommunications, low voltage control and power limited circuits) in raceways. Telecommunications raceways shall be continuous from outlet boxes to telecommunications rooms or cable trays. B. Use cable lubricant when pulling secondary feeder cables. Avoid exceeding manufacturer’s recommendations on pulling tensions; sidewall pressures and cable bend radii. C. Segregate wiring of different voltage levels. Except as follows, circuits operating at different voltages shall not share raceways. 1. Power wiring to rooftop motors and rooftop receptacles may be routed together. 2. Power and control wiring between variable speed drives and motor disconnect switches may be routed together. D. Splice power cables with solderless compression butt splices or ring lugs. Terminate power cables including motor leads with solderless compression ring lugs. Splice branch circuit wiring, lighting wiring, and control and instrumentation wiring with wire nut connectors. Terminate control and instrumentation wiring with solderless compression ring or spade lugs. Compression connectors and lugs shall be crimped with tools specifically designed for the terminations being crimped. E. If no color coding system exists for each indicated system function and voltage, color code circuits as follows: 1. Three Phase Power 208/120 Volts: Phase X (A): Black Phase Y (B): Red Phase Z (C): Blue Neutral: White Ground: Green 2. Control wires to light fixtures for light dimming shall be: a. 'Hot control wire' - Black with white stripe b. 'Neutral control wire' - White with Black stripe 3. Less Than 120 Volts: Use Industry Standard Methods F. Provide home runs of No. 10 AWG wire for 20 amp branch circuits that exceed 150' in length. G. Ground the shields of shielded instrumentation and control cables at one end only. The shields at the other end shall be insulated from ground. H. Provide identification tags on all cables and conductors terminated in panels. 3.2 COMMISSIONING A. Perform commissioning activities in accordance with Related Sections. END OF SECTION 260513 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL 260526 - 1 SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Standard General and Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and other applicable Specification Sections including the Related Sections listed below, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260513 - Medium, Low & Control Voltage Cables 2. Section 260533 - Electrical Materials and Methods 3. Section 260800 - Electrical Acceptance Tests 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide grounding for all systems and equipment. 1.3 GROUNDING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Each ground rod shall have a maximum resistance to ground of 25 ohms before connection to the other ground rods. If reading is above 25-ohms, drive one extension. Further testing of that individual rod is not needed B. The total grounding system with all connections completed shall have a maximum resistance to ground of 10 ohms. 1.4 CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Provide exothermic weld type, or Burndy Hyground, ground connections for concealed, underground, and concrete encased ground connections, for ground connections to structural steel, connections between sections of the main ground bus and all connections to the substation room ground bus bars. B. Exposed ground connections (except connections to structural steel and substation room ground bus bars) may be made with copper or bronze compression ground fittings or bolted compression ring lugs. C. Provide exothermic weld type, or Burndy Hyground ground connections for splices and taps of grounding conductors No. 8 AWG and larger. Exposed splices and taps shall be taped. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUND RODS A. Unless shown otherwise, ground rods shall be 3/4" diameter by 10' long, copper clad steel. Ground rods shall be capable of being extended when additional length is required. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL 260526 - 2 2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Grounding conductors for general use shall be stranded, copper conductor, sized in accordance with the NEC unless shown otherwise on the drawings, and insulated with green NEC Type THHN insulation rated 90 degrees C, 600 volts. 2.3 GROUND CONNECTIONS A. Ground connections shall be Burndy Hyground, Cadweld, Thermo-weld or Thomas & Betts Blackburn only. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Ground the shields of shielded instrumentation and control cable in accordance with Specification Section 260513. B. Provide bare copper grounding conductors transformers, switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers and control panels to the building grounding system. Equipment rated above 480 volts or 600 amps shall be grounded by a minimum of two independent grounding conductors. C. Ground motors rated 460 volts and below by motor feeder equipment grounding conductors. Stranded copper grounding conductors connected to building steel shall also bond motors rated over 460 volts. D. Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductors in all service, feeder, and branch circuits for connection of load devices to the power source ground. Raceways shall not be used as equipment grounding conductors. 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall not be daisy-chained. 2. Bond equipment-grounding conductors in boxes and enclosures where the grounding conductors are terminated or spliced. E. Bond conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, and enclosures together, and to the building grounding system. Provide bonding bushings and bonding jumpers to bond conduits where they enter a box or enclosure. F. Protect separately routed grounding conductors subject to damage or physical abuse by Schedule 40 PVC nonmetallic conduits. Grounding conductors shall not be routed in metallic conduits except when routed with phase conductors. 3.2 COMMISSIONING A. Perform commissioning activities in accordance with Related Sections. END OF SECTION 260526 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260533 - 1 SECTION 260533 - ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Standard General and Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and other applicable Specification Sections including the Related Sections listed below, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260513 - Medium, Low & Control Voltage Cables 2. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide conduits, surface raceways, boxes, fittings and supports to form a complete, coordinated, and continuously grounded raceway system. 1.3 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Conduits indoors in general areas shall be electrical metallic tubing (EMT) with steel set screw fittings. B. Conduits indoors in hazardous areas, encased in concrete floor slabs or subjected to water, physical damage or abuse shall be galvanized rigid steel (RS) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC) with cast or malleable iron threaded fittings and bushings. C. Conduits outdoors shall be galvanized rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit with cast or malleable iron threaded fittings and bushings. D. Conduits encased in concrete underground shall be Type DB PVC with matching fittings. E. Conduits direct buried underground shall be Schedule 40 PVC with matching fittings. F. Final connections to recessed lighting fixtures and under-counter lights shall be 1/2" minimum flexible metallic conduit, manufactured wiring systems, or galvanized steel Type MC cable, all with steel fittings. 1. Manufactured wiring systems shall a. Only be used above accessible ceilings. b. Shall not be used in walls or above permanent ceilings. c. Shall contain a dedicated, separate, grounding conductor d. Be limited to lengths of 6’0” or less. 2. Type MC cable conductors shall be color coded to match the building color- coding scheme. Type MC cable shall be terminated with steel setscrew connectors that have integral insulating bushings. Self-locking, twist-in type fittings are not acceptable. ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260533 - 2 G. Final connections to motors, transformers and equipment subject to vibration or removal for maintenance shall be 1/2" minimum liquid tight flexible metallic conduit with steel liquid tight fittings. Transformer connections may be non-liquid tight flexible metallic conduit in electrical rooms only. 1. In all other wall types and conditions use standard conduit, of the type appropriate for the wall construction. H. Connections to other recessed devices, (including communication outlet boxes, junction or pull boxes, etc) shall be with standard conduit of the type appropriate for the wall construction. 1.4 SURFACE RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS A. When conduits in finished areas cannot be concealed in walls or above ceilings, surface raceways may be used where permitted. Boxes and fittings shall match and be from the same manufacturer as the raceways. 1.5 J-HOOKS A. Subject to the installation requirements, low voltage cables may be installed using J- hooks, but only in rooms above accessible ceilings and in unfinished open ceiling areas. Do not use J-hooks in corridors, in finished open ceiling areas, above inaccessible ceilings or as a substitute for cable trays. Bridle rings shall not be used. 1.6 BOX REQUIREMENTS A. Provide sheet steel outlet boxes, extensions, and plaster rings for EMT, flexible metal conduit, and MC cable. B. Provide cast or malleable iron outlet boxes and covers for galvanized rigid steel conduits, intermediate metal conduits, and liquid tight flexible metal conduits. C. Boxes shall be sized for all conductors and devices to be contained within. Box extensions shall not be used to correct for undersized boxes. A single extension may be used as follows only if all free conductors extend at least 3 inches outside of the extension opening. 1. On boxes being flush mounted in masonry walls. 2. On existing boxes in walls that are being furred out. 3. On existing boxes for connecting to an existing circuit. 4. On fire alarm, security and clock system boxes where required by the system manufacturer's instructions. D. Plaster rings shall not be considered box extensions, but their capacities may be included in box fill calculations. 1.7 SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS A. Surface mounted equipment shall be secured to steel channels. The channels shall be attached with toggle bolts to hollow tile, block or similar surfaces, and attached with screws or bolts and expansion shields to solid masonry or concrete. ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260533 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS A. Electrical metallic tubing shall be thin wall steel tubing, electro-galvanized or hot dipped galvanized inside and outside. Fittings and bushings shall be galvanized steel set screw type with two screws per connection for sizes over 2". B. Galvanized rigid steel conduit and intermediate metal conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized inside and outside, in 10' lengths and threaded on both ends. Fittings and bushings shall be cast or malleable iron, and hot dipped galvanized inside and outside. C. PVC conduit and fittings shall be Type DB for encasement in concrete, Schedule 40 for direct burial, concealed and exposed work, and schedule 80 in parking structures. Fittings shall be of the same type and from the same manufacturer as the conduit. PVC conduit shall be UL Labeled for 90 degrees C cables. Cantex, Carlon or National Pipe & Plastic. D. Fiberglass reinforced epoxy conduit shall be standard wall, iron pipe size, sunlight resistant, gray color, with matching push-fit fittings. FRE or Champion. E. Flexible metallic conduit shall be galvanized steel or aluminum. Fittings shall be of steel with cadmium or galvanized finish. Fittings shall be machine screw clamp type, single or two-piece. Self-locking, twist-in type fittings are not acceptable. F. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall consist of a flexible, galvanized steel core, a continuous copper ground strip and a polyvinyl chloride jacket. Fittings shall be steel liquid tight grounding type from the same manufacturer as the conduit. 2.2 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Where surface raceways are called for on the drawings, or when conduits in finished areas cannot be concealed in walls or above ceilings, surface raceways shall be used. Boxes and fittings shall match and be from the same manufacturer as the surface raceway. B. Surface raceways shall consist of a base and cover, sized for the number of conductors contained within, complete with all connectors, fittings, bushings, boxes, covers and mounting hardware. C. Raceways shall be 600 volt rated, and be in compliance with the applicable paragraphs of NEC Article 352. D. They shall be non-flammable, and UL labeled, under UL 5, or UL 5A (as applicable). E. The completed raceway system shall be vandal resistant. F. Shall accept receptacles, cover plates, telephone/data outlets and other standard wiring devices as specified elsewhere in these specifications. G. The cover plates used for wiring devices and telecommunication outlets shall be of the 'overlapping' type, and shall therefore cover the 'cut-end' of the raceway cover. ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260533 - 4 H. The raceways shall have a select ivory (or white, or gray where noted) color, "scuff" resistant finish, and the raceways shall be paintable. I. All components of the raceway system exposed to view shall be of the same color and shade. J. Barriers shall be provided when necessary to separate conductors of different voltages, or services. K. Surface raceways shall be steel or plastic as noted below, and as noted on the drawings: 1. Metallic a. Metallic raceways shall be of .040" thick (minimum) zinc plated or galvanized steel. b. The acceptable levels of quality are, generically, 1) "Wiremold V500 and V700" for smaller single channel raceway applications, 2) "Wiremold V3000" for larger single channel raceway applications, and 3) "Wiremold V4000" for larger multi-channel raceway applications. c. Manufacturers include Hubbell, Wiremold, Thomas and Betts, or Mono- System. 2.3 J-HOOKS A. J-hooks shall be zinc electro-plated steel or plastic, UL Listed for use in plenum spaces, with a minimum of a 3/4 inch wide cable support area, and rated for use with Categories 5e and 6 UTP, fire alarm, security, temperature controls and similar low voltage cables. J-hooks shall include a retaining means for closing the hook so the cables do not fall out. 2.4 BOXES A. Boxes for fixtures, outlets, switches, equipment connections and wire pulling shall be 1. Cast or formed from carbon steel sheets of commercial grade steel not less than 14-gauge, 2. One-piece construction, zinc, or cadmium plated, 3. Tapped for mounting plates and covers as required. B. Pull and junction boxes shall be 1. Fabricated from galvanized or painted code gauge cold rolled carbon steel sheets. 2. Welded construction with flat removable covers fastened to the box with machine screws. 3. Seams and joints shall be closed and reinforced with flanges formed of the same material from which the box is constructed or by continuous welding which will provide equivalent strength to flange construction. 4. Preferably not provided with 'knockouts'. ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260533 - 5 C. Box covers shall be fastened in place by machine screws or hinges and latches. Self- tapping or sheet metal fasteners are not acceptable. 2.5 SUPPORTS A. Hangers and brackets shall be made of steel pipe, channel iron, angle iron or prefabricated steel channel. Prefabricated steel channel shall be by B-Line, Hilti, Powerstrut or Unistrut. B. Anchors shall be lead shield anchors or plastic expansion anchors for small loads, and expansion or epoxy anchors for large loads. Powder-driven anchors shall not be used. 2.6 LABELS AND DIRECTORIES A. Equipment nameplates shall be engraved .125 inch (1/8") thick laminated plastic, white, with black letters. The engraved letters shall be at least one quarter inch (¼") high. B. Receptacles and lighting switches shall be labeled using clear adhesive backed nylon or Mylar tape with black text permanently laminated to the tape. C. Panel directories shall be typed on supplied card stock with panel, or card stock similar in thickness and material as those supplied with the panels. Install supplied clear plastic cover, or one of like material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAYS A. Size conduits in accordance with the NEC, but not less than the sizes shown on the drawings. Minimum power and control conduit size shall be 1/2". Minimum telecommunications conduit size shall be 3/4"". B. Install concealed and exposed conduits and cable trays parallel to or at right angles to building lines. Conduits shall not be embedded in concrete slabs except where specifically shown. Install surface raceways as close to room corners or trim features as possible to make the surface raceways less obvious. Where conduits are routed over beams and under corrugated decking, conduits shall be offset 3” below the decking to avoid damage from future decking penetrations. C. Make directional changes in primary power distribution conduits above ground with sweeps and long radius elbows, and underground with 20' minimum radius bends. D. Conceal conduits wherever possible and practical. When conduits cannot be concealed in finished areas, use surface raceways with matching boxes from the same manufacturer as the raceways. E. Metal conduits, fittings, enclosures and raceways shall be mechanically joined together in a firm assembly to form a continuous electrical conductor providing effective electrical grounding continuity. ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260533 - 6 F. Provide expansion fittings at the intervals specified in the manufacturer's instructions. G. Conduits entering panels located outdoors, in parking structures, in steam tunnels and on cooling towers shall enter from the sides, back, or bottom. Conduits shall not enter from the top. H. Separate raceways from uninsulated steam pipes, hot water pipes, and other hot surfaces by a minimum of 4” horizontally or 12” vertically. Separate raceways from ventilation ducts and insulated pipes so that they do not come into contact with each other. I. Low voltage signal circuits shall be separated or shielded from power circuits to prevent the induction of noise into the signal circuits. J. EMT entering sheet metal enclosures and outlet boxes shall be secured in place by a connector with a locknut. Rigid conduit shall be secured with locknut inside and outside and a bushing. Sufficient thread on the connector or conduit shall extend into the enclosure so that the bushing will butt tight into the connector or conduit. Bushings shall not be used as jamb nuts or in lieu of locknuts. K. Flexible metallic conduit to motors and similar equipment shall not exceed 3'-0" in length, and shall have adequate slack to absorb the maximum vibration. Flexible conduit connections to lighting fixtures shall not exceed 6'-0" in length. 3.2 J-HOOKS A. Install cables in J-hooks as follows. 1. Install cables parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 2. Space J-hooks in accordance with the cable manufacturers' instructions, but not more than 5 feet apart and not more than 3 feet from both sides of a change in direction. 3. Maintain a minimum separation of 2” from lighting ballasts, transformers, motors, power circuits and similar equipment. 4. Anchor J-hooks to walls or suspend J-hooks using 1/4-inch minimum diameter threaded rod hangers. Do not support J-hooks from ceiling or equipment hangers. J-hooks shall not impede removal of accessible ceiling tiles. 5. Load J-hooks to no more than the maximum fill stated in the J-hook manufacturer's instructions. 6. Cables shall not sag more than 12 inches between J-hooks and shall not impede access to equipment requiring maintenance. 7. Cables in open areas shall be a minimum of 10 feet A.F.F. 8. Cables above accessible ceilings shall not touch the ceiling grid or tiles. 9. Cables shall be protected from physical damage. 10. Cables shall be completely accessible for replacement. Cables hidden above ductwork or other obstructions and cables so high they cannot be reached safely while standing on a ladder shall be replaced with cables in new J-hooks located in a more accessible location. B. Provide conduit sleeves for cables penetrating walls. If cables in J-hooks penetrate a corridor wall from a room, and the distance from the corridor wall to the corridor cable tray is more than 18 inches, provide conduit stubs through the wall to the cable tray. ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260533 - 7 C. Contain cables inside J-hooks in accordance with the J-hook manufacturer's instructions so cables do not fall out, but so existing cables can be pulled out and new cables can be pulled in. Cables shall not be strapped to the J-hooks. Bond the conduit stubs to the cable tray. D. Provide separate J-hooks for each cable system. Cables from one system shall not use the J-hooks of another system. E. Color code J-hooks to indicate the system of the cables they contain: 1. Telecommunications - silver or gray 2. Fire alarm – red. 3. Temperature controls – blue. 4. Laboratory controls - white. 5. Security & card access control – orange. 6. Audio/visual – yellow. 3.3 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Except where shown otherwise, install equipment and devices at the following heights: 1. Receptacles (Wall): 18" A.F.F. to center 2. Receptacles (Above Counter): 44" A.F.F. to center 3. Receptacles (Unfinished Area): 44" A.F.F. to center 4. Light Switches: 44" A.F.F. to center 5. Fire Alarm Pull Stations: 44" A.F.F. to center 6. Fire Alarm Horn/Strobes: 80" A.F.F. to bottom 7. Thermostats/HVAC Controls: 44” A.F.F. to center 8. Electrical Panels: 72" A.F.F. to top 9. Safety Switches/Motor Starters/Variable Frequency Drives: 72" A.F.F. to top (except top of handle shall not exceed 78" A.F.F.) 10. Motor Control Pushbuttons: 60" A.F.F. to center 3.4 SUPPORTS A. Provide 4" thick concrete housekeeping pads for floor-mounted equipment. B. Support all electrical items independently of supports provided by the other trades. C. Support conduits and boxes using steel conduit straps or 1/4-inch minimum diameter threaded rod hangers. Suspended ceiling hangers or hanger wire shall not be used (except to support flexible metallic conduit and manufactured wiring systems). D. Hangers shall be of sufficient strength that their deflection at mid span does not exceed 1/240 of the hanger span length after the cables are installed. E. Route flexible metallic conduit, manufactured wiring systems and Type MC cable parallel to or perpendicular to building lines, and in a neat and workmanlike manner. Coil the excess manufactured wiring systems and Type MC cable, and support independently of the ceiling grid system at intervals not exceeding 3 feet. 3.5 PENETRATIONS, SLEEVES, AND FIRE SEALS ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260533 - 8 A. Cut floor and wall penetrations neatly and to the minimum size required for installation of the equipment and raceways. B. Provide galvanized steel pipe sleeves for all conduits penetrating floors, exterior walls and roofs. 1. Extend floor sleeves above the floor a minimum of 2 inches. 2. Embed sleeves in new concrete or step-core concrete and grout sleeves into existing concrete with epoxy grout. 3. Seal floor sleeves using fire-sealing systems approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. 4. Seal exterior wall and roof penetrations water tight. C. Patch both sides of wall penetrations cut for electrical equipment and raceways to seal against the passage of air, sound and fire. 1. Seal cable tray penetrations in fire rated walls using fire sealant bags approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. 2. Seal conduit penetrations in fire rated walls using fire-sealing caulk approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. 3. Seal conduit penetrations in non-rated walls using masonry materials that match the wall construction. 4. Fire seal between recessed outlet boxes located on opposite sides of a fire rated wall if the box openings are over 16 square inches and the boxes are less than 24 inches apart. 3.6 EXPANSION FITTINGS A. Provide expansion fittings at all building expansion joints. Expansion fittings shall be bonded to the raceway on both sides. B. Provide expansion fittings, in accordance with manufacture recommendations, in all areas subject to swings in temperature of more than 15 degrees C. C. Install expansion fittings in all locations were expected expansion difference is ¼", or more, between boxes 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide nameplates and labels in accordance with Article 2.6. 1. Laminated plastic labels shall be mechanically secured in place with sheet metal screws and/or bolts and nuts 2. Labels shall be neatly centered. Place labels in like positions on similar equipment. B. Color code wiring as noted in Section 260513 C. Color code junction boxes and box covers of emergency and fire alarm circuits with red paint. Color code junction boxes and box covers of temperature control circuits with blue paint. D. Mark junction box covers in indelible ink with the panel and breaker numbers of the circuits contained within. ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260533 - 9 E. Provide a 3" by 5" yellow "Warning Arc Flash Hazard" label on the outside of panels in 'occupant areas' - Brady Type 99454 or equivalent from another manufacturer. Center the label horizontally and vertically on outside of door. F. Provide a 4" by 6"'red "Danger Arc Flash and Shock Hazard" label on the outside of panels in areas open only to 'qualified personnel', and on the inside panel door of panels in 'occupant areas' - Brady Type 99459. Center label on gutter areas of distribution panels, centered above or below the directory of panels, and otherwise centered in other applications. In all cases, label will be no lower than 48" or above 84" AFF END OF SECTION 260533 ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS 260800 - 1 SECTION 260800 - ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Standard General and Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and other applicable Specification Sections including the Related Sections listed below, apply to this Section. 1.2 TESTS A. Perform the visual inspections, manual operations and tests on systems and equipment as described in Part 3, "Execution". B. Tests shall be performed and documented by the electrical contractor or a direct sub- contractor to the electrical contractor. 1.3 TEST REPORTS A. Provide written test reports, signed and dated, for all tests prior to acceptance of the tested equipment by the Owner. Test reports on Megger, dielectric absorption and high potential tests shall include the ambient temperature and relative humidity existing at the time of the tests. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 VISUAL INSPECTIONS A. Prior to any testing, perform visual inspections to verify the following: 1. The equipment is completely and properly installed 2. The equipment is free from damage and defects 3. Shipping blocks and restraints have been removed 4. Electrical terminations have been properly tightened 5. The equipment has been properly aligned 6. The equipment has been properly lubricated 7. The ventilation louvers are open and unobstructed 8. The equipment is ready to be tested 3.2 MANUAL OPERATION A. Prior to any testing, mechanical devices shall be exercised or rotated manually to verify that they operate properly and freely. 3.3 POWER CABLE TESTS A. Perform a continuity check and a 1,000 volt DC Megger test on 600 volt power cables No. 4 AWG and larger. ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS 260800 - 2 1. The Megger test shall be performed between each pair of conductors and from each conductor to ground. 2. The Megger test shall be performed for 15 seconds or until the insulation resistance value stabilizes. 3. The insulation resistance between conductors and from each conductor to ground shall be 100 megohms minimum in one minute or less. In addition, the lowest insulation resistance value shall not differ from the highest value by more than 20 percent. If Megger readings for a given circuit or feeder are above 1000 megohms, the 20% balance requirement may be waived. 3.4 CONTROL CABLE TESTS A. Perform a continuity check on control and instrumentation wiring. 3.5 SERVICE, DISTRIBUTION, AND MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT TESTS A. Perform a 1,000-volt Megger test on buses, motor starters and disconnect switches. This test may be combined with the feeder cable Megger test by testing the devices and terminated cables together. B. Perform a continuity check on motor control circuits and control panel internal wiring. C. Perform an operational test on the controls. D. Perform a continuity check and a 1,000-volt DC Megger test on 3 phase distribution and isolation transformers. 3.6 MOTOR TESTS A. Perform a 1,000-volt Megger test on 460 volt, 3 phase motors, and a 500 volt Megger test on 200 volt, 3 phase motors. B. “Bump” motors to verify proper direction of rotation. C. Run motors and check for vibration. 3.7 GROUNDING TESTS A. Perform a continuity check from equipment ground bus bars and ground lugs to the ground system. 3.8 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS A. Perform testing in accordance with NFPA 72-2015, Chapter 7. 3.9 COMMISSIONING A. Perform Commissioning activities per Related Sections above. END OF SECTION 260800 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 262000 - 1 SECTION 262000 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Standard General and Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and other applicable Specification Sections including the Related Sections listed below, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260513 - Medium, Low & Control Voltage Cables 2. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 3. Section 260533 - Electrical Materials and Methods PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PANELS A. Lighting and receptacle panels shall be of the voltage, amperage and number of positions shown, 3 phase, 4 wire, 22,000 amps AIC minimum unless shown otherwise, circuit breaker type, with main circuit breaker or main lugs only as shown, copper bus, fully rated neutral and ground bars, NEMA Type 1 enclosure and surface or flush trim as shown. In main circuit breaker panels, the main circuit breaker shall be separate from and not mounted in feeder breaker positions. Front cover shall be factory manufactured, UL/NRTL listed, one-piece, hinged "door-in-door" type with: Interior hinged door with hand-operated latch or latches as required to provide access to circuit breaker operating handles only; not energized parts. Outer hinged door to provide access to the entire closure including the deadfront and all wiring gutters. Outer door shall be kept securely closed with factory bolts, screws, clips or other fasteners to the panel box, requiring a tool for entry; hand operated latches are not acceptable. Both inner and outdoor doors shall open left to right. Include one-piece, removable, inner deadfront cover, independent of the panelboard cover. Door shall have concealed hinge, flush handle, lock with 2 keys and panel directory frame. All panel locks shall be keyed alike. Load center type panels are not acceptable. Provide circuit breakers as shown. Eaton Pow-R-Line 1 or 2, GE A series, Siemens P1 or P2, or Square D NF or NQOD. 2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt-on, quick make and quick break, thermal- magnetic type with trip indication, and shall be from the same manufacturer as the panel in which they are installed. Eaton, GE, Siemens or Square D. 1. Circuit breakers for power and distribution panelboards shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 35,000 amps RMS at 240 volts AC or 25,000 amps RMS at 480 volts AC. 2. Circuit breakers for lighting and receptacle panelboards shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 22,000 amps RMS at 240 volts AC or 25,000 amps RMS at 480 volts AC. LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 262000 - 2 3. Circuit breakers used for switching fluorescent lighting or for protecting air conditioning compressors shall be so listed. 4. Circuit breakers used for feeding electrical heat tracing shall include ground fault equipment protection rated to trip at 30 ma. 2.3 FUSES A. Fuses for general use shall be rated 250 or 600 volts as required, Class R, dual element type with a 200,000 amp AIC interrupting rating. Bussmann, Gould Shawmut or Littelfuse. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide No. 10 AWG wire to NEMA Type 6-20R receptacles serving freezers, window air conditioners or other large appliances. B. Where shown on the drawings, provide a separate neutral conductor for each single- phase branch circuit. The neutrals of these single-phase circuits shall not be shared or daisy-chained. C. Color code circuit breakers and disconnect switches of fire alarm systems and emergency circuits with red paint. Provide lock-on clips on the circuit breaker handles. D. Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 260500. E. Provide a detailed typed directory for all new and modified panelboards. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform testing in accordance with Section 260800 and submit a test report. 3.3 COMMISSIONING A. Perform Commissioning activities per Related Sections above. END OF SECTION 262000 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Standard General and Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and other applicable Specification Sections including the Related Sections listed below, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260513 - Medium, Low & Control Voltage Cables 2. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 3. Section 260533 - Electrical Materials and Methods PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES COLOR(S) A. Face color of wiring device(s) on the project shall be selected during the submittal phase of the project by the owner/architect. Wiring devices submitted need to offer the following standards colors at a minimum; white, ivory, almond, light almond, grey, brown, red and orange. 2.2 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Toggle switches shall be rated 120/277 volts, 20-amperes, single-pole, double-pole, 3- way or 4-way as shown, specification grade, extra-heavy duty, back and side wired. Arrow Hart, Bryant, Hubbell, Leviton or Pass & Seymour. 2.3 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Wall mounted occupancy sensors shall be rated 600 watts minimum, 180 degrees coverage, 300 sq. ft. minimum coverage, infrared type, heavy duty, specification grade, with SCR power switching devices, adjustable range or sensitivity, adjustable time delay, integral manual override switches, and suitable for mounting in single gang wall mounted boxes. Sensors with triac power switching devices are not acceptable. Heath, Leviton, Lutron, Pass & Seymour, Sensorswitch, Tork or Wattstopper. B. Ceiling mounted occupancy sensors shall be rated 1000 watts minimum, 180 degrees coverage, 1000 sq. ft. minimum coverage, infrared type, heavy duty, specification grade, with SCR power switching devices, adjustable range or sensitivity, adjustable time delay, and suitable for mounting in ceiling mounted boxes. Sensors shall utilize low voltage control circuits and be interlocked with the switch circuit for local auto/off control. Sensors with triac power switching devices are not acceptable. Heath, Leviton, Lutron, Pass & Seymour, Sensorswitch, Tork or Wattstopper. C. Dual technology occupancy sensors shall be rated 1000 watts minimum, 180 degrees coverage, 1000 sq. ft. minimum coverage, and combination ultrasonic/infrared type. WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 The ultrasonic component shall be of a frequency compatible with hearing aids .The overall occupancy sensor shall be heavy duty, specification grade, with SCR power switching devices, adjustable range or sensitivity, adjustable time delay, and suitable for mounting in ceiling mounted boxes. Sensors shall utilize low voltage control circuits and be interlocked with the switch circuit for local auto/off control. Sensors with triac power switching devices are not acceptable. Heath, Leviton, Lutron, Pass & Seymour, Sensorswitch, Tork or Wattstopper. 2.4 DUPLEX RECEPTACLES A. Duplex receptacles shall be rated 125 volts, 20 amps, 2-pole, 3-wire, NEMA Type 5- 20R, UL heavy duty, back and side wired, grounding type with nylon or Lexan bodies. Arrow-Hart, Bryant or Hubbell 5362, or Leviton or Pass & Seymour 5362A. 2.5 GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLES A. GFCI duplex receptacles shall be rated 125 volts, 20 amps, 2 pole, 3 wire straight blade type with nylon or Lexan bodies. GFCI receptacles shall trip when ground currents exceed 5 ma, shall trip in 25 milliseconds maximum, and shall have an interrupting rating of 2000 amps. Receptacles shall lock out (off) when the protection system fails. Arrow Hart, Bryant, Hubbell or Leviton. 2.6 TVSS AND CHILD RESISTANT DUPLEX RECEPTACLES A. TVSS and child resistant duplex receptacles shall be rated 125 volts, 20 amps, 2-pole, 3-wire straight blade type with nylon or Lexan bodies. TVSS receptacles shall clamp at 330 volts or less, and shall have visual indication of the failure of their protective circuitry. Child resistant receptacles shall require the simultaneous insertion of both line and neutral plug blades before power is applied to the receptacle contacts. Arrow Hart, Bryant, Hubbell or Leviton. 2.7 SPECIAL PLUGS AND RECEPTACLES A. Special receptacles shall be of the voltage, amperage, number of poles, number of wires, configuration, and NEMA Type shown, and specification grade, with nylon or Lexan bodies ivory faces. Arrow-Hart, Bryant, Hubbell, Leviton or Pass & Semour. Provide the required quantity of mating plugs when shown on the drawings. 2.8 COVER PLATES A. Except where unique cover plates are required (wall box dimmers, surface raceways, occupancy sensors, etc.), cover plates for switches and receptacles shall be of high quality Type 302 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Except where necessary to match existing receptacles, install receptacles with their ground slots below, or to the left, of the line and neutral slots. B. Provide No. 10 AWG wire to NEMA Type 6-20R receptacles serving freezers, window air conditioners or other large appliances. WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 C. Where shown on the drawings, provide a separate neutral conductor for each single- phase branch circuit. The neutrals of these single-phase circuits shall not be shared or daisy-chained. D. Receptacles installed in surface raceways being fed by multiple circuits, shall have adjacent receptacles from alternate circuits. E. Provide ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles for new and existing 120 volt duplex receptacles located outdoors, in toilet rooms and within 6 feet of water sources including sinks, cup sinks, fume hood sinks, faucets, hose bibs and water coolers. Standard receptacles protected by an upstream GFCI receptacle or a GFCI circuit breaker are not acceptable. F. Provide waterproof enclosures for receptacles located outdoors or when designated "waterproof" in special indoor applications. Enclosures shall remain watertight even while in use. Cantex, Carlon, Leviton or TayMac Corporation. G. Provide a nametag on the back of each cover plate of new and existing light switches and receptacles identifying the panel and circuit number feeding the device. Trace the existing circuits using an electronic circuit tracer if necessary. Nametags shall consist of black text permanently laminated to adhesive backed clear nylon or Mylar tape. Brother P-Touch. Embossed plastic tape labels are not acceptable. H. Color code junction boxes and box covers of emergency circuits with red paint. I. Mark junction box covers in indelible ink with the panel and breaker numbers of the circuits contained within. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The contractor shall perform testing in accordance with Specification Section 260800, and shall submit a test report. 3.3 COMMISSIONING A. Perform commissioning activities in accordance with Related Sections. END OF SECTION 262726 MOTOR CONTROLS 262900 - 1 SECTION 262900 - MOTOR CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Standard General and Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and other applicable Specification Sections including the Related Sections listed below, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260513 - Medium, Low & Control Voltage Cables 2. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 3. Section 260533 - Electrical Materials and Methods 4. Section 260800 - Electrical Acceptance Tests 1.2 SUMMARY A. Install the following equipment furnished by others. 1. Variable speed drives and variable speed motor controllers. 2. Motor controls that are shipped loose with packaged mechanical systems. B. Provide the following equipment as shown. 1. Disconnect switches PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS A. Combination motor starters shall be of the voltage and NEMA type shown, horsepower rated for the motors shown, 3 pole, fusible disconnect switch type, with "hand-off-auto" selector switch, red "run" pilot light, 120 volt control transformer with 3 amp maximum fuses, 2 N.O., 2 N.C. and ________________ auxiliary contacts, and a NEMA Type 1 enclosure. Provide fuse rejection kits, Class R dual element fuses and overload heaters sized in accordance with the motor nameplate. Allen-Bradley, Eaton, GE, Siemens or Square D. 2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A. Manual motor starters shall be of the voltage shown, horsepower rated for the motors shown, single select single, double-pole pole, single throw, toggle operated, with red "run" pilot light, motor overload heater, padlock provision and a NEMA Type 1 enclosure. Allen-Bradley, Eaton, GE, Siemens or Square D. 2.3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES MOTOR CONTROLS 262900 - 2 A. Disconnect switches shall be of the voltage and amperage shown, horsepower rated for motor applications, fusible or non-fusible as shown, 3 pole, NEMA Type HD heavy duty, in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure indoors or NEMA Type 3R enclosure outdoors. Provide fuse rejection kits and Class R dual element fuses in fusible disconnect switches. Provide early break auxiliary contacts in motor disconnect switches used with variable frequency drives. Disconnect switches shall be lockable in the open and closed positions. Allen-Bradley, Eaton, GE, Siemens or Square D. 2.4 MOTOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Motor control devices shall be heavy duty, rated for operation at 120 volts AC, and contained in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure indoors or a NEMA Type 3R enclosure outdoors. Pilot lights shall be "push-to-test" transformer type. Allen-Bradley, Eaton, GE, Siemens or Square D. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Motor starter hand-off-auto switches shall be wired so that in the "hand" position, the motor runs independently of automatic start/stop controls. Only the safety and modulating controls shall remain active. In the "auto" position, all start/stop controls shall be active. B. High temperature detectors (firestats), smoke detectors, low temperature detectors (freezestats), flow switches and other safety controls shall be energized and operational whenever the equipment they protect is operating. C. Motor starters shall be wired so that the motors automatically restart after a power disruption. Time delay relays shall be provided for large pumps and fans so that they can coast down before restarting after a momentary outage, and to prevent all of the large motors from restarting simultaneously. D. Motor controls installed below piping or in areas with fire protection sprinklers shall be protected by drip shields. E. Connect power factor correction capacitors between the motor starter contacts and the overload relays. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform testing in accordance with Specification Section 260800, and submit a test report. 3.3 COMMISSIONING A. Perform Commissioning activities per Related Sections above. 3.4 TRAINING A. Provide a qualified service technician from the Manufacturer's staff to provide training. MOTOR CONTROLS 262900 - 3 B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on equipment operation, start-up and shutdown, trouble-shooting, servicing and preventative maintenance procedures. Review the data contained in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals with Owner's personnel. Training shall occur separate from startup activities. 1. Provide 2 hours of training minimum. END OF SECTION 262900 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1 SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Standard General and Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and other applicable Specification Sections including the Related Sections listed below, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 260513 - Medium, Low & Control Voltage Cables 2. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 3. Section 260533 - Electrical Materials and Methods 4. Section 260800 - Electrical Acceptance Tests PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Refer to the Light Fixture Schedule for light fixture to be provided within the project. Equivalents may be submitted following the prior approval process. Light fixtures installed must either be schedule within the construction documents or approved within an addendum. B. Lighting fixtures shall be of specification grade, and shall be listed or labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other approved agency. Lighting fixtures shall be provided in accordance with the Fixture Schedule. C. Recessed lighting fixtures shall be thermally protected. 2.2 LED SOURCES A. Lumen Output – minimum initial lumen output of the luminaire shall meet or exceed the basis of design light fixture(s) included in the light fixture schedule. Lumens compared shall be those exiting the luminaire in the 0-90 degree zone – as measured by IESNA Standard LM-79-08 in an accredited lab. Exact tested lumen output shall be clearly noted on the submittals. B. Lumen output shall not decrease more than 20% over the minimum operational life of 50,000 hours. C. Individual LEDs shall be connected such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of one LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire. D. LED Boards shall be suitable for field maintenance or service from below the ceiling with plug-in connectors. LED Boards shall be upgradable. E. Light Color/Quality: INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2 1. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) range as per light fixture schedule, between 3500K, 4100K and 5000K shall be correlated to chromaticity as defined by the absolute (X,Y) coordinates on the 2-D CIE chromaticity chart. 2.3 POWER SUPPLY AND DRIVE A. Driver: Voltage as specified within the Light Fixture Schedule, UL Listed, CSA Certified, Sound Rated A+. Driver shall be > 80% efficient at full load across all input voltages. Input wires shall be a 18AWG solid copper minimum. B. Driver shall be suitable for full-range dimming. The luminaire shall be capable of continuous dimming without perceivable flicker over a range of 100% to 5% of rated lumen output with a smooth shut off function. Dimming shall be controlled by a 0-10V signal. C. Maximum stand-by power shall be 1 Watt. D. Driver disconnect shall be provided where required to comply with codes. E. Ballasts shall be rated for the ambient temperatures in which they are located. Outdoor fixtures shall be equipped with ballasts rated for reliable starting to -20 degrees F. Indoor fixtures located in areas with above normal ambient temperatures shall have ballasts rated at 65 degrees C minimum. F. The electronics/power supply enclosure shall be internal to the light fixture and be accessible per UL requirements. G. The surge protection which resides within the driver shall protect the luminaire from damage and failure for transient voltages and currents as defined in ANSI/IEEE C64.41 2002 for Location Category A, where failure does not mean a momentary loss of light during the transient event. 2.4 ELECTRICAL A. Operating Voltage – The luminaire shall operate form a 60 HZ +/-3 HZ AC line over a voltage ranging from 120 VAC to 277 VAC. The fluctuations of line voltage shall have no visible effect on the luminous output. The standard operating voltages are 120 VAC, and 277 VAC. B. Power Factor: The luminaire shall have a power factor of 90% or greater at all standard operating voltages and full luminaire output. C. THD: Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power line by a luminaire shall not exceed 20 percent at any standard input voltage. D. Surge Suppression: The luminaire shall include surge protection to withstand high repetition noise and other interference. E. RF Interference: The luminaire and associated on-board circuitry must meet Class A emission limits referred in Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 Non-Consumer requirements for EMI/RFI emissions. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3 F. Electrical connections between normal power and driver must be modular utilizing a snap fit connector. All electrical components must be easily accessible after installation and be replaceable without removing the fixture from the ceiling. G. All electrical components shall be RoHS compliant. 2.5 PHOTOMETRIC REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaire performance shall be tested as described herein. 1. Luminaire performance shall be judged against the specified minimum illuminance in the specified pattern for a particular application. 2. Luminaire lighting performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) for the minimum life expectancy. 3. The performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) by using the LED manufacturer’s data or the data from the IESNA Standard TM-21 test report, which ever one results in a higher level of lumen depreciation. B. The luminaire may be determined to be compliant photometrically, if: 1. The initial minimum illuminance level is achieved in 100% of the area of the specified lighting pattern. C. The measurements shall be calibrated to standard photopic calibrations. 2.6 THERMAL MANAGEMENT A. The thermal management (of the heat generated by the LEDs) shall be of sufficient capacity to assure proper operation of the luminaire over the expected useful life. B. The LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature for the expected life shall not be exceeded at the average operating ambient. C. The LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature for the catastrophic failure shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating ambient. D. The luminaire shall have an UL IC rating. E. The driver manufacturer’s maximum case temperature shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating ambient. Thermal management shall be passive by design. The use of fans or other mechanical devices shall not be allowed. 2.7 DESIGN QUALIFICATION TESTING A. Product submittals shall be accompanied by product specifications sheets or other documentation that includes the designed parameters as detailed in this specification. These parameters include (but not limited to): 1. Maximum power in Watts INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 4 2. L80 in hours, when extrapolated for the worse case operating temperature (section 2.2.6). TM21 report shall be submitted to demonstrate this. 3. Product submittals shall be accompanied by performance data this is derived in accordance with appropriate IESNA testing standards and tested in a laboratory that is NVLAP accredited for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Luminaire shall be tested per IESNA LM79-08. 2.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING A. Emergency lighting shall consist of LED or fluorescent emergency lighting fixtures or sealed beam emergency lighting units as shown. Chloride, Dual-Lite or Exide Lightguard. 1. LED or Fluorescent emergency lighting fixtures shall consist of normal light fixtures with their light sources integrally or remotely connected to a maintenance free, nickel cadmium battery pack, and solid-state battery charger. Minimum light output shall be 1100 lumens. The battery pack shall be sized for a minimum of 90 minutes of battery operation. The battery charger shall provide overload, short circuit, brownout and low battery voltage protection. The unit shall include self-diagnostic and self-exercising circuitry to exercise and test itself for 5 minutes every month and for 30 minutes every 6 months. The unit shall include a test/monitor module with status indicating lights mounted on a device plate suitable for mounting remotely from the fixture and battery pack in a single gang outlet box. 2. Sealed beam emergency lighting units shall consist of 6 volt, sealed beam, PAR36 lamps connected to a wall or ceiling mounted maintenance free nickel cadmium battery pack and solid state battery charger. The battery pack shall be sized for a minimum of 90 minutes of battery operation. The battery charger shall provide overload, short circuit, brownout and low battery voltage protection. The unit shall include self-diagnostic and self-exercising circuitry to exercise and test itself for 5 minutes every month and for 30 minutes every 6 months. The unit shall include a test/monitor module with status indicating lights. 2.9 EXIT SIGNS A. Exit signs shall be of the LED type. Fluorescent, electro luminescent light panel or self- powered luminous signs shall not be used. Chloride, Dual-Lite, Emergi-Lite, Exide Lightguard, Lightalarms, Lithonia or Sure-Lites. 1. LED’s shall be wired in parallel to prevent multi-lamp failure, and shall be concealed within the sign by a clear panel and red optical diffuser. Power consumption shall not exceed 2 watts per face. 2. Exit signs shall have white die cast aluminum or polycarbonate housings with universal mounting brackets; brushed aluminum stencil faces with red letters and multi-directional knockout arrows. 3. Exit signs shall be provided with emergency battery packs and battery chargers when required. Batteries shall be maintenance free nickel cadmium, and shall be mounted within the signs. 2.10 WARRANTY INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 5 A. The manufacturer shall provide a warranty against loss of performance and defects in materials and workmanship for the Luminaires for a minimum period of 5 years after acceptance of the Luminaires. Warranty shall cover all components comprising the luminaire. All warranty documentation shall be provided to customer prior to the first shipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install fixtures level, perpendicular and parallel with building lines. Lenses, reflectors and trims of fixtures shall be properly and uniformly aligned. B. Additional uni-strut shall be added between building structure utilizing adequate mechanical fasteners to install the light fixtures at the locations shown on the plans. C. Connect night light fixtures and emergency lighting fixtures to the hot (unswitched) side of lighting circuits. D. Provide an individual feed with ground conductor from a junction box to each lighting fixture. Lighting fixtures shall not be daisy-chained. E. Drops to suspended fixtures may be flexible metallic conduit, or manufactured wiring systems may be used where accessible. F. Provide green grounding conductors back to the panel ground for lighting circuits. Raceways shall not be used as grounding conductors. G. Fixtures shall have their exterior labels removed and shall be thoroughly cleaned. Burned out lamps shall be replaced. H. Mount sealed beam emergency lighting units where shown and aim their lamps to light the egress path as uniformly as possible. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A visual inspection shall be performed to verify cleanliness and alignment of the fixtures. Misalignment and light leaks shall be corrected, and rattles due to ventilation system vibration shall be eliminated. B. An operational test shall be performed to verify that all fixtures light properly, and are switched according to the drawings. 3.3 COMMISSIONING A. Perform Commissioning activities per Related Sections above. 3.4 TRAINING A. Provide a qualified service technician from the Manufacturer's staff to provide training. B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on equipment operation, start-up and shutdown, trouble-shooting, servicing and preventative maintenance procedures. Review the data INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 6 contained in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals with Owner's personnel. Training shall occur separate from startup activities. 1. Provide 2 hours of training minimum. END OF SECTION 265100 Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1 SECTION 321216 - PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Used) ASPHALT PAVING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASPHALT PAVING A. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements," unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes designed according to procedures in AI MS- 2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types." 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located and complying with ASTM D 3515 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes: a. Base Course: 1 inch b. Surface Course: . 1/2 inch B. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 or AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. . C. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #97 latex traffic marking paint. 1. Color: Match existing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PAVING A. Tack coat existing asphalt or concrete surfaces and allow tack coat to cure undisturbed. B. Place hot-mix asphalt to required grade, cross section, and thickness. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course. 1. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F C. Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to . 185 deg F D. Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. . E. Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041. F. Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. G. While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. Prof Bldg Renovation 19-022 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 2 H. Remove and restore paved areas that are defective or contaminated. I. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking or provide manufacturer product information indicating recommended asphalt curing period. J. Apply pavement-marking paint with mechanical equipment to a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils END OF SECTION 321216 . 1st Floor Break Room Stainless Steel Sink 1 Sink Non-Friable. Removal and Disposal of Sink. Visual Clearance. Roof (Exterior) EPDM Built-Up 2 Locations Approx. 1’x1’ Squares Material is considered Category I, Non- Friable for this project. To be removed external to the building and disposed of as ACW. Exact Locations and Size to be coordinated with GC. Contractor will be responsible for any MDEQ variance requests. Visual Clearance Required by Project IH. NOTE: Material quantities in table are estimates all quantities are to be confirmed by bidder prior to bid. All identified materials within designated containments are to be abated completely within the scope of work. 1.03 BID BREAKDOWN See Bid Form. Cellulose Synthetic 30% Non-fibrous (Other) 84 291507541-0084 Various/Black Fibrous Heterogeneous Carpets 5% None Detected 65% Cellulose Synthetic 30% Non-fibrous (Other) 85 291507541-0085 Tan/Various Fibrous Heterogeneous Carpets 5% None Detected 85% Cellulose Synthetic 10% Non-fibrous (Other) 86 291507541-0086 Gray/Tan/Blue Fibrous Heterogeneous Carpets 10% None Detected 85% Cellulose Synthetic 5% Non-fibrous (Other) 87 291507541-0087 Gray/Tan/Blue Fibrous Heterogeneous Carpets 10% None Detected 75% Cellulose Synthetic 15% Non-fibrous (Other) 88 291507541-0088 Red Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Exterior Brick 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 89 291507541-0089 Red Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Exterior Brick 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 90 291507541-0090 Red Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Exterior Brick 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 91 291507541-0091 Pink Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Exterior Brick Mortar 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 92 291507541-0092 Pink Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Exterior Brick Mortar 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 93 291507541-0093 Pink Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Exterior Brick Mortar 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 94 291507541-0094 Gray/Tan Fibrous Heterogeneous Exterior Caulk 3% None Detected 2% Cellulose Wollastonite 95% Non-fibrous (Other) 95 291507541-0095 Gray/Tan Fibrous Heterogeneous Exterior Caulk 2% None Detected 2% Cellulose Wollastonite 96% Non-fibrous (Other) 96 291507541-0096 Gray/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous Exterior Caulk 2% None Detected 2% Cellulose Wollastonite 96% Non-fibrous (Other) Initial report from: 01/04/2016 16:16:44 PLM - 1.65 Printed: 1/5/2016 8:56 AM Page 7 of 8 Gray/Beige Fibrous Homogeneous Linoleum 25% None Detected 10% Cellulose Glass 65% Non-fibrous (Other) 65 291507541-0065 Gray/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum 25% None Detected 10% Cellulose Glass 65% Non-fibrous (Other) 66 291507541-0066 Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Linoleum 25% None Detected 10% Cellulose Glass 65% Non-fibrous (Other) 67 291507541-0067 White/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous 2x2 Ceiling Tiles 40% None Detected 20% Cellulose Min. Wool 20% 20% Perlite Non-fibrous (Other) 68 291507541-0068 White/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous 2x2 Ceiling Tiles 40% None Detected 20% Cellulose Min. Wool 20% 20% Perlite Non-fibrous (Other) 69 291507541-0069 White/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous 2x2 Ceiling Tiles 40% None Detected 20% Cellulose Min. Wool 20% 20% Perlite Non-fibrous (Other) 70 291507541-0070 Gray/Red Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum 25% None Detected 10% Cellulose Glass 65% Non-fibrous (Other) 71 291507541-0071 Gray/Red Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum 25% None Detected 10% Cellulose Glass 65% Non-fibrous (Other) 72 291507541-0072 Gray/Red Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum 25% None Detected 10% Cellulose Glass 65% Non-fibrous (Other) 73 291507541-0073 Tan/Black Fibrous Heterogeneous Felt Membrane 10% Cellulose 90% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 74 291507541-0074 Tan/Black Fibrous Heterogeneous Felt Membrane 10% Cellulose 90% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 75 291507541-0075 Brown/Tan Fibrous Heterogeneous Felt Membrane 10% Cellulose 90% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 76 291507541-0076 Tan/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum 25% None Detected 5% Cellulose Synthetic 70% Non-fibrous (Other) 77 291507541-0077 Tan/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum 25% None Detected 10% Cellulose Synthetic 65% Non-fibrous (Other) 78 291507541-0078 Tan/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous Linoleum 25% None Detected 10% Cellulose Synthetic 65% Non-fibrous (Other) Initial report from: 01/04/2016 16:16:44 PLM - 1.65 Printed: 1/5/2016 8:56 AM Page 6 of 8 Fibrous Homogeneous 8x8 Terracotta Brick 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 47 291507541-0047 Red Fibrous Homogeneous 8x8 Terracotta Brick 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 48 291507541-0048 Brown/Red Fibrous Homogeneous 8x8 Terracotta Brick 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 49 291507541-0049 Gray/Tan Fibrous Homogeneous 8x8 Terracotta Brick None Detected Mortar 100% Non-fibrous (Other) 50 291507541-0050 Gray/Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 8x8 Terracotta Brick None Detected Mortar 100% Non-fibrous (Other) 51 291507541-0051 Gray/Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 8x8 Terracotta Brick None Detected Mortar 100% Non-fibrous (Other) 52 291507541-0052 White/Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Fire Brick 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 53 291507541-0053 White/Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Fire Brick 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 54 291507541-0054 White/Beige Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Fire Brick 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 55 291507541-0055 Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Fire Brick Mortar 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 56 291507541-0056 Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Fire Brick Mortar 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 57 291507541-0057 Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Fire Brick Mortar 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 58 291507541-0058 Red Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Chimney Brick 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 59 291507541-0059 Red Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Chimney Brick 100% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected Initial report from: 01/04/2016 16:16:44 PLM - 1.65 Printed: 1/5/2016 8:56 AM Page 5 of 8 Fibrous Heterogeneous 4" Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 5% Cellulose 95% Non-fibrous (Other) 32-Rubber Base 291507541-0032 Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 4" Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 100% Non-fibrous (Other) 32-Glue 291507541-0032A White Fibrous Homogeneous 4" Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) 33-Rubber Base 291507541-0033 Gray Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 4" Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 100% Non-fibrous (Other) 33-Glue 291507541-0033A Tan/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous 4" Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 3% Cellulose 97% Non-fibrous (Other) 34 291507541-0034 White/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous 2x2 Ceiling Tiles 40% None Detected 20% Cellulose Min. Wool 20% 20% Perlite Non-fibrous (Other) 35 291507541-0035 White/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous 2x2 Ceiling Tiles 40% None Detected 20% Cellulose Min. Wool 20% 20% Perlite Non-fibrous (Other) 36 291507541-0036 White/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous 2x2 Ceiling Tiles 40% None Detected 20% Cellulose Min. Wool 20% 20% Perlite Non-fibrous (Other) 37 291507541-0037 Gray Fibrous Homogeneous CMU 2% Wollastonite 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 38 291507541-0038 Gray Fibrous Homogeneous CMU 2% Wollastonite 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 39 291507541-0039 Gray Fibrous Homogeneous CMU 5% None Detected 2% Cellulose Wollastonite 93% Non-fibrous (Other) 40 291507541-0040 Gray Fibrous Homogeneous Concrete 3% None Detected 2% Cellulose Wollastonite 95% Non-fibrous (Other) Initial report from: 01/04/2016 16:16:44 PLM - 1.65 Printed: 1/5/2016 8:56 AM Page 4 of 8 19-Floor Tile 291507541-0019 Beige Fibrous Homogeneous 9x9 Floor Tile w/Mastic 97% Non-fibrous (Other) 3% Chrysotile 19-Mastic 291507541-0019A Black Fibrous Homogeneous 9x9 Floor Tile w/Mastic 92% Non-fibrous (Other) 8% Chrysotile 20-Floor Tile 291507541-0020 Beige Fibrous Homogeneous 9x9 Floor Tile w/Mastic 97% Non-fibrous (Other) 3% Chrysotile 20-Mastic 291507541-0020A Black Fibrous Homogeneous 9x9 Floor Tile w/Mastic 95% Non-fibrous (Other) 5% Chrysotile 21-Floor Tile 291507541-0021 Tan/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous 9x9 Floor Tile w/Mastic 2% Cellulose 96% Non-fibrous (Other) 2% Chrysotile 21-Mastic 291507541-0021A Brown/Black Fibrous Heterogeneous 9x9 Floor Tile w/Mastic 5% Cellulose 90% Non-fibrous (Other) 5% Chrysotile 22-Rubber Base 291507541-0022 Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 4"Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 100% Non-fibrous (Other) 22-Glue 291507541-0022A Tan Fibrous Homogeneous 4"Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 3% Cellulose 97% Non-fibrous (Other) 23-Rubber Base 291507541-0023 Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 4"Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 100% Non-fibrous (Other) 23-Glue 291507541-0023A Beige Fibrous Homogeneous 4"Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 3% Cellulose 97% Non-fibrous (Other) 24-Rubber Base 291507541-0024 Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 4"Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 100% Non-fibrous (Other) 24-Glue 291507541-0024A Tan Fibrous Homogeneous 4"Rubber Base None Detected w/Glue 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) 25 291507541-0025 Gray/Blue Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 floor Tile 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 26 291507541-0026 Gray/Blue Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 floor Tile 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 27 291507541-0027 Blue Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 floor Tile 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected Initial report from: 01/04/2016 16:16:44 PLM - 1.65 Printed: 1/5/2016 8:56 AM Page 3 of 8 Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 11-Texture 291507541-0011B White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 12-Drywall 291507541-0012 Tan/White Fibrous Heterogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 5% None Detected 3% Cellulose Glass 92% Non-fibrous (Other) 12-Joint Compound 291507541-0012A White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% Wollastonite 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 12-Tape 291507541-0012B Tan/Beige Fibrous Heterogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 20% Cellulose 80% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 13-Drywall 291507541-0013 Gray/White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 10% Cellulose 90% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 13-Mud 291507541-0013A White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 13-Texture 291507541-0013B Tan Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 14-Drywall 291507541-0014 Gray/White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 3% None Detected 2% Cellulose Glass 95% Non-fibrous (Other) 14-Mud 291507541-0014A White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 14-Texture 291507541-0014B Tan Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% None Detected 2% Cellulose Glass 96% Non-fibrous (Other) 15-Drywall 291507541-0015 White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 10% Cellulose 90% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 15-Mud 291507541-0015A White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 3% None Detected 2% Cellulose Glass 95% Non-fibrous (Other) Initial report from: 01/04/2016 16:16:44 PLM - 1.65 Printed: 1/5/2016 8:56 AM Page 2 of 8 65% Cellulose 35% Non-fibrous (Other) 05-Glue 291507541-0005A Brown Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 Ceiling Tile None Detected w/Glue 3% Cellulose 97% Non-fibrous (Other) 06-Ceiling Tile 291507541-0006 Brown Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 Ceiling Tile None Detected w/Glue 85% Cellulose 15% Non-fibrous (Other) 06-Glue 291507541-0006A Brown Fibrous Homogeneous 12x12 Ceiling Tile None Detected w/Glue 3% Cellulose 97% Non-fibrous (Other) 07-Drywall 291507541-0007 Gray/White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 10% None Detected 8% Cellulose Glass 82% Non-fibrous (Other) 07-Mud 291507541-0007A White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 07-Texture 291507541-0007B White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 08-Drywall 291507541-0008 Gray/White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% Cellulose 98% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected 08-Mud 291507541-0008A White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% None Detected 2% Cellulose Glass 96% Non-fibrous (Other) 08- Texture 291507541-0008B White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 2% None Detected 2% Cellulose Glass 96% Non-fibrous (Other) 09-Drywall 291507541-0009 White Fibrous Homogeneous Drywall/Mud/Texture 15% Cellulose 85% Non-fibrous (Other) None Detected Initial report from: 01/04/2016 16:16:44 PLM - 1.65 Printed: 1/5/2016 8:56 AM Page 1 of 8 suspect coatings. 88, 89, 90 Exterior Brick Red N/A N/A None Detected Exterior of the Building N/A 91, 92, 93 Exterior Brick Mortar Reddish N/A N/A None Detected Exterior of the Building N/A 34, 35, 36 2x2 Ceiling Tile White & Gray N/A N/A None Detected Basement Level N/A 37, 38, 39 CMU Gray N/A N/A None Detected Basement Exterior Walls N/A 40, 41, 42 Concrete Gray N/A N/A None Detected Foundation and Floors N/A 43, 44, 45 Fiberglass Insulation Cloth Wrap Cream N/A N/A None Detected Basement N/A TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS ……………………………………………………………………………...................... 20 TILELAYERS, TERRAZZO AND MARBLE FINISHERS .............................................................................................................................. 20 TILELAYERS, TERRAZZO AND MARBLE SETTERS ………………………….............................................................................................. 20 TRUCK DRIVERS ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 21